R6 EST3 Installation and Service Manual

EST3 Installation and Service Manual
P/N 270380 Rev 6.0 17AUG04
DEVELOPED BY
Edwards Systems Technology 6411 Parkland Drive Sarasota, FL 34243 (941) 7394300 Copyright 19962004. All rights reserved. This manual and the products it describes are copyrighted by Edwards Systems Technology, Inc. (EST). You may not reproduce, translate, transcribe, or transmit any part of this manual without express, written permission from EST. This manual contains proprietary information intended for distribution to authorized persons or companies for the sole purpose of conducting business with EST. If you distribute any information contained in this manual to unauthorized persons, you have violated all distributor agreements and we may take legal action.
COPYRIGHT NOTICE
TRADEMARKS
Microsoft and MS-DOS are registered trademarks, and Microsoft Mouse, Windows, Word, and Wordpad are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. This manual was designed and written by EST Technical Services, Documentation Department, Sarasota.
CREDITS
Content
Document history iv Important information v About this manual vii The EST3 library viii Related documentation x Chapter 1 System overview 1.1 System description 1.2 Audio subsystem description 1.6 Digital network subsystem 1.17 Foreign language support 1.22 Signature series devices 1.26 Network applications 1.29 Audio applications 1.33 Firefighter phone system 1.42 Security applications 2.1 Security equipment 2.2 Certificate installations 2.8 Multiple 3-MODCOM modules 2.12 Multiple site security and access 2.13 Multiple tenant security 2.16 Secure access 2.20 Access control applications 3.1 Access control equipment 3.2 Anti-passback 3.10 Central monitoring station 3.13 Common door access 3.15 Delayed egress 3.17 Elevator control 3.20 Emergency exit door 3.23 Handicap access door 3.25 Maglock peripherals 3.27 Multiple card readers 3.29 Muster 3.31 Power for continuous locks 3.34 Power for intermittent locks 3.36 Power from an AC source 3.38 Power from a remote source 3.41 Remote controls 3.44 Two-person rule 3.46 Centralized audio applications 4.1 Equipment required 4.2 ATCP Amplifier Terminal Panel Cabinet 4.3 ATP Amplifier Terminal Panel 4.6 Audio amplifiers 4.8 URSM Universal Riser Supervisory Module 4.10
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Content ATP and 3-ATPINT installation 4.13 ATP external battery charger 4.20 Amplifier backup 4.22 Branch speaker wiring 4.25 Troubleshooting 4.27 Chapter 5 Installation 5.1 Installation overview 5.2 Creating an initial startup version of the project database 5.5 System installation sequence 5.7 Preliminary field wiring testing 5.8 Chassis installation in EIA 19-inch racks 5.11 ATCK Attack Kit for cabinets 5.12 Local rail module installation 5.13 3-MODCOM Modem Communicator module 5.15 3-SAC Security Access Control module 5.29 AC power and DC battery wiring 5.30 Connecting the PT-1S impact printer 5.34 Adjusting amplifier output levels 5.37 Connecting a CDR-3 Zone Coder for coded tone output 5.38 Connecting an external modem for use with the Remote Diagnostics Utility 5.41 Running the RPM and distributing profiles 5.43 Power-up and testing 6.1 Cabinet power-up procedure 6.3 Runtime and system errors 6.4 Initial and reacceptance test procedures 6.6 Control and emergency communications equipment testing 6.7 Detector, input module, and output module testing 6.18 Initiating device testing 6.21 Notification appliance testing 6.23 Record of completion 6.24 Preventive maintenance 7.1 General 7.2 Preventive maintenance schedule 7.3 Signature device routine maintenance tips 7.5 Signature detector cleaning procedure 7.6 System trouble and maintenance log 7.7 Service and troubleshooting 8.1 Overview 8.3 Hardware problems 8.5 Modules 8.7 Audio components 8.21 Pseudo point descriptions 8.25 Signature data circuit (SDC) operation 8.38 Basic Signature data circuit troubleshooting 8.40 Signature controller modules 8.50 Device troubleshooting 8.52 Signature diagnostic tools 8.54 DSDC status 8.67 Addressable analog diagnostic tools 8.72
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Chapter 8
ii
Content 3-AADC1 Addressable Analog Driver Controller 8.76 Addressable analog device troubleshooting 8.77 Wiring problems 8.79 Appendix A System addresses A.1 Address format A.2 LRM addresses A.4 Control / display module addresses A.9 Device addresses A.11 System calculations B.1 Network data riser limits B.2 Signature data circuit wire length B.5 24 Vdc NAC wire length B.12 25 or 70 Vrms NAC wire length B.15 Addressable analog circuit wire length B.17 Cabinet battery B.18 SAC bus power B.19 CPU memory B.24 Fiber optic cable worksheet B.26 Listing requirements C.1 NFPA standards C.2 Minimum requirements for UL security applications C.3 UL and ULC requirements C.10 Glossary Y.1 Index Z.1
Appendix B
Appendix C
Y Z
iii
Content
Document history
Date 17JUL96 31MAR97 Revision 1.0 1.5 Reason for change Initial release Revised: detector cleaning procedure; CAB & RCC Cabinets; download wiring; Compatibility info; Power supply specifications; CPU wiring; System addressing; 3-IDC8/4 jumpers & wiring Added: power supply location information; 3-SSDC Filter Board; Humidity limits, Isolator limits. 14DEC98 2.0 Revised: 3-ASU & 3-RS485 specifications; Battery shelf data; Module current draw; CPU network wiring Added: 3-AADC module; CDR-3 Zone Coder; Centralized audio components; Buffered RS-232 Communications Cable; PT-1S switch settings; 3-FIB information; 3-TAMP(5); RACCR Enclosure; SIGA-APS Power Supply; SIGA-AAxx Audio Amplifiers. 21OCT99 30AUG01 29OCT01 17AUG04 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 Incorporated changes concurrent with software release version 1.5. Revised structure to reduce duplicate information. Revised to incorporate security and access control integration. Added Canadian security standards to Related Documents and removed "Appendix D: System Compatibility". Revised per SDU release 3.3, 3.4, and 3.5.
iv
Content
Important information
Limitation of liability
This product has been designed to meet the requirements of NFPA Standard 72; Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Standard 864; and Underwriters Laboratories of Canada, Inc., Standard ULC S527. Installation in accordance with this manual, applicable codes, and the instructions of the Authority Having Jurisdiction is mandatory. EST shall not under any circumstances be liable for any incidental or consequential damages arising from loss of property or other damages or losses owing to the failure of EST products beyond the cost of repair or replacement of any defective products. EST reserves the right to make product improvements and change product specifications at any time. While every precaution has been taken during the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents, EST assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions.
FCC warning
This equipment can generate and radiate radio frequency energy. If this equipment is not installed in accordance with this manual, it may cause interference to radio communications. This equipment has been tested and found to comply within the limits for Class A computing devices pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These rules are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when this equipment is operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment is likely to cause interference, in which case the user at his own expense, will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.
Industry Canada information

Note: The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety requirements. Industry Canada does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the users satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.
Content
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
Caution: Users should not attempt to make such connections
themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate
Note: The Load Number (LN) assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a telephone loop, which is used by the device, to prevent overloading. The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirements that the sum of the Load Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 100.
vi
Content
About this manual

This manual provides information on how to properly install, wire, and maintain the EST3 integrated system and related components.
Organization
Chapter 1: System overview: a descriptive overview of the components and subsystems that comprise an EST3 system. Chapter 2: Security applications: covers security applications. This chapter contains block diagrams that show the components required to create specific security systems. Chapter 3: Access control applications: covers access control applications. Like Chapter 2, this chapter contains block diagrams and descriptions of specific access control systems. Chapter 4: Installation: installation information for system components and applications that supplement the instructions provided on individual component installation sheets. Chapter 5: Power-up and testing: information and procedures necessary to perform initial system power-up and acceptance testing. Chapter 6: Preventive maintenance: lists the required scheduled maintenance items and procedures. Chapter 7: Service and troubleshooting: a comprehensive set of procedures and tables to aid certified technical personnel in servicing and troubleshooting the system. Appendices A, B, and C provide supplementary information about system addressing, calculations, and compatibility.
Safety information
Important safety admonishments are used throughout this manual to warn of possible hazards to persons or equipment.
Caution: Cautions
are used to indicate the presence of a hazard which will or may cause damage to the equipment if safety instructions are not followed or if the hazard is not avoided.
WARNING: Warnings
are used to indicate the presence of a hazard which will or may cause personal injury or death, or loss of service if safety instructions are not followed or if the hazard is not avoided.
vii
Content
The EST3 library

EST3 documents
A library of documents and multi-media presentations supports the EST3 life safety system. A brief description of each is provided below. EST3 Installation and Service Manual (P/N 270380): Gives complete information on how to install and service the EST3 hardware. The manual also includes installation information on selected Signature Series components. EST3 Installation Sheets (P/N 3100051): Is a convenient package of all EST3 component installation sheets. This manual shows you the jumper settings and terminal connections for each component. SDU Online Help (P/N 180653): Provides full online support for configuring and programming a system using the EST3 System Definition Utility program. EST3 System Operation Manual (P/N 270382): Provides detailed information on how to operate the system and system components. EST3 International Installation Supplement Manual (P/N 270925): Provides information specific to systems installed outside the United States and Canada. EST3 Smoke Management Application Manual (P/N 270913): Provides information for designing, programming, and testing an EST3 smoke control system. EST3 Users Self-Study Course (P/N 270684): Contains a selfpaced manual and accompanying video. The course is designed for building personal, security guards, firefighters, and other individuals that may be required to operate the system.
Other documents
In addition to documents in the EST3 library, you may find the following documents useful. Signature Series Intelligent Smoke and Heat Detectors Applications Bulletin (P/N 270145): Provides additional applications information on the Signature series smoke and heat detector applications. Signature Series Component Installation Manual (P/N 270497): Contains detailed mounting and wiring information for all Signature series devices.
viii
Content
Speaker Application Guide (P/N 85000-0033): Provides information on the placement and layout of speakers for fire alarm signaling and emergency voice communications. Strobe Applications Guide (P/N 85000-0049): Provides information on the placement and layout of strobes for fire alarm signaling.
ix
Content
Related documentation
National Fire Protection Association 1 Batterymarch Park P.O. Box 9101 Quincy, MA 02269-9101 NFPA 70 National Electric Code NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code NFPA 11 Low-Expansion Foam Systems NFPA 11A Medium- and High-Expansion Foam Systems NFPA 12 Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems NFPA 13 Sprinkler Systems NFPA 15 Water Spray Fixed Systems for Fire Protection NFPA 16 Deluge Foam-Water Sprinkler and FoamWater Spray Systems NFPA 17Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 333 Pfingsten Road Northbrook, IL 60062-2096 UL 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes UL 217 Smoke Detectors, Single & Multiple Station UL 228 Door Closers/Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications UL 346 Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 464 Audible Signaling Appliances UL 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 864 Standard for Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 1481 Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 1638 Visual Signaling Appliances UL 1971 Visual Signaling Appliances
Content
Underwriters Laboratories of Canada

7 Crouse Road Scarborough, ON Canada M1R 3A9
Canadian Electrical Code Part 1 ULC S527 Standard for Control Units for Fire Alarm Systems ULC S524 Standard for the Installation of Fire Alarm Systems ULC S536 Standard for the Inspection and Testing of Fire Alarm Systems ULC S537 Standard for the Verification of Fire Alarm Systems ULC ORDC6931994 Central Station Fire Protective Signaling System and Services CAN/ULC-S301 Standard for Central and Monitoring Station Burglar Alarm Systems CAN/ULC-S302 Standard for Installation and Classification of Burglar Alarm Systems for Financial and Commercial Premises, Safes, and Vaults CAN/ULC-S303 Standard for Local Burglar Alarm Units and Systems CAN/ULC-S304 Standard for Central and Monitoring Station Burglar Alarm Units PLUS: Requirements of state and local building codes and the
local authority having jurisdiction.
xi
Content
xii
Chapter 1
System overview
Summary
This chapter provides a descriptive overview of the components and subsystems that comprise a system.
Content System description 1.2 System features 1.3 Minimum system requirements 1.4 System construction 1.4 Audio subsystem description 1.6 Network audio riser wiring 1.6 Amplifiers 1.7 Backup amplifiers 1.8 3-ASU Audio Source Unit 1.9 Firefighter phone 1.15 Digital network subsystem 1.17 Network data riser wiring 1.17 Class B network data risers 1.17 Class A network data risers 1.18 Download connections 1.19 Downloading database files over the network 1.19 Foreign language support 1.22 Printer use with foreign languages 1.22 Bilingual language support 1.22 Display device language support 1.23 Signature series devices 1.26 Network applications 1.29 Network layout 1.29 Feature/function domain 1.30 Audio applications 1.33 Audio channels 1.34 Manual audio zone selection 1.38 Messages 1.39 Firefighter phone system 1.42 Five phone off-hook limit 1.42 One phone per circuit 1.42 Five phones per circuit 1.43 Limited number of portable telephone handsets 1.43
1.1
System overview
System description
EST3 is designed using modular hardware and software components to facilitate rapid configuration, installation, and testing. Most network components are provided as local rail modules (LRMs) that plug into the rail chassis assemblies. Rail chassis assemblies are available to meet most any application. Rail modules are used for data processing, intrapanel communication of command/control data, response data, audio signal processing, and power distribution. Each rail module provides an interface to support a control/display module that can be mounted on the front of the module. Most field wiring is terminated using removable terminal strips for easy installation and servicing of modules. Cabinets are available in a variety of sizes. The smallest (CAB5), in addition to the central processor module and primary power supply module, supports 2 rail modules and 3 control/display modules. The largest, the CAB21 supports as many as 18 rail modules and 19 control/display modules. An EST3 cabinet can be configured as a stand-alone system or as part of a network which supports up to 64 cabinets on a peer-to-peer Class A or B token ring network. Below is a partial list of local rail modules that can be incorporated into a system: Central Processor module (CPU). One is required for each panel. Several models of CPU are available. See the current compatibility lists for details. Primary Power Supply module (3-PPS/M, 3-BPS/M, or 3-BBC/M) one required for each panel) 3-LCD(XL) Display module Control/display modules as required 3-BPS/M Booster Power Supply module 3-MODCOM Modem Communicator module 3-SAC Security Access Control module 3-SSDC1 and 3-SDDC1 Signature Driver Controller module 3-AADC1 Analog Addressable Driver Controller module 3-EADC Addressable Analog Device Controller 3-IDC8/4 Initiating Device Circuit module 3-OPS Off-Premises Signaling module 3-ZAxx Zoned Amplifier modules
1.2
System overview
The audio and firefighter phone functions use a different hardware format, providing operator controls and storage for the microphone and telephone handset in a chassis configuration.
System features
Each cabinet in the system provides local control, display, power supply, and communication functions. Each cabinet has the following capacities: 10 addressable device circuits (Signature and addressable analog combined) 120 traditional input / output zones 4 Class B (2 Class A) security / access control communication (SAC) busses 10 modem / dialer cards, each with two telephone lines 2 RS-232 external peripheral device ports 456 LED annunciation points 342 input switches Firefighter telephone Custom programmability and user-friendly front panel Class B (Style B), initiating device circuits (IDC) Event reporting by alarm, trouble, supervisory, or monitor mode and message display routing Dead front construction Supports networking - up to 64 nodes may be connected in a regenerative Class A or Class B token ring Fast response time, less than three seconds from initial alarm to device activation on a fully loaded system over the network Flash memory on controller modules to facilitate quick firmware upgrades Supports 255 security partitions Multiplexed eight-channel digital audio system Transient protected field wiring Class B (Style Y) or Class A notification appliance circuits Ground fault detection by panel, Signature data circuit, and Signature modules Switch mode power supply
In addition, the EST3 system has these global features:
1.3
System overview
Copper or fiber network and audio communications Application and firmware downloading over the network or from a single point Network-wide control routing Form C alarm, supervisory, and trouble relay contacts
Refer to the release notes for the latest information regarding specifications and capabilities.
Minimum system requirements

NFPA 72 system classification Protected Premises (Local) Required control equipment Cabinet with a CPU Central Processor module, one 3-LCD Main LCD Display, one 3-PPS/M Primary Power Supply and Monitor, appropriate batteries, plus appropriate initiating device circuits and notification appliance circuits Add a 3-OPS Off Premises Signal module or a correctly configured and programmed 3-MODCOM Modem Communicator module to the protected premises system
Auxiliary or Remote Station or Proprietary Protected Premises
System construction
The EST3 system is assembled in layers as shown in Figure 1-1. The cabinet (1) houses all the system components. A variety of cabinets are available for as few as 5 and as many as 21 modules. A CAB14 cabinet is illustrated in Figure 1-1. Mounted directly to the cabinets are the rail chassis assemblies (2), of which there are three types: rail, audio, and audio with telephone. The most common chassis is the rail chassis, which provides mounting and electrical connections for the local rail modules (LRMs) (4). Mounted on the rear of the chassis are the cabinet power supplies (3). The local rail modules (4) are the specialized cards that provide an interface between the CPU and the field wiring. The front of any rail module can support a control/display module (5), providing customized operator controls and annunciators. Completing the EST3 CAB series cabinet assembly are the inner (6) and outer (7) doors. The RCC cabinets use a single outer door.
1.4
System overview
Figure 1-1: Exploded CAB series cabinet equipment installation
1.5
System overview
Audio subsystem description

The audio subsystem consists of a variety of signal sources, integral amplifiers, and sophisticated control software. The 3-ASU Audio Source Unit is available with the optional 3-FTCU Firefighter Telephone Control Unit as the model 3-ASU/FT. The ASU/FT is the only audio equipment required at the fire command control center. Zoned audio amplifiers are distributed throughout the system and provide the de-multiplexing, switching, amplification and circuit supervision.
Network audio riser wiring

A digital network audio riser consisting of a single pair (Class B) or two pairs (Class A) of wires connect all amplifiers together. Since the digital signals are multiplexed, any of 8 independent audio sources can be directed to any amplifier connected to the network. All command and control signals for the audio system are distributed over the network data riser.
CPU TB2
AUDIO A IN AUDIO A OUT AUDIO AUDIO B IN B OUT
CPU TB2
AUDIO A IN AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO A OUT B IN B OUT
CPU TB2
CPU TB2
From AUDIO DATA PRIMARY on 3-ASU
Figure 1-2: Class B network audio riser wiring
1.6
System overview
CPU TB2
CPU TB2
CPU TB2
CPU TB2
From AUDIO DATA PRIMARY connections on 3-ASU
Figure 1-3: Class A network audio riser wiring
Amplifiers
Amplifiers are designed to feed a single audio zone and provide an integral 24 Vdc visual notification appliance circuit. Amplifier modules are available in 20-, 40-, and 95-watt versions, with each amplifier providing a single supervised Class B or A audio output circuit. The amplifier is configurable for either 25 Vrms or 70 Vrms output. An independent supervised Class B or Class A, 24 Vdc, 3.5 Amp notification appliance circuit (NAC) is also provided on the 20- and 40-watt amplifiers to drive notification appliances. In addition, automatic backup amplifiers can be added on a switched common backup configuration. Each audio power amplifier has an integral demultiplexer, making the 8 audio channels available to the amplifiers input, as directed by the system programming. Each amplifier also contains circuitry that handles routine signal processing functions such as channel priority. The amplifiers output is a dedicated, supervised, 25-, 70-Vrms speaker circuit, which covers one audio zone in the protected facility. Figure 1-4 is an example of an enclosure with four zone amplifiers and a backup amplifier. In response to an alarm, selected audio amplifiers have been connected to the required audio channels. Note that three different audio signals are being broadcast simultaneously.
1.7
System overview
Network Data Riser Network Audio Riser
Equipment Enclosure Central Processor Module
Local Rail Bus
Backup Amplifier
Zoned Amplifier
Zoned Amplifier
Zoned Amplifier
Zoned Amplifier
[AMPLIFIER_001.CDR]
Page
Page
EVAC
Alert
Figure 1-4: Normal amplifier operation
Possible fault condition Amplifier loses communication with Central Processor module
Amplifier operation under alarm conditions If the panel is configured for stand-alone operation, the amplifier automatically switches to the EVAC channel and outputs its 1 kHz temporal tone when the panel detects an alarm. If the panel is not configured for stand-alone operation, the amplifier will not output any signal.
Panel loses communication with network data riser Panel loses communication with network audio riser
Amplifier switches to the EVAC or alert channel only in response to the local panels programming uses the default EVAC message. Amplifier switches to the EVAC or alert channel in response to the system programming. For EVAC the amplifier uses its 1 kHz temporal tone. For Alert the amplifier uses its 1 kHz 20 bps tone.
Backup amplifiers
In the event of an amplifier failure (not a field wiring problem), the backup amplifier automatically replaces the failed amplifier, as shown in Figure 1-5.
1.8
System overview
Network Data Riser Network Audio Riser
Equipment Enclosure Central Processor Module
Local Rail Bus
Backup Amplifier
Zoned Amplifier
Zoned Amplifier
Zoned Amplifier
Zoned Amplifier
[AMPLIFIER_002.CDR]
Page
Page
EVAC
Alert
Figure 1-5: Single amplifier failure Note: The backup amplifier will back up a failed amplifier if it was being used for Page, EVAC, or Alert. It will not back up an amplifier being used on an Auxiliary or General channel.
The amplifier failure caused the backup amplifier to automatically connect to the same audio source as the failed amplifier. The output of the backup amplifier replaced the output of the failed amplifier.
Note: The
backup amplifier will not replace an amplifier that has detected a field wiring problem to prevent the amplifier from driving into a shorted circuit.
3-ASU Audio Source Unit

The 3-ASU is the source of the network audio riser. Available audio sources are local and remote voice PAGE functions, the firefighter telephone PAGE function, and an auxiliary audio input for non-emergency paging, etc. An integral tone generator database is provided for the EVAC, ALERT and other functions. Alternately, the 3-ASUs integral digital voice message playback unit can simultaneously provide up to 8 different prerecorded audio messages that may be assigned to any channel. The multiplexer within the 3-ASU converts and compresses the real-time audio signal and converts it to a digital format. The output of the digital message playback unit and the integral tone generator database is already in the digital format. The 8 signal sources in digital format are then combined together as selected by the system designer using a multiplexer. This makes up the network audio riser signal.
1.9
System overview
Local Mic Remote Mic Firefighter's Telephone Auxiliary Input
MULTIPLEXER
Audio Signals
DIGITAL MESSAGE PLAYBACK UNIT
NETWORK AUDIO RISER

(8 Digitized Audio Channels)
TONE / MESSAGE DATABASE
Digital Signals
E3THR1.CDR
Figure 1-6: ASU Signal Flow
The amplifiers at the remote-panels extract the audio signals from the network riser, amplify it and send it to the speakers.
Figure 1-7: Amplifier Signal Flow Audio signal priority
During system configuration, each of the eight available audio channels is assigned one of the five available attributes listed in Table 1-1. The Page, and Auxiliary attributes may only be assigned to a single channel. The General attribute may be assigned to up to four channels.
Table 1-1: Network audio channel parameters Channel attribute PAGE EVAC ALERT AUXILIARY GENERAL Priority 1 2 3 4 5
1.10
System overview
Each channel attribute has a priority level associated with it. When more than one channel is commanded to source a given amplifier, the amplifier will connect to the source having the highest priority. The Page channel will only go active when the microphone push-to-talk switch is pressed.
Special audio source unit page modes
The front panel of the ASU offers four special page mode switches: All Call, EVAC, Alert, and All Call Minus. These switches provide instantaneous switching of the page signal to the most frequently contacted areas of the building. The special page modes do not require any source switching by the zoned audio amplifiers. When a special page mode switch is activated, the signal content of the eight outgoing audio channels is modified. Figure 1-8 illustrates this principle. In the normal page mode, the eight audio signal sources are each connected to a separate audio channel, as represented by a at the intersection of the signal source and the audio channel, shown at the lower left of Figure 1-8. Each audio channel is represented as a vertical line in this figure. The eight audio channels are actually multiplexed together and distributed over a common pair of wires called the network audio riser. The figure shows the system in the normal page mode, with the zoned audio amplifiers processing EVAC signals on the 1st and 3rd levels, a page signal on the 2nd level, and the alert signal on the 4th level.
1.11
System overview
8 Multiplexed Audio Channels on a 2 Wire Circuit
POWER AMP
25/70 VRMS Supervised Audio Circuit
LOCAL TONE GENERATOR
ALERT
POWER AMP
EVAC
POWER AMP
Network Data Riser
PAGE
POWER AMP

E3THR3.CDR
EVAC
3-ASU Signal Sources
Network Audio Signals

Page Evac Alert Auxiliary General 1 General 2 General 3 General 4
Audio Source Unit = Audio Signal to Audio Channel Connection
Normal Mode Audio Signal Distribution During Special Paging Modes

Page Evac Alert Auxiliary General 1 General 2 General 3 General 4 Page Evac Alert Auxiliary General 1 General 2 General 3 General 4 Page Evac Alert Auxiliary General 1 General 2 General 3 General 4 Page Evac Alert Auxiliary General 1 General 2 General 3 General 4
ALL CALL Mode
Page to EVAC Mode
Page to ALERT Mode
ALL CALL MINUS Mode
Figure 1-8: Audio Source Unit Special Page Mode Signal Flow
1.12
System overview
The All Call mode is used to send a page to the entire facility. When the All Call switch is activated, the Audio Source Unit is put into the all call mode. In this mode, the zoned audio amplifiers do not all transfer to the page channel. Rather, the Audio Source Unit redirects the page signal source to all the audio channels. Figure 1-8 shows the all call page source to audio channel connections in the lower left corner. Note that all channels receive the same signal. Any amplifier on the system, regardless of the audio channel selected, will receive the page. Any amplifiers that were previously idle will power up and receive the page. The Page to EVAC mode is used to send a page to the areas automatically receiving the evacuation signal. Activating the EVAC switch causes the Audio Source Unit to enter the page to EVAC mode. In this mode, the zoned audio amplifiers connected to the EVAC channel do not transfer to the page channel. Rather, the Audio Source Unit redirects the page signal source to the EVAC channel. Figure 1-8 shows the page to EVAC mode page source to EVAC channel connections. The page and EVAC audio channels both receive the page signal. Any amplifier connected to either the page or EVAC audio channels will receive the page. The alert, auxiliary and general channels are connected to their respective signal sources, as in the normal mode. The Page to Alert mode is used to send a page to the areas automatically receiving the alert signal. Activating the Alert switch causes the Audio Source Unit to enter the page to alert mode. In this mode, the zoned audio amplifiers connected to the alert channel do not transfer to the page channel. Rather, the Audio Source Unit redirects the page signal source to the alert channel. Figure 1-8 shows the page to alert mode page source to alert channel connections. The page and alert audio channels both receive the page signal. Any amplifier connected to either the page or alert audio channels will receive the page. Any amplifiers that were previously idle will power up and receive the page. The EVAC, auxiliary and general channels are connected to their respective signal sources, as in the normal mode. The All Call Minus mode is used to send a page to all areas NOT automatically receiving the EVAC or alert signals. In high rise applications, all call minus is an effective way to quickly select stairwells. Activating the All Call Minus switch causes the Audio Source Unit to enter the all call minus mode. In this mode, the zoned audio amplifiers connected to the auxiliary and general channels do not transfer to the page channel. Rather, the Audio Source Unit redirects the page signal source to the auxiliary and four general channels. Figure 1-8 shows the all call minus mode page source to auxiliary and general channel connections. The
1.13
System overview
page, auxiliary and four general audio channels all receive the page signal. Any amplifier connected to the page, auxiliary or general audio channels will receive the page. The EVAC and alert channels are connected to their respective signal sources, as in the normal mode.
Automatic messaging
One of the features of the 3-ASU Audio Source Unit is the method used to monitor the integrity of the digital audio system. When an audio messaging system is configured, default audio messages are recorded for the Evacuation and Alert channels. The text of default messages should be generic in nature, and should not include location-specific instructions. When the system is in the normal condition, the 3-ASU continuously transmits default messages over the network audio riser. The zone amplifiers use the default messages to verify their operational integrity, as well as the integrity of the riser wiring. When an alarm is detected, the evacuation and alert message channels are selected by the amplifiers in the appropriate areas in the facility, as directed by the system rules. If a specific evacuation message has been programmed to play in response to the alarm, it is sent out over the evacuation channel. Location specific evacuation messages contain information and instructions that should only be used for a specific alarm location. Should a second alarm from another location be received, the evacuation message playing as a result of the first alarm may not be appropriate for the second alarm.
Note: In the event of conflicting messaging instructions caused
by multiple alarm events, the system will play the default evacuation message, whenever two or more different messages are requested at the same time on the evacuation channel. Automatic message processing is illustrated in Figure 1-9. By reverting back to the generic default evacuation message in multiple alarm location scenarios, no one can be misdirected by the wrong message. Default messages also play during alarms when no location specific message has been requested.
1.14
System overview
83 82
80TH Floor, West W ing Evacuation Message
81 80 79 78 77
An emergency has been reported in the building. Remain where you are and await further instructions.
Generic Default Alert Message
A fire has been reported on the west wing of the 80TH floor.
Location Specific Messages
33 32
30TH Floor, North Wing Evacuation Message
31 30 29 28 27
A fire has been reported on the north wing of the 30TH floor.
Generic (Default) Evacuation Message

Generic Default Evacuation Message
A fire has been reported in the building. Please relocate to a safe area using the stairs. Do not use the elevators.
The generic (default) evacuation message plays when multiple location specific messages have been requested by the system or when no location specific message has been specified.
[3MESSAGE.CDR]
Figure 1-9: Automatic Message Processing
Firefighter phone
The 3-FTCU contains a master telephone handset that provides an analog telephone riser for totally independent 2-way communications between the fire command station and Firefighter telephone stations / jack telephones installed at strategic locations throughout the protected facility. Taking a telephone off-hook or plugging into a telephone jack generates a visual and audible incoming call signal at the fire command station. The individual originating the call hears a tone
1.15
System overview
until the handset is connected to the system. The fire command station operator manually connects the incoming phone call to the phone riser to complete the call. Up to five remote telephones may be connected to the riser simultaneously. The fire command center operator can also use the telephone circuit as a page source, permitting paging via the telephone system.
1.16
System overview
Digital network subsystem

Network data riser wiring
The network data riser provides the communication path between each CPU module (3-CPUx or 3-ANNCPUx) installed in the system. Each CPU module has two bi-directional RS-485 ports (Network A and Network B) that are used to connect the network data riser wiring. Network B is isolated from ground and Network A is not. The correct method for running the network data riser is to connect the isolated Network B port on one CPU module to the non-isolated Network A port on another. Any remote CPU modules connected to a local CPU modules Network B port is considered to be downstream from the local CPU module. Any remote CPU modules connected to a local CPU modules Network A port is considered upstream from the local CPU module. Additionally, next and previous refer to the order in which remote CPU modules are electrically connected to a local CPU module. Previous refers to the remote CPU module whose isolated Network B port connects to the local CPU modules non-isolated Network A port. Next refers to the remote CPU module whose non-isolated Network A port connects to the local CPU modules isolated Network B port.
Note: Since the data traveling the network data riser is bi-directional, out and in references are used to direct wire connections.
Class B network data risers

In a Class B network, a break or short in the network data riser wiring divides the network into separate independent networks. Panels on the same side of the line fault will communicate with each other but not with panels across the line fault. Figure 1-10 shows the wiring for a Class B network.
1.17
System overview
B1_CAB1
B1_CAB2
B1_CAB3
B1_CAB4
J5 TB2
CPU
AUDIO A IN
J5 TB2
CPU
AUDIO A IN
J5 TB2
CPU
AUDIO A IN
J5 TB2
CPU
AUDIO A IN
NETWORK OUT IN A B A B
Downstream
Upstream
Figure 1-10: Class B network data riser wiring using copper wire Note: As a matter of convention, a Class B network data riser should start at the CPU module that does not have wires connected to its Network A port.
When wiring a Class B network, give careful consideration as to the location of the service panel. The service panel provides a single point from which you can download files to all other panels on the network. For this function to work properly you must use the panel at the start of the network data riser as the service panel. See Downloading data files for more information.
Class A network data risers

In a Class A network, a single break or short in the network data riser wiring does not interrupt communications between panels. Figure 1-11 shows the wiring for a Class A network.
B1_CAB1 B1_CAB2 B1_CAB3 B1_CAB4
J5 TB2
CPU
AUDIO A IN
J5 TB2
CPU
AUDIO A IN
J5 TB2
CPU
AUDIO A IN
J5 TB2
CPU
AUDIO A IN
NETWORK OUT IN A A B B
Figure 1-11: Typical Class A network data riser wiring using copper wire
1.18
System overview
Download connections
Each programmable rail module has a modular phone jack to use for downloading data directly from the SDU computer. The modular phone jack on any CPU module can also be used to download data to other programmable rail modules in the same panel over the rail bus, or to other panels over the network data riser. In addition to the modular phone jack, the CPU module has two serial communication ports that can be used to download data, provided both of these conditions are met: A 3-RS232 option card is installed The serial port used to download data is not configured for gateway or coder applications
Tip: To download data over the network without having to
reconfigure the system, temporarily install a 3-RS232 option card on any CPU module in the system and connect the SDU computer to serial port 1.
Connect here to download data to all three programmable rail modules over the rail bus (network mode) or to this programmable rail module only (single-step mode)
N O
N C
N O
N A
N C
N O
C S UP
N C
B +
B -
S H
A +
A -
TR O U BL E
A LA R M
TB1
SI GA 1
SI GA 1
S P MW K R 1
B +
B -
B +
B -
S H
A +
SI G A 1
SI GA 1
SI GA 1
A S P - MW K R 1
B +
B -
SI G A 1
J9 J8
J11 J10
O U TPU T MOD U LE
O U TPU T MOD U LE
J1
A +
N ET WO RK OU T IN A B B + -
A UD I O A IN -
A UD I O A UD I O B IN A OU T + - + -
A UD I O B OU T + -
R X 1
T X 1
R T S 1
C O R M X 1 2
T X 2
R T S 2
C O M 2
SI GA 2 B B +
2 S P MW K R
SI GA 2 A A + S H
SI G A 2 B B +
SI GA 2 B B +
2 S P MW K R
SI G A 2 A A + S H
SI G A 2 B B +
[NETDWNLD01.CDR]
Optional serial ports may be used to download over the network (3-RS232 required)
Connect here to download data to this programmable rail module only (single-step mode)
Figure 1-12: Potential connection points for downloading data
Downloading database files over the network

A CPU modules Network A port and its modular phone jack share an interrupt with the modules microprocessor. As such, the microprocessor disables the Network A port whenever you connect the SDU computer to the modular phone jack.
1.19
System overview
Consequently, download options differ for Class A and Class B networks.

Download connection from SDU computer
B1_CAB1
B1_CAB2
B1_CAB3
B1_CAB4
J5 TB2
CPU
AUDIO A IN
J5 TB2
CPU
AUDIO A IN
J5 TB2
CPU
AUDIO A IN
J5 TB2
CPU
AUDIO A IN
Figure 1-13: Impact of disabling Network A terminal connection on Class B networks during a download
Figure 1-13 shows how connecting the SDU computer to the modular phone jack affects downloading data over a Class B network. Connecting the SDU computer to the modular phone jack on the CPU module installed in panel B1_CAB3, disables that CPU modules Network A port. Downloading data to panels B1_CAB2 and B1_CAB1 from panel B1_CAB3 is no longer possible but downloading to B1_CAB4 still is. Since the microprocessor only disables the Network A port, the CPU module that doesnt have a Network A port connection should be used as the service panel. It is the only panel that is capable of downloading to every panel on the network using the modular phone jack.
Note: Connecting the SDU computer to an optional serial communications port does not affect the Network A port. If a 3-RS232 option card is connected to the CPU, you can download data to any panel on a Class B network regardless of where the panel physically connects to the network data riser.
1.20
System overview
Download connection from SDU computer
B1_CAB1
B1_CAB2
B1_CAB3
B1_CAB4
J5 TB2
CPU
AUDIO A IN
J5 TB2
CPU
AUDIO A IN
J5 TB2
CPU
AUDIO A IN
J5 TB2
CPU
AUDIO A IN
Figure 1-14: Impact of disabling Network A terminal connection on Class A networks during a download
On Class A networks however, see Figure 1-14, disabling the Network A port on panel B1_CAB3 does not prevent the other panels from receiving data through B1_CAB3s Network B port. Connecting the SDU computer to the modular phone jack does cause the panel to report a Network Class A Failure trouble. When the network data riser is configured for Class B, connecting to the panel modular phone jack causes the local CPU module to report a communications fault with every panel upstream of the local CPU module.
Tip: If you want to download data to every panel across the Class B network data riser, the download panel must be the first connection on the network data riser (the one with no connection on the Network A terminals.)
1.21
System overview
Foreign language support

Printer use with foreign languages
When supporting a single-byte character set language, your printer must be able to support the appropriate DOS code page. To support a double-byte character set language, your printer must be able to support the appropriate Windows code page. The required code pages are listed below. Remember that not all Windows characters are available on DOS printers, so some characters are not supported on these printers.
Language Chinese simplified Chinese traditional Korean Hebrew Turkish Dutch, French, Italian, Portuguese, Spanish, English Polish, Slovak Russian Code page Windows Page Code 936 (GB) Windows Code Page 950 (Big 5) Windows Code Page 949 (Extended Wansung) DOS Code Page 862 DOS Code Page 857 DOS Code Page 850 DOS Code Page 852 DOS Code Page 866
Bilingual language support

EST3 display modules (3-LCD, 3-FTCU, and KPDISP) feature bilingual operation. For two languages to be supported simultaneously, they must appear on the same code page. Refer to the table below to determine the system bilingual capabilities. Bilingual operation is not supported for Chinese and Korean.
Windows code page 1250 (Eastern Europe) 1251 (Cyrillic) 1252 (Western Europe) 1254 (Turkish) 1255 (Hebrew) Languages supported English, Polish Slovak English, Russian Dutch, English, French, Italian, Portuguese, Spanish English, Turkish English, Hebrew
1.22
System overview Example: Bilingual operation between Polish and Slovak is supported (code page 1250). Bilingual operation between Polish and Russian is not supported, as no code page has both.
Display device language support

3-LCD language support Marketplace European Canadian X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Canadian Mideast X 1.23 Mideast
Language Chinese, traditional (Taiwan) Chinese, simplified (PRC) Dutch English (UK) English (US) French Canadian Hebrew Italian Korean, Extended Wansung Polish Portuguese (Brazil) Russian Slovak Spanish (South America) Turkish
X X X X X X X X[1]
[1] For testing and support purposes only 3-FTCU language support Marketplace European X
Language Chinese, traditional (Taiwan) Chinese, simplified (PRC) Dutch
Asian [1] [1]
US
Asian X X
US
System overview
3-FTCU language support Marketplace European Canadian X X [1] X [1] X X [1] [1] [1] [1] [1] X X [1] [1] X [1] Canadian X X X X X X Mideast X X Mideast
Language English (UK) English (US) French Canadian Hebrew Italian Korean, Extended Wansung Portuguese (Brazil) Spanish (South America) Turkish Russian Polish Slovak
X X X X X X X
[1] Only Western European character set is supported KPDISP language support Marketplace European X X X X X X X X
Language Chinese, traditional (Taiwan) Chinese, simplified (PRC) Dutch English (UK) English (US) French Canadian Hebrew Italian Korean, Extended Wansung Polish
1.24
Asian
US
Asian
US
System overview
KPDISP language support Marketplace European Canadian X X X X X X X X X Mideast 1.25
Language Portuguese (Brazil) Russian Slovak Spanish (South America) Turkish
X X
Asian
US
System overview
Signature series devices

The Signature series family consists of intelligent smoke and heat detectors, bases, input/output modules, and ancillary devices. The EST3 network supports Signature series devices using the 3-SSDC1 and 3-SDDC1 Signature Driver Controller modules. Up to 125 detectors and 125 modules can be connected to each Signature Data Circuit on the module. The Signature series smoke and heat detectors contain their own microprocessors. This allows the devices to make alarm decisions based on the information gathered by the sensing elements incorporated in the device. Signature series detectors can be installed in any of four detector bases: The Standard Base provides wiring terminals for connection to a remote LED. The Relay Base provides a detector activated, pilot-duty dry contact relay used to control external appliances. The Sounder Base incorporates a sounder horn that can be controlled by the detector, by a special Signature module, by the control panel, or by programmed rules The Isolator Base protects the Signature Data Circuit from wiring shorts. Signature modules interface and support the operation of initiating devices, conventional 2-wire smoke and heat detectors, manual pull-stations, strobes, bells, etc. Signature series modules are also capable of monitoring and controlling fans and dampers in HVAC systems. The actual functions of each Signature module is determined by a personality code downloaded to the module through the System Definition Utility (SDU) program. Signature series manual pull-stations (1-stage and 2-stage) feature an integral Signature module that monitors the station. One-stage stations are monitored by a single input module that sends an alarm signal to the loop controller when the station is activated. Two-stage stations are monitored by a dual input module which sends two independent alarm events to the control panel; one when the pull-switch is activated, and the second when the key switch is activated.
Alarm sensitivity setting
Alarm sensitivity refers to the primary threshold (expressed in percent smoke obscuration) at which the smoke detector will go into alarm. The alarm sensitivity setting for smoke detectors can be set to one of five sensitivity levels. When smoke detectors having both ionization and photoelectric elements are used, the sensitivity setting applies to both elements. Reduced sensitivity settings are used to reduce the occurrence of nuisance alarms.
1.26
System overview
The alarm sensitivity setting may be individually set for each detector using the SDU program.
Alternate alarm sensitivity setting
Alternate alarm sensitivity refers to the secondary threshold (expressed in percent smoke obscuration) at which the smoke detector goes into alarm. The alternate alarm sensitivity setting for smoke detectors can be set to one of the same five sensitivity levels as the primary alarm. When smoke detectors having both ionization and photoelectric elements are used, the sensitivity setting applies to both elements. This feature permits increasing or reducing an individual detectors sensitivity at various times of the day, dependent upon, environmental conditions, occupancy, manufacturing processes, etc. Increased sensitivity is typically used when a facility is unoccupied. Reduced sensitivity is typically used to reduce the occurrence of nuisance alarms when occupancy or environmental conditions may create prealarm conditions. An alternate alarm sensitivity setting for each detector can be set using the SDU program.
Alarm verification
Upon receipt of the initial alarm signal from a verified detector, the EST3 panel issues a detector reset command. After a programmable reset/retard period, if the detector continues to generate an alarm during the fixed confirmation period, the alarm is considered valid and processed by the EST3 control panel. Alarm verification reduces the occurrence of nuisance alarms, as it provides a time frame in which the cause of the alarm can be investigated to determine whether an actual alarm condition exists. The alarm verification period can be increased or decreased through the SDU program, as limited by the listing agencies.
Alternate alarm verification
The alternate alarm verification feature operates the same way the alarm verification feature operates using a second, alternate, programmed reset/retard period.
Prealarm setting
Signature smoke detectors can be configured to enter a prealarm state, which generates a monitor event message. Detectors configured for prealarm have a prealarm pseudo point for which rules can be written. During configuration, you specify a percentage of the alarm sensitivity setting that will generate a prealarm event.
1.27
System overview Alternate prealarm setting
The alternate prealarm setting is similar to the prealarm setting, but it represents a percentage of the alternate alarm sensitivity that will generate a prealarm event.
1.28
System overview
Network applications
This section deals with the initial layout of the network cabinets as well as application configurations for the basic network modules.
Network layout
The first task for the system designer is locating the equipment cabinets throughout the project. The objective when locating cabinets is to maximize the per cabinet coverage of the facility while minimizing hardware cost. The following general information should be used as a guide to designing the system. The per cabinet coverage is, in some part, based upon the type of project being designed. In a high rise building installation that requires an audio emergency voice communication system, the problem becomes how many floors can be served by a single cabinet. In a campus style installation, there may be one or more cabinets per building, depending on building size.
Cabinet coverage
There are a number of factors that govern the area of a facility that can be covered by a single cabinet. These factors include: Cabinet capacity - Depending on the installed equipment, the largest backbox available can have 21 module spaces and 3 chassis spaces. Is this enough cabinet capacity to house the equipment required to cover the proposed area? Available current per cabinet - Does the proposed number of large current components (audio amplifiers and 24 VDC notification appliance circuits), in addition to the required module currents, exceed the available 28 amps per cabinet or 60-Ah battery capacity? Notification Appliance Circuit voltage drop - Does the distance from the cabinet to the last strobe, horn, speaker, etc. exceed the acceptable limits? User interface requirements - Depending on the installed equipment, the largest backbox available can have 19 module displays installed. Will this provide enough capacity for the required control/display module functions? Distance between cabinets - Does the wiring length between any three cabinets exceed 5,000 ft. (1,524 m)? System capacity of 64 cabinets per network - Does the proposed system require more than 64 cabinets? The other major factor that governs cabinet coverage is installation labor and material cost. For example, is it cheaper to install a smaller cabinet and service the floor above and below
1.29
System overview
the floor of installation, or install a larger cabinet with more equipment, and wire two floors above and two floors below the cabinet floor?
Feature/function domain
The EST3 life safety system utilizes peer-to-peer networking technology. No single cabinet is in control of the network. Peer-to-peer networking permits multiple control locations within a single network. The feature/function domain is defined as the group of cabinets that are affected when the feature or function is activated. A network cabinet may be a part of one or more groups. Multiple control locations are permitted for any group. Three types of domains are available. Local - The feature/function affects only the cabinet on which the LCD display is installed. Group - The feature/function affects a predefined group of cabinets on the network. Global - The feature/function affects all the cabinets on the network.
Group #3 Group #1 Group #2
6
[3GROUP.CDR]
Figure 1-15: Sample domain consisting of three groups
Using the System Definition Utility (SDU) program, you can configure the system so that information from any cabinet can be selectively sent to any combination of other cabinets on the network. Each cabinet may selectively transmit the following information to other cabinets on the network: Reset commands Alarm Silence commands Trouble Silence commands Drill commands Acknowledge commands
A cabinet can also be configured to receive state changes (Alarm, Supervisory, Trouble, Monitor, firefighter telephone
1.30
System overview
incoming calls), logicals, events, audio controls, etc., from a select group of cabinets. Feature/function domains are associated with the cabinet providing the operator controls. In Figure 1-15, the feature/function domain for Cabinet 1, which has the operator controls for the first sub-net, is groups 1 and 3. The feature/function domain for Cabinet 6, which has the operator controls for the second sub-net is groups 2 and 3.
Figure 1-16: Routed network commands for the domain illustrated in Figure 1-15
In Figure 1-16, the Cabinet 1 entry under the Cabinet State column indicates that Cabinet 1 should receive from cabinets 1, 2, 3, and 4 all information about changes of state. Because Cabinet 1 is the location of the operator controls it should send information about reset, alarm silence, trouble silence, drill, and acknowledgments to all the cabinets in the domain, which are cabinets 1, 2, 3, and 4. In this example, the drill command is common to both systems. Note, that the drill command is also sent to cabinets 5 and 6 by Cabinet 1. The Cabinet 2 entry under the Cabinet State column indicates that Cabinet 2 receives its change of state information from cabinets 1, 2, 3, and 4. Because there are no operator controls located at cabinet 2, there is no need to send reset, alarm silence, trouble silence, drill, and acknowledgment information to other cabinets. As an alternative, the table could show these commands sent to other cabinets, because they can never be issued due to the lack of a 3-LCD display module in the cabinet.
1.31
System overview
Cabinets 3 and 4 receive their change of state information from all cabinets on the network, as indicated in the cabinet state column. This is necessary as cabinets 3 and 4 are part of both domains. Again, there is no need to send reset, alarm silence, trouble silence, drill, and acknowledgment information to other cabinets from cabinets 3 and 4. The Cabinet 5 entry under the Cabinet State column indicates that Cabinet 5 receives its change of state information from cabinets 3, 4, 5, and 6. Cabinet 6 information indicates that Cabinet 6 should receive from cabinets 3, 4, 5, and 6 all information about changes of state. Because cabinet 6 is the location of the operator controls it should send information about reset, alarm silence, trouble silence, drill, and acknowledgments to cabinets 3, 4, 5, and 6, (all the cabinets in the domain.) In this example, the drill command is common to both systems. Note, that the drill command is also sent to cabinets 1 and 2 by Cabinet 6.
1.32
System overview
Audio applications
Amplifier selection
The EST3 system provides amplifiers with 20-, 40-, and 95-watt output ratings to meet any project requirement. Selection of the proper amplifiers requires an understanding of the amplifier characteristics and application related information that follows.
Audio zoning
The output of each amplifier usually covers a single audio zone, typically a floor of a high rise building. Using the appropriate Signature modules, the amplifiers output can be divided into several zones. The output circuit can be configured for either Class A or Class B wiring.
Output wattage
The output rating of an amplifier is determined by the speaker load it is required to drive, and any expansion or safety factor required. The speaker load is determined by adding up the value of all the wattage taps selected on each speaker connected to the amplifier. For a conservative approach, use the highest wattage tap available on each speaker. This insures there is enough head room to adjust speaker taps to compensate for any installation variables such as sound absorbing furniture, etc.
Output voltage
Zoned amplifiers are available with either a 25 Vrms or 70 Vrms output. The 25 Vrms output amplifiers are primarily used in retrofit applications that previously had 25 Vrms speakers installed. 70 Vrms output amplifiers are recommended for new installations. The output circuits of a 70 Vrms amplifier can be run eight-times farther than a 25 Vrms amplifier, given the same load.
Note: If all the system wiring is required to be power limited, you may use any 20-, 40-, or 95-watt amplifier with either a 25 Vrms or 70 Vrms output. Wiring considerations
Refer to Appendix B of this manual for wire distance calculations and other wiring considerations.
1.33
System overview Backup amplifiers
Each cabinet can contain 1 zoned amplifier module to use to back up the remaining primary zoned amplifier modules installed in the same cabinet with the following restrictions: All the amplifiers must have the same output voltage rating. If the cabinet contains older amplifier modules (15- and 30-watt) and newer amplifier modules (20- and 40-watt), the amplifier used to back up the primary amplifier modules must be of the older type.
Note: In cases where older and newer zoned amplifiers exist in the same cabinet, the older modules should be replaced with newer modules for optimum results.
The backup amplifier must have an output wattage rating equal to or greater than the largest primary amplifier it is backing up. If not, the output capacity of the speaker circuit is diminished proportionately. The wire used to wire the backup amplifier to the other amplifiers must be the same size or greater than that used to wire the speaker circuit.
Cabinet space
The 20- and 40-watt amplifiers each require one space on the rail assembly. The 95-watt amplifier requires two rail spaces. The number of zoned amplifier modules that can be installed in a single cabinet is limited by the number of available rail spaces, the number of power supplies installed in the cabinet, and battery limits, if any.
Audio channels
The EST3 audio system provides eight (8) simultaneous channels for distribution of audio signals. The functions of four of these channels are fixed by the system. These four channels are referred to by their functions, i.e. Page, EVAC, Alert, and Auxiliary Input channels. The four remaining channels are referred to as general channels 1 to 4. Under manual or automatic network control, each amplifiers input can be connected to either the Alert channel, the Evacuation (EVAC) channel, the Page channel, the Auxiliary Input channel, or one of four (4) general input channels. Should conflicting commands be issued to a single amplifier, the amplifier responds to the channel with the highest priority. The eight channels are prioritized as follows, with the Page channel having the highest priority
1.34
System overview Page channel
Paging is a manual function. An operator is required to select a destination for the page, and then make an announcement. The Page channel is never automatically selected by the EST3 system. The page channel always carries a live page signal, regardless of its source. There are four sources which can supply the paging signal: 1) the local 3-ASU microphone, 2) the remote microphone, 3) the firefighter telephone system, and 4) the auxiliary audio input. These sources are automatically prioritized as shown in Table 1-2.
Table 1-2: Page priorities Priority 1 (highest) 2 3 4 (lowest) Page signal source Local microphone Firefighter phone Remote microphone Auxiliary input
The page command is a non-latching function. When the page command ends, amplifiers automatically switch back to the source channel that was active (if any) prior to the page command. Five types of page commands are available on the network. The first four page commands are available simply by pressing a single switch on the front of the 3-ASU. These are the paging functions most commonly used in an emergency situation. 1. The All Call command temporarily transfers all amplifiers to the Page channel while the page is active. All Call distributes the page signal to every amplifier in the system. 2. The Page to EVAC command temporarily transfers the Page signal to all amplifiers actively connected to the EVAC channel. All EVAC amplifiers then receive and distribute the Page signal. 3. The Page to Alert command temporarily transfers the Page signal to all amplifiers actively connected to the Alert channel. All Alert amplifiers then receive and distribute the page signal. 4. The All Call Minus command temporarily transfers the page signal to all amplifiers except those connected to the EVAC and Alert channels. 5. A Selective Page temporarily transfers the selected amplifiers to the Page channel while the page is activate,
1.35
System overview
distributing the page signal only to selected audio zones (amplifiers). Audio zones are selected manually by the operator using the LED/Switch displays. An example of how the page commands work is illustrated in Figure 1-17. This figure shows a nine story high rise building, with a fire on the 6th floor. The fire plan requires the evacuation signal to be sounded on the fire floor, floor above the fire, and floor below the fire. The alert signal is required to sounded in all other areas of the building except the stairwells. The first column (Fire Alarm) shows the automatic responses on the affected floors according to the fire plan.
ASU Page Commands Fire Alarm Signal Stairwells 9TH Floor 8TH Floor 7TH Floor 6TH Floor 5TH Floor 4TH Floor 3RD Floor 2ND Floor 1ST Floor Alert Alert Evac Evac Evac Alert Alert Alert Alert Alert Alert Page Page Page Alert Alert Alert Alert Page Page Evac Evac Evac Page Page Page Page Page All Call Page to Evac to Alert Minus Page Alert Alert Evac Evac Evac Alert Alert Alert Alert All Call Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Page Alert Alert Evac Page Evac Alert Alert Alert Alert Zoned Paging
Fire
[PAGESEQ.CDR]
Figure 1-17: ASU Page Command Example
The Page to EVAC command replaces the EVAC signal with the Page signal, as shown in the figures second column. The third column shows the Page to Alert command response, all the Alert signals have been replaced by the Page signal. The All Call Minus command directs the Page to the areas which are not receiving the EVAC or Alert signals, i.e. the stairwells. In the fourth column of Figure 1-17, the stairwells receive the
1.36
System overview
Page signal when the All Call Minus command is used and do not automatically receive either the EVAC or Alert signals. The All Call command directs the page signal to all areas of the building, as illustrated in the last column of Figure 1-17. Any combination of floors and stairwells could be selected to receive the page by manually selecting the audio zones on the audio zone select control/display module. Notice that at no time does any area receiving a signal have its signal interrupted by any page command function.
Evacuation (EVAC) channel
The EVAC channel always carries a signal designed to notify the occupants they must leave the facility. The evacuation signal may take the form of a textual message, a variety of audio tones, or an audio tone modulated by the standard 3-3-3 evacuation pattern, or any combination of these signals. The EVAC channel is preprogrammed, and activated by the system in response to an alarm. The EVAC signal is automatically sent to the areas that are in danger and require immediate evacuation. The EVAC channel has priority over all channels signals except for the Page channel. The alarm silence function automatically silences the EVAC channel when an operator presses the Alarm Silence switch.
Alert channel
The Alert channel always carries a signal designed to notify the occupants that an emergency situation exists in the facility. Occupants hearing the alert signal are not in immediate danger, but should prepare to evacuate. In some installations, the alert signal advises occupants that persons evacuating the danger area will be entering the area for safety. The Alert channel is preprogrammed, and activated by the system in response to an alarm. The Alert signal is automatically sent to areas that are not in immediate danger and do not require immediate evacuation. The Alert channel has priority over all other channels except the Page and EVAC channels. The alarm silence function automatically silences the Alert channel when an operator presses the Alarm Silence switch.
General channel
The General channel is used to distribute special purpose signals to special areas in the facility. Typically these areas include elevator cabs, stairwells, and areas in less peril than those areas receiving the Alert signal.
1.37
System overview
The general channel signals can be preprogrammed in response to an alarm, or they may be manually activated. General channels have a lower priority than the Alert channel. The alarm silence function does not automatically silence the Alert channel unless programmed to do so.
Auxiliary channel
The Auxiliary channel is provided to carry a low priority public address signal. The Auxiliary channel is supplied to the 3-ASU as a low level audio signal from an external source. The volume level of the auxiliary channel can be configured in the SDU program at 50% or 100% of the level used for the EVAC channel. The Auxiliary Input channel is the lowest priority channel in the system and is overridden by all other channels. The alarm silence function does not automatically silence the Auxiliary channel unless programmed to do so.
Manual audio zone selection

If manual audio zone selection is required on the system, the appropriate control/display modules must be mounted on modules in the same cabinet as the Audio Source Unit. Typical configurations of control/display modules is shown in Figure 1-18. Exact operation of each display is dependent on system programming. Typical operation is described below.
1.38
System overview
Figure 1-18: Audio zone selection displays
Display A is a model 3-12SG. Each floor switch provides audio zone selection for the Page signal, and the integral green LED indicates the audio zone is selected. Display B is a model 3-12GY. Each floor switch provides Page audio zone selection. The green LED to the upper left of the switch indicates the audio zone is selected. The yellow LED to the lower left of the switch indicates audio circuit trouble. Displays C and D are model 3-6/3Sxxx. The display C configuration permits manual selection of the Alert, EVAC, and Page signals by floor. This configuration is well suited for systems which do not sound signals through the entire facility during an alarm. Responsible authorities can then manually add EVAC and Alert signals to other floors of the facility. Display configuration D is used in facilities which sound the Alert signal in all areas not receiving the EVAC signal. This eliminates the need to switch the Alert signal. The middle switch is not used, the middle LED indicates amplifier status.
Messages
General
While there is no standardization on message content, messages must tell the occupant what is happening, why it is happening, and what actions they should take.
1.39
System overview
As a rule, each message should be repeated three times. If there is more than one language spoken in the area, the messages should be provided in each language. A male voice has been demonstrated to be more authoritative than a female voice, and should be used where urgency is required. A female voice has been shown to initially gain the publics attention quicker than a male voice.
Alarm message format
The basic alarm message format consists of an alarm tone followed by an evacuation message repeated three times. The suggested alarm tone can take the form of a 1000 Hz tone modulated by the standard 3-3-3 evacuation pattern, a slow whoop, an electronic bell, a constant tone, or a constant tone modulated at a 120 pulse per minute rate. Please refer to the Authority Having Jurisdiction for specific requirements. Typical Alarm Message text: Female Voice: May I have your attention please. May I have your attention Please. Male Voice: There has been a fire reported in the building. Proceed to the nearest stairwell and exit the building. Do not use the elevators. Repeat, do not use the elevators.
Note: The EST3 amplifiers operate in a stand-alone mode should they lose communication with the Audio Source Unit. The alarm tone used in the alarm message should be the same tone used by the amplifier for stand alone alarm signaling. Alert message format
The basic alert message consists of an alert tone followed by an advisory message. The suggested alert tone should be easily differentiated from the alarm tone and can take the form of a constant tone, or a constant tone modulated at a 20 pulse per minute rate. Please refer to the Authority Having Jurisdiction for specific requirements. Typical Alert message text: Female Voice: May I have your attention please. May I have your attention Please. Male Voice: There has been an emergency reported in the building. Your area is in no immediate danger. People from other areas of the building may be entering your area. Be prepared to leave the building if you hear the evacuation signal. Repeat, you are in no immediate danger.
Informative messages
Informative messages are those special purpose signals to areas of the facility which may have special concerns during an
1.40
System overview
emergency situation. Typically these areas include elevator cabs, stairwells, and areas in less peril than those areas receiving the Alert signal. Some sample informative messages appear below. Elevator message text: Female Voice: May I have your attention please. May I have your attention Please. Male Voice: There has been an emergency reported in the building. The building manager has directed the elevators to the lobby. Please exit the building when you reach the lobby. Stairwell message text: Female Voice: Please continue down the stairs to your assigned re-entry floor or the lobby. Do not attempt to use the elevators. Do Not Enter message text: Male Voice: Do not enter this area. This is not an exit. An emergency has been reported in this section of the building. Please exit the building using a marked fire exit.
Message and tone storage
The prerecorded messages and tone sequences are stored in a digital format in the 3-ASU Audio Source Unit internal memory. When the message and tone library exceeds two minutes in total length, a 3-ASUMX/32 or 3-ASUMX/100 Expansion Memory card must be installed in the 3-ASU. The 3-ASUXM/32 provides additional storage space for up to 32 minutes of messages. The 3-ASUXM/100 provides additional storage space for up to 100 minutes of messages. Messages and tone sequences are created and downloaded directly into the Audio Source Unit using the SDU and a computer equipped with a compatible sound card.
1.41
System overview
Firefighter phone system

Five phone off-hook limit
The circuitry on the 3-FTCU Firefighter Telephone Control Unit can support up to five telephones off-hook in addition to the master handset at the 3-FTCU at any one time. The flexibility of the EST3 system permits any number of phones to be wired on a single phone circuit, as long as they are not all used simultaneously. There are a number of different designs which can be used to insure that no more than five phones are active at any one time.
One phone per circuit

The advantages of installing a single firefighter phone station or jack on a SIGA-CC1 Signature module (personality code 6) are numerous. The system provides complete control and annunciation phone/circuit. Installing a single phone on a circuit permits the operator to immediately identify the exact location of the calling party. Because the 3-FTCU will only permit five circuits to be connected simultaneously, the maximum number of off-hook handsets can never be exceeded. Should a branch telephone circuit be damaged during a fire, the fault will not affect other phone circuits. When there is only one phone per circuit, troubleshooting of faults is simplified. The largest disadvantage of installing one phone per branch telephone circuit is cost. Each phone location requires a separate SIGA-CC1 module.
1.42
System overview
Typical Branch Telephone Circuit UL/ULC Listed 47K EOL Style Y (Class B) TB3
10 9
SIGA-CC1 with Personality Code 6

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
[3FTAP1.CDR]
TB2
TB1
To Next SIGA-CC1 or UL/ULC Listed EOL Resistor RISER OUT (+) RISER OUT (-)
From 3-FTCU RISER IN (+) RISER IN (-) DATA IN (+) DATA IN (-) From Signature Controller Module or Previous Device
To Next Device DATA OUT (+) DATA OUT (-)
Figure 1-19: SIGA-CC1 with one phone installed
Five phones per circuit

Installing up to five phones per branch circuit is a realistic compromise between installing a single phone per circuit and more than five phones per circuit. In the rare instance that all five phones are off-hook and a need to communicate with a sixth remote phone arises, the 3-FTCU operator can temporarily disconnect the entire branch circuit. Then the second branch circuit can be connected to complete the conversation. The advantages of installing up to five telephone stations or jacks on a SIGA-CC1 Signature module (personality code 6) are: a reasonable balance between cost and performance; and the system maintains the high quality voice circuit at all times because the maximum number of off-hook handsets can never be exceeded. The main disadvantage of installing up to five phones per branch telephone circuit is that a circuit failure can render the entire branch circuit useless. Additionally, the location of the incoming caller is not precisely known, and troubleshooting is more difficult.
Limited number of portable telephone handsets

Another method of limiting the number of off-hook phones to five limits the number of available portable phones available to the fire department to five. The biggest advantage of this method
1.43
System overview
is low cost, as multiple remote telephone jacks can be installed on a single branch circuit. The main disadvantage of this method are: that five phones may not be adequate to properly cover the facility; a circuit failure can render many of the phone jacks useless; the location of the incoming caller is not precisely known; and troubleshooting is more difficult.
1.44
Chapter 2
Security applications
Summary
EST3 has powerful and flexible security capabilities. This chapter introduces you to the equipment required for security systems. This chapter also illustrates and describes several security applications. Each application is presented as a separate topic that includes a block diagram and description. These give you an overview of the application, and show the components required and their interconnection. Refer to the EST3 Installation Sheets for specific component settings and terminal connections.
Content Security equipment 2.2 Certificate installations 2.8 Multiple 3-MODCOM modules 2.12 Multiple site security and access 2.13 Multiple tenant security 2.16 Secure access 2.20
2.1
Security equipment
Introduction
The equipment required for a general security system is shown in Figure 2-1. Well discuss each item shown in the drawing, plus the other factors called out on the drawing.
Control panel
Signature data circuit Signature Controller Module SIGA fire alarm devices SIGA-MD Motion Detector SIGA-SEC2 Security Loop Module
3-SAC Security Access Control Module
KPDISP Keypad Display
SAC bus
Conventional security devices
3-MODCOM Modem Communication Module
Telephone lines
Distributor
KDC program SDU
Central monitoring station

Other factors X Power supply X Hardware configuration X SDU programming X ACDB/KDC operation
RPM
Resource profile
Figure 2-1: Equipment required for a basic security system
Equipment
The equipment used in security applications includes: Control panel Signature Controller module SIGA-MD Motion Detector module SIGA-SEC2 Security Loop module 3-SAC Security Access module SAC bus KPDISP Keypad Display
2.2
3-MODCOM Modem Communication module RPM Resource Profile Manager tool KDC Keypad Display Configuration program
Control panel
It is a UL listing requirement that all cabinets in a system that includes security functions must have a tamper switch. The control panel must include a 3-TAMP, 3-TAMP5, or 3-TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch.
Signature Controller module

The Signature data circuit plays a dual role in integrated systems. First, it supports devices and modules belonging to the fire alarm system. Second, it supports security devices that are part of the security system. Figure 2-1 shows a Signature Controller module with a Class B Signature data circuit. Shown on this circuit are Signature fire alarm devices, plus two security devices, the SIGA-MD and the SIGA-SEC2. Several Signature Controller models are available, and can be used with integrated systems.
Note: Security devices can also be installed on the SAC bus via CRCs, or on an analog device loop.
SIGA-MD Motion Detector module

The SIGA-MD is a passive infrared motion detector that connects to the Signature loop. The detector has alarm and tamper output monitoring capability. A contact closure causes an alarm but does not latch at the module. The SIGA-MD provides six separate curtain coverage patterns with a 34-foot range. The detector can be mounted in flat corners or on walls up to a height of ten feet.
SIGA-SEC2 Security Loop module

The SIGA-SEC2 Security Loop Module is an intelligent analog addressable device that connects one or two security loops to a Signature data circuit. In Figure 2-1 this is indicated by the conventional security devices connected to the SEC2. The operation of the SEC2 is determined by its device type and personality code. These are assigned during system design and configuration.
3-SAC Security Access Control module

The 3-SAC Security Access Control rail module controls a highspeed RS-485 circuit called the Security Access Control (SAC)
2.3
bus. The SAC bus supports fire, security, and access control devices. The 3-SAC handles message traffic for these devices, interfacing them with the CPU as required. Events are passed from the devices to the 3-SAC module, then to the CPU for alarm processing. The 3-SAC has two sets of circuit terminals, and is capable of Class A or Class B configuration. Each Class B circuit can include 31 devices, for a total of 62 devices per module. Class A circuits can include 30 devices total. In the figure, we show a Class B bus with a KPDISP Keypad Display control and display module.
SAC bus
Since our security and access control devices require 24 Vdc, we suggest that you always use a four-wire cable (two twisted-pairs) for the SAC bus and a 24 Vdc power supply. For the data wires we suggest unshielded, twisted pair, with greater than 6 twists per foot, in 14 to 22 AWG (1.50 to 0.25 sq mm). For the power wires, we recommend 14 or 16 AWG.
KPDISP Keypad Display

Tip: To improve system performance in systems with a high number of partitions or cardholders, limit the volume of network messages. To do this, create partition routing groups so that only essential messages are sent to each KPDISP. In practice, limit the average number of partitions in a partition routing group to 10 or less.
The KPDISP Keypad Display is a control and display module for security and fire alarm systems. The KPDISP has an LCD display and a telephone-style keypad. It operates on the 24 Vdc power supplied with the SAC bus. The KPDISP is completely menu-driven. It lets the system user: Arm and disarm partitions Review off-normal points Bypass or disable points Execute fire alarm panel commands
Each KPDISP stores its portion of the security database. You can create a security system that is operated via the 3-LCD(XL) display alone, or in combination with any Control/LED display module. See the topic Secure access.
3-MODCOM Modem Communicator module

The 3-MODCOM Modem Communicator module has both modem and dialer functions. It can transmit and receive information. The 3-MODCOM can transmit alarm, supervisory, or trouble messages to a remote central monitoring station using one or two telephone lines. A variation of the module (3-MODCOMP) can
2.4
transmit pager messages to a paging company using the TAP protocol. The module can also receive information sent over telephone lines by the Keypad Display Configuration program.
RPM Resource Profile Manager tool

The Resource Profile Manager (RPM) tool is part of the SDU. It uses the project database to let you create a separate resource profile for each company that will be using the security system. The resource profile defines the security system for the KDC program. It includes such information as: The KPDISPs in the system The routing required to access each KPDISP for downloads Which KPDISPs can execute fire alarm system commands
The resource profile is imported into the KDC program during installation.
KDC Keypad Display Configuration program

The Keypad Display Configuration (KDC) program lets the system user define and maintain a database of information about KPDISPs, users, and access levels. This is part of the overall security database. The KDC program runs on the users PC. Additions or updates to the security database can be transmitted to the KPDISP units in two ways. The first method is via modem and dial-up telephone line to the3-MODCOM. The information is then routed to the CPU, through the correct 3-SACs, and finally to the affected KPDISP units. The second method is by connecting the users PC directly to the CPU using an RS-232 cable. The connection is made between the PCs COM1 port and any of the RS-232 terminals on the CPU. As in the first method, after reaching the CPU additions and changes are routed through the correct 3-SACs to the affected KPDISPs.
Note: Fire and security functionality cannot be programmed into a control panel from a remote location. You must perform all panel programming on site. Changes to the security database have no impact on the parameters or operations of listed fire system equipment.
When the site includes an access control system, the Access Control Database (ACDB) program is used in place of the KDC. The ACDB includes the required KDC functionality.
2.5
Other factors
Next, well cover the additional factors listed on the drawing: Power supply Hardware configuration SDU programming ACDB/KDC operation
These factors are called out on each application diagram given in this chapter.
Power supply
The KPDISP is designed to operate on 24 Vdc. For this reason, we recommend that you include power from the panel with the SAC bus cable. You can use the panel 3-PPS/M, 3-BPS/M, or 3-BBC/M power supplies. Note that additional power supplies must be listed for the application.
Hardware configuration
The KPDISP does not have any switch or jumper settings. All configuration is done with the SDU program.
SDU programming
While the KDC program controls a small portion of the security database, all other definition, configuration, and programming for the security system happens in the SDU. The SIGA-MD and SIGA-SEC2 are both treated as modules on the Signature data circuit. You configure each security module using the SDU. The SDU controls the general configuration of the 3-SAC modules, plus the configuration of all CRC or KPDISP devices on the SAC busses. KPDISP modules can be configured to execute a specific, predefined command list when a specific security or access control event occurs. You write the command lists in the SDU, and assign them to KPDISP events when you configure the KPDISP module. Partitions are fundamental groups used with security systems. A partition is a group of devices intended to provide security for a given area of the site. Partitions can be armed and disarmed separately. All partitions are created and defined in the SDU, and each CRC, CRC input circuit, KPDISP, SIGA-SEC2 circuit, and SIGA-MD circuit can be assigned to a partition. Partitions also play a role in KPDISP message routing.
2.6
For the 3-MODCOM module, the SDU determines the dialer and modem parameters, defines the receivers and accounts, and assigns each account to the correct receiver. Finally, the SDU includes the RPM tool, described earlier in this topic.
ACDB/KDC operation
The Keypad Display Configuration (KDC) program runs on the end-users PC. It lets him create and maintain a database of information about KPDISPs, users, and access levels. This is part of the overall security database. During setup of the program, the user imports the resource profile created by the RPM during system programming. Once installed, the user can create and revise his KDC database. Changes and additions are transmitted via modem to the 3-MODCOM or via direct RS-232 connection to the CPU. The data is then routed to the correct 3-SAC and KPDISP units.
The remaining topics in this chapter cover specific security applications. Each topic gives you an overview of the application, and shows you the components required and their interconnection. Each topic has a block diagram and general description of the application. Other factors (as called out on the drawings) are discussed under separate headings in each topic.
2.7
Certificate installations
Description of the applications
An installation company can be listed to install burglar alarm systems that are covered by UL under its Follow-Up Service. The listed company issues a certificate of the appropriate class, grade, and type. This topic does not detail the steps required for certificate installations. You must follow UL 681 to determine the exact requirements for a given installation. Here, we simply list special EST3 equipment that can be used in the following applications: Central Station Grade B Alarm Certificate Grade A Police Station Connect Certificate Central Station Grade C Alarm Certificate Local Mercantile Grade A Alarm Certificate
Refer to Appendix C: Listing requirements for additional information.
Special equipment
Certificate installations require the use of specialized attack and tamper equipment. Here are brief descriptions of the special parts. The diagrams for each application show which parts are required.
ATCK Attack Kit: a replacement cover kit for the 3-RCC7
cabinet. The kit provides a two-minute attack delay time. It includes a red, overlapping box cover for the cabinet. The cover attaches to the backbox sides using sheet metal screws and four locks. The kit also includes special knockout plugs that secure the unused knockout holes.
3-TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch: a switch that detects
removal of the cover.
Central station grade B alarm certificate

Figure 2-2 shows the equipment that can be used as part of a Central Station Grade B Alarm Certificate installation. Note that this is the same equipment used for a Grade A Police Station Connect Certificate installation.
2.8
Listed Grade A bell
Tamper loop Bell circuit Wires must be in a metal conduit with no boxes or other junctions
Control panel 3-IDC8/4 3-SAC 3-MODCOM
KPDISP SAC bus Telephone lines: one line with 24-hour test or two lines with line cut monitors
3-TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch ATCK Attack Kit
Other factors Power supply
Hardware configuration X SDU programming ACDB/KDC operation
Figure 2-2: Components used with a central station grade B certificate application
For this certificate, the control panel cabinet must be fitted with an ATCK Attack Kit and a 3-TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch. In addition, a listed Grade A local bell is required. The bell must be positioned where it can be heard from every arming station in the system. You can use multiple bells if required. The bell requires a tamper detection loop. Both the bell circuit and the tamper detection loop can be supported by a 3-IDC8/4 module. A single phone line that is tested at least once in every 24-hour period can be used. Alternately, two lines with line cut monitoring can be used in place of a line with 24-hour testing. If the CMS does not have testing services, the SDU can program the system to issue tests on a fixed or relative basis to meet this requirement.
2.9
The CMS must have a maximum response time of 30 minutes. When this application includes partitions, the partition that contains the EST3 panel equipped with the 3-MODCOM and local bell must be armed 24 hours a day, and have limited, highlevel access.
Grade A police station connect certificate

The equipment, installation requirements, and application restrictions for a Grade A Police Station Connect Certificate installation are the same as for a Central Station Grade B Alarm Certificate installation, as described above.
Central station grade C alarm certificate

Figure 2-3 shows the equipment that can be used as part of a Central Station Grade C Alarm Certificate installation.
Control Panel 3-SAC 3-MODCOM KPDISP SAC bus
Telephone lines: one line with 24-hour test or two lines with line cut monitors
Other factors Power supply
Hardware configuration X SDU programming ACDB/KDC operation
Figure 2-3: Grade C central station certificate
This certificate requires that the control panel be fitted with an ATCK Attack Kit and a 3-TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch. No local bell is required. A single phone line that is tested at least once in every 24-hour period can be used. Alternately, two lines with line cut monitoring can be used in place of a line with 24-hour testing.
2.10
When this application includes partitions, the partition that contains the EST3 panel equipped with the 3-MODCOM must be armed 24 hours a day, and have limited, high-level access.
Local mercantile grade A alarm certificate

Figure 2-4 shows the equipment that can be used as part of a Local Mercantile Grade A Alarm Certificate installation. The control panel cabinet must be fitted with an ATCK Attack Kit and a 3-TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch. A listed Grade A local bell is also required. The bell requires a tamper detection loop. Both the bell circuit and the tamper detection loop can be supported by a 3-IDC8/4 module.
Listed Grade A bell and bell housing
Tamper loop Bell circuit Wires must be in a metal conduit with no boxes or other junctions SAC bus KPDISP
Other factors Power supply Hardware configuration SDU programming ACDB/KDC operation
Control Panel 3-IDC8/4 3-SAC
Figure 2-4: Grade A local certificate
The bell must be positioned where it can be heard from every arming station in the system. You can use multiple bells if required.
2.11
Multiple 3-MODCOM modules

You can install more than one 3-MODCOM Modem Communicator module in a system. Two or more 3-MODCOM modules can be installed in the same cabinet. Two or more cabinets can contain 3-MODCOM modules. There are several reasons for using multiple 3-MODCOMs: Redundant communication to a CMS Backup of critical communication links Dedicated security transmission hardware
In a redundant communication system both 3-MODCOMs are programmed to transmit the same message to different receivers at the CMS or at different CMS installations. One 3-MODCOM can be programmed to back up another. This guarantees CMS communication (or TAP paging) should one panel in the system become disabled. In a multiple tenant application, there may be a high volume of ACDB/KDC program traffic. You can design such systems with a second 3-MODCOM, dedicating the first module to ACDB/KDC traffic, and the second module to CMS transmissions. This prevents contention for communication channels. Overall limits for the number of 3-MODCOM modules are: 10 modules per node 10 modules total per network
2.12
Multiple site security and access

Description of the application
Figure 2-5 shows how a company with multiple sites can centralize security and access control functions for all sites. This means an employee only needs to carry a single access card to gain appropriate access to any company site. The figure shows a company with three plants, designated sites A, B, and C. Site C is chosen as the company headquarters for security and access control purposes. Each site is a separate SDU project. At each site, the Resource Profile Manager (RPM) tool is used to create a profile for that site. This includes site C, the headquarters plant. All the profiles are sent to the security office at site C for import into the Keypad Display Configuration (KDC) or Access Control Database (ACDB) program. This means that the programs will present all resources at all sites in a single hierarchy, as shown by the tree diagram. The security personnel at site C can create global access groups. This means that they can assign an employee the correct security and access privileges for all sites from one central location. The employee can carry a single access card that will grant him the correct security and access privileges at each site.
2.13
SITE A SDU RPM EST3 system
SITE B EST3 system SDU RPM
Site A profile
Site B profile
Telephone lines SITE C (HQ) EST3 system
T A D1 D2 D3 B D1 D2 D3 C D1 D2 D3 Total resource profile tree
ACDB KDC
Site C profile
Other factors Power supply X X X Hardware configuration SDU programming ACDB/KDC operation
RPM SDU
Figure 2-5: Multiple site security and access control system
Each site must have an EST3 system. In each EST3 system, at least one panel must include a 3-MODCOM module to support modem communication between headquarters and sites A and B. The KDC and ACDB programs can communicate with the EST3 system either by modem, or by direct connection to an RS-232 port on the CPU module.
2.14
Each system includes 3-SAC modules as required to support the security and access control systems implemented.
SDU programming
No special project programming is required to enable multiple site security and access control systems. When running the RPM tool, each site receives 100% of the resources for that site. Note that all profiles must be sent to the site C headquarters when the project is finished.
ACDB/KDC operation
At the headquarters site, all three profiles are imported into the ACDB/KDC program. The result is a global tree of resources that includes each KPDISP and CRC device in each site. Importing all the profiles into one ACDB/KDC program creates the global database. When additions or changes to the KPDISP database are made, headquarters can transmit the changes to the affected sites.
2.15
Multiple tenant security

Figure 2-6 illustrates a simple strip mall security application. The mall consists of three identical stores and an electrical room. The control panel supports a SIGA data circuit and a SAC bus. The panel also supports modem communications via telephone lines. The SIGA circuit has pull stations and smoke detectors. In addition, the SIGA circuit has two security devices, the motion detector and the SEC2 security loop module. The SEC2 connects a conventional door contact to the SIGA circuit. The SAC bus is used exclusively for the KPDISP devices. Each company owner has a Keypad Display Configuration (KDC) program. The program runs on a computer equipped with a modem, and uses the modem and a dial-up telephone line to communicate with the control panel. Each company owner can use the KDC to download changes to that companys portion of the security database. The changes are routed through the panel to the appropriate KPDISP unit.
The control panel can be configured to provide telephone connection to a central monitoring station (CMS). Each tenant company can have a separate account at the same CMS, or can use the services of a separate CMS. Refer to Appendix C: Listing requirements for additional information.
2.16
Telephone line
SIGA-MD Motion KDC Program SIGA-MD Motion SIGA-MD Motion KDC Program KDC Program
SIGA-MD Motion
Partition 1
SIGA loop
Company A Partition 2
SIGA-IPS Smoke SIGA-IPS Smoke
Company B Partition 3
Company C Partition 4
SIGA-IPS Smoke
Figure 2-6: Multiple tenant security in a strip mall

SIGA-SEC2 Security SIGA-SEC2 Security KPDISP SIGA-270 Pull station KPDISP Door contact SIGA-270 Pull station KPDISP Door contact SIGA-270 Pull station KPDISP Power supply
Control panel
SAC bus SIGA-SEC2 Security
Door contact
Security bell Other factors X Hardware configuration X SDU programming X ACDB/KDC operation
NOTE: Star taps are shown to simplify this diagram, but are not recommended for Signature data circuits. Create two T-taps in the same junction box if required.
2.17
The control panel contains the following rail modules: Signature Controller module 3-SAC Security Access Control module 3-MODCOM Modem Communicator module
The Signature Controller module supports the SIGA loop. The 3-SAC module supports the SAC bus. Power for the KPDISP can be taken from the 3-PPS/M and routed with the data lines in a cable composed of two twisted-pair wires. The 3-MODCOM module supports modem communication between the control panel and the KDC programs via telephone lines. In the Class B configuration illustrated, an appropriate RS-485 line terminating resistor is required in the KPDISP located in partition 4. The electrical room, partition 1, must be armed 24 hours a day, and have limited, high-level access.
SDU programming
When programming the system for this application, you define the required partitions and assign the correct partition number to each security device. Part of the programming effort includes using the Resource Profile Manager (RPM) tool to create resource profiles for the site owner and for each company owner. Since none of the devices are shared, each company should receive 100% of the resources of their KPDISP. A small percentage may be set aside for use of the site owner, depending on the owners policy. Programming for the 3-MODCOM module determines the dialer and modem parameters, defines the receivers and accounts, and assigns each account to the correct receiver. Finally, when running the RPM tool, you specify which, if any, of the KPDISP modules can execute fire system commands. Typically, this privilege is reserved for the site owner or site security staff. Refer to SDU Online Help for more information.
KDC operation
Each company owner must import the resource profile output from the RPM. After importing this resource data, each company owner can create his portion of the security database, according to the instructions included with the KDC program.
2.18
Changes to the tenant portion of the security database can be made at any time, and from any location.
2.19
Secure access
Secure access is a simplified type of security application. Typical secure access applications are operated from a secured control panel, and use partitions with no entry or exit delay timers. Secure access applications often use the control panel 3LCD(XL) module (or dedicated Control/LED display modules) to control the security partitions. Partitions can be armed or disarmed using any of the following: 3-LCD(XL) menus EST3 Control/LED modules FireWorks interface ENVOY annunciators KPDISP
A secure access system can be implemented using either Signature or Analog Addressable security devices. Signature devices are less prone to false alarms, and are more resistant to tampering, since they cannot be swapped with deliberately compromised devices.
SDU programming
When you create a secure access application, use the SDU to create partitions as required. When configuring the partitions, set the Entry Delay Timer and Exit Delay Timer values to zero. When configuring SIGA-SEC2 and SIGA-MD devices, set the Delay to None. You can use 3-LCD(XL) menu commands to arm and disarm the partitions. To do so, you must check the Enable LCD Security Control Functions check box. This is located on the Options tab of the Cabinet Configuration dialog box. Checking this box causes the Security menu to appear in the Command Menus list. You can use any suitable Control/LED module to arm and disarm partitions. Configure the switches as momentary contact switches, and use them to activate command lists. Program the command lists to perform the desired arm and disarm actions and control the LEDs. Refer to the SDU Online Help for more information on rule programming for secure access applications.
2.20
Chapter 3
Access control applications
Summary
EST3 supports rugged and adaptable access control systems. This chapter introduces you to the equipment required for access control applications. This chapter also illustrates and describes several access control applications. Each application is presented as a separate topic that includes a block diagram and description. These give you an overview of the application, and show the components required and their interconnection. Refer to the EST3 Installation Sheets for specific component settings and terminal connections. Security applications make use of the CRC Card Reader Controller. Refer to the CRC and CRCXM Card Reader Controller Installation Sheet for specific installation information on this module.
Content Access control equipment 3.2 Anti-passback 3.10 Central monitoring station 3.13 Common door access 3.15 Delayed egress 3.17 Elevator control 3.20 Emergency exit door 3.23 Handicap access door 3.25 Maglock peripherals 3.27 Multiple card readers 3.29 Muster 3.31 Power for continuous locks 3.34 Power for intermittent locks 3.36 Power from an AC source 3.38 Power from a remote source 3.41 Remote controls 3.44 Two-person rule 3.46
3.1
Access control equipment

Introduction
The equipment required for a basic networked access control system is shown in Figure 3-1. Well discuss each item shown in the figure, plus the other factors called out on the drawing.
Input circuit 1
Input circuit 2
Control panel
3-SAC Security Access Control Module SAC bus CRC Card Reader Controller
3-MODCOM Modem Communication Module Output circuit Card reader Lock
Telephone lines
Distributor
ACDB program SDU

RPM
Resource profile
Figure 3-1: Equipment required for a basic access control system
Equipment
Here is a list of the equipment used in a basic networked access control system: 3-SAC Security Access Control module 3-MODCOM Modem Communication module SAC bus CRC Card Reader Controller Input circuit 1
3.2
Input circuit 2 Output circuit Card reader Lock RPM Resource Profile Manager tool ACDB Access Control Database program

The 3-SAC Security Access Control rail module controls a highspeed RS-485 circuit called the Security Access Control (SAC) bus. The SAC bus supports fire, security, and access control devices. The 3-SAC handles message traffic for these devices, interfacing them with the CPU as required. Events are passed from the devices to the 3-SAC module, then to the CPU for alarm processing. The 3-SAC has two sets of circuit terminals, and is capable of Class A or Class B configuration. Each Class B circuit can include 31 devices, for a total of 62 devices per module. Class A circuits can include 30 devices total. In Figure 3-1, we show a Class B bus with a CRC Card Reader Controller module.

The 3-MODCOM Modem Communicator module has both modem and dialer functions. It can transmit and receive information. The 3-MODCOM can transmit alarm, supervisory, or trouble messages to a remote central monitoring station using one or two telephone lines. A variation of the module (3-MODCOMP) can transmit pager messages to a paging company using the TAP protocol. The module can also receive information sent over telephone lines by the Access Control Database (ACDB) program.
SAC bus
Since our security and access control devices require 24 Vdc, we suggest that you always use a four-wire cable for the SAC bus and a 24 Vdc power supply. For the data wires, use unshielded, twisted pair, with greater than 6 twists per foot, in 14 to 22 AWG (1.50 to 0.25 sq mm). For the power wires, use 14 or 16 AWG. You can use a four-conductor cable with an overall jacket containing solid 2-19 AWG and 2-16 AWG for the SAC bus.
3.3
The maximum run from a CRC to the 3-SAC is 4,000 ft (1,220 m) at 25 pF/ft. The maximum total capacitance of the run is 0.1 F, and the maximum total resistance is 52 .
CRC Card Reader Controller

The Card Reader Controller (CRC) module performs all access decision processing. Each CRC stores a database and is capable of granting or denying entry without external communication. If entry is granted, the CRC applies or removes power to the strike or maglock to unlock the door. The CRC is also capable of unlocking a door by activating a manual push button. Each CRC stores an access database of users and events for the door it controls. The CRCXM model features enhanced storage capacity. (Refer to the product installation sheets for quantities.) Each CRC has terminals that support: Two card readers, typically one inside and one outside the door One lock device, either strike or maglock type Two input circuits for devices such as request to exit detectors, door contacts, or motion detectors One output circuit with N.O and N.C. contacts for auxiliary devices, such as door openers
With the addition of an internal battery, the CRC can continue processing access events even if there is a loss of communication or power.
CRC options
CRCSND CRC Sounder
The CRC Sounder is a small horn that mounts inside the card reader controller module. The sounder operates if an emergency exit door is opened without an exit request and can also indicate that a door has been left open. The CRC Sounder can be programmed, using rules written in the SDU. Further, the ACDB program can control several operating parameters of the sounder.
CRCRL CRC Accessory Relay
The CRCRL is an accessory relay for the CRC(XM) Card Reader Controller. Use the CRCRL in conjunction with an external power supply to control a lock which requires voltage or current outside the CRC's operating range.
3.4
The CRCRL can be mounted inside the CRC housing when connected to power-limited wiring. The unit includes a hookand-loop patch which can be attached to the CRC battery strap. When nonpower-limited wiring is used, the CRCRL must be mounted in a junction box. The CRCRL is listed as an Access Control Accessory and Control Unit Accessory.
Battery
Each CRC has space for an internal, 1.2 Ah, sealed lead-acid battery. The battery supplies power to the CRC and its peripherals, and provides local standby power. The CRC battery provides 30 minutes of standby power for access control functions and up to 4 hours for security functions. The battery cannot be used for fire applications.
CRCXF - CRC Transformer
The CRCXF - CRC Transformer is a 16.5 Vac transformer that can power the CRC or CRCXM. It provides local power for applications requiring additional power at door lock. The CRC has AC load terminals for easy connection to transformer. Be sure to check the CRC installation sheet P/N 387625 for a list of applications that prohibit the use of the CRCXF.
Input circuits 1 and 2

Each CRC supports two input circuits for such devices as: Door contacts Motion detectors Request to exit buttons Security devices
A door contact device monitors the door position (open or closed) for various applications. A motion detector detects a persons approach and can be used to unlock the door. A request to exit (REX) push button (or bar) can be used to manually unlock the door. Security devices, such as glass-break detectors can be associated with the door to enhance its security, or to monitor a nearby window.
Output circuit
Each CRC supports one output circuit in the form of N.O. and N.C. dry contact connections. The output circuit can be used for such devices as:
3.5
Automatic door openers Fan and damper control Door holder control
Card reader
By card reader, we mean any of the different types of credential reader supported by the CRC. A card reader scans a card to determine the card number and passes the card number to the CRC. A card reader is a self-contained module capable of reading one type of access card and transmitting the cards code to a card reader controller. All the required electronics are assembled in the card reader housing. The card reader connects directly to the CRC, which processes the card code and grants or denies access. Each CRC can support several card readers. Typically, a CRC will control an entry and exit card reader for the doorway. It can also support multiple readers for such applications as two-person rule or anti-passback. Note that the CRC supports any type of reader that uses the industry standard Wiegand output format. These include: Proximity Wiegand pin Magnetic stripe Bar code Keypad Smart card Biometric
For simplicity, we present all the applications in this chapter as operating with proximity readers, but other reader types can be used. Some applications work best with card readers that support dual LED control. The CRC uses two LEDs, or two LED states, to indicate that further actions are required after the initial badging operation, before access is granted. These applications are: Two-person rule Visitor and escort PIN schedule
Some card readers are also equipped with a keypad. The keypad allows for entry of a PIN number in addition to the card code. The CRC can accommodate any PIN number of 1-4 digits along with the associated card code. The need to enter a PIN is controlled by two factors: whether or not the CRC is armed, and whether or not the access schedule calls for use of a PIN.
3.6
Lock
The CRC supports any type of door locking or releasing device. Common lock devices are strikes and maglocks. A strike opens the door when power is supplied, while a maglock secures the door while power is supplied.
RPM Resource Profile Manager tool

The Resource Profile Manager (RPM) tool is part of the SDU. It uses the project database to let you create a separate resource profile for each company that will be using the access control system. The resource profile defines the access control system for the ACDB program. It includes detailed information about each CRC used by a given company. For example: Communication method Primary or secondary control Number of cardholders Number of schedules Number of holidays Number of access levels Command lists used
ACDB Access Control Database program

The Access Control Database (ACDB) program lets the user define and maintain a database of information about CRCs, cardholders, and access levels. The ACDB program runs on the users PC. Additions or updates to the access control database can be transmitted to the CRC units in two ways. The first method is via modem and dial-up telephone line to the 3-MODCOM. The information is then routed to the CPU, through the correct 3-SACs, and finally to the CRC units. The second method is by connecting the users PC directly to the CPU using an RS-232 cable. The connection is made between the PCs COM1 port and any of the RS-232 terminals on the CPU. As in the first method, after reaching the CPU additions and changes are routed through the correct 3-SACs to the CRCs.
Note: Changes to the access control database have no impact on the parameters or operations of listed fire system equipment.
Other factors
Next, well cover the additional factors listed on the drawing: Power supply Hardware configuration
3.7
SDU programming ACDB/KDC operation
These factors are called out on each application diagram given in this chapter.
Power supply
The CRC is designed to operate on 24 Vdc. For this reason, we recommend that you include power from the panel with the SAC bus cable. You can use the panel 3-PPS/M, 3-BPS/M, or 3-BBC/M power supplies. When using CRCXF - CRC Transformer you must provide a circuit common path between all devices, using the 24 Vdc terminals. If you use an additional power supply other than the CRCXF, that power supply must be listed for fire alarm applications, must have ground fault detection disabled, and must have a circuit ground (circuit common) that is isolated from earth ground.
The CRC has two jumpers that configure the power source and usage for the module. See the CRC installation sheet for details on the jumper settings. No other configuration settings are made at the device itself. All other configuration is done via SDU or ACDB programming. The SDU determines site-level configuration and parameters. The ACDB program controls end-user settings.
SDU programming
While the ACDB program defines the access control database, all other definition, configuration, and programming for the access control system happens in the SDU. The SDU controls the general configuration of the 3-SAC modules, plus the configuration of all CRC devices on the SAC busses. CRC modules can be configured to execute a specific, predefined command list when a specific access control event occurs. You write the command lists in the SDU, and assign them to CRC events when you configure the CRC module. Partitions are fundamental groups used with access control systems. To use such access control features as two man rule, muster, or anti-passback, CRCs must belong to the same partition. All partitions are created and defined in the SDU, and each CRC can be assigned to a partition.
3.8
For the 3-MODCOM module, the SDU determines the dialer and modem parameters, defines the receivers and accounts, and assigns each account to the correct receiver. These settings control CMS reporting and ACDB download operation. Finally, the SDU includes the RPM tool, described earlier in this topic.
ACDB operation
The ACDB program lets the end user create and revise his access control database. Parameters stored in the database identify cardholders, schedules, and holidays, and assign access privileges. The SDU includes a tool called the Resource Profile Manager (RPM). The RPM lets you create a resource profile for each company using the system for access control purposes. During setup of the ACDB program, the user imports the resource profile created by the RPM. This defines the system devices for the ACDB program. The ACDB runs on the end users computer. You can connect the computer to the access control system in two ways: From an RS-232 port on the computer to an RS-232 port on the CPU From the computer modem to a 3-MODCOM via telephone lines
The end result is that the ADCB database can be downloaded from the users computer to the system. Each CRC stores that portion of the database pertinent to its operation.

The remaining topics in this chapter discuss specific access control applications. Each topic gives you an overview of the application, showing the components required and their interconnection. Each topic includes a block diagram and general description of the application. Other factors (as called out on the drawings) are discussed under separate headings in the topic.
3.9
Anti-passback
Anti-passback is a feature of the access control system that prevents successive use of one card to pass through any door in the same direction. Anti-passback prevents a card from being passed back to another person for the purpose of gaining unauthorized access. The CRC supports three forms of anti-passback: Strict Logged Timed
Strict anti-passback is the most restrictive form of anti-passback. It requires all personnel to badge in and out, denying them access to an area when they fail to do so. Logged anti-passback is less restrictive than strict anti-passback. It still requires personnel to badge in and out but does not deny access when anti-passback rules are violated. Rather, such access is logged as an access granted anti-passback event. With logged anti-passback, security staff can work to correct violations, but personnel are not locked out. Timed anti-passback prevents reuse of a card for a specific period, but does not require personnel to badge out. A timed anti-passback system automatically badges a cardholder out of the controlled partition after a specified time period, allowing the card to be used again.
Note: Timed anti-passback cannot be used with a muster application, since the system automatically logs cardholders out of the partition, defeating muster accounting.
To implement anti-passback, a separate CRC is required at each doorway in the controlled partition. Each doorway requires an outside card reader. Strict and logged anti-passback applications also require an inside reader at every doorway. Timed antipassback does not require the use of an inside card reader. A typical anti-passback application is shown in Figure 3-2, below. The figure shows a building with a perimeter fence. It would be easy for an employee to pass his access card to an unauthorized individual through the fence, thereby allowing access. Configuring the access control system for anti-passback operation can help prevent this from happening.
3.10
Perimeter fence
Entrance turnstile
Outside reader Inside reader
SITE
Building entrance
Lock circuit
Reader circuit
CRC
SAC bus
Main building
Control panel 3-SAC
Emergency exit
Other factors Power supply X Hardware configuration X SDU programming X ACDB/KDC operation
Figure 3-2: Anti-passback
The control panel must contain a 3-SAC Security Access Control module. The 3-SAC module supports the SAC bus. Power for the CRC can be taken from the 3-PPS/M, 3-BPS/M, or 3-BBC/M and routed with the data lines in a cable composed of two twisted-pair wires (the SAC bus).
3.11
SDU programming
If the CRC is to be used for anti-passback this must be configured using the SDU. The CRC configuration dialogs let you select the type of anti-passback you want to use: None Logged Timed Strict
You can also assign a predefined command list to various access granted or access denied events, including the anti-passback events: Access granted anti-passback Access denied anti-passback
The CPU runs the command list you specify when either of these events occurs.
ACDB programming
With timed anti-passback, the cardholder is automatically marked out after a specified period of time. This period is defined by the ACDB. The period can be set from 0 through 255 minutes (4 hours and 15 minutes).
3.12

An access control system can transmit different kinds of event information to a central monitoring station (CMS). The basics for such a system are shown in Figure 3-3.
Card reader
CRC
SAC bus Control panel 3-SAC CPU 3-MODCOM Formatted CMS message Telephone line
Other factors Power supply Hardware configuration X SDU programming ACDB/KDC operation
Access denied event
Programmed rules for transmission
Figure 3-3: Access control reporting to a central monitoring station
When a reportable access event occurs, the event message travels from the CRC to the 3-SAC. The 3-SAC passes the message to the CPU, which executes a predefined command list. The command list specifies the details of the message that is sent to the 3-MODCOM for transmission to the CMS.
3.13
SDU programming
Reporting access control events to a CMS depends entirely on programming and the creation of command lists. In essence, you must assign a command list to each CRC event you want to report. The command list contains the details of the message to be transmitted. The following CRC events can be assigned command events: Access granted Access granted irregular Access granted anti-passback Access granted muster Access denied unknown Access denied reader disabled Access denied access level not active Access denied outside schedule 1 Access denied outside schedule 2 Access denied partition armed Access denied PIN not entered Access denied PIN not valid Access denied two-person timeout Access denied anti-passback Access denied escort
3.14
Common door access

A site that makes use of a common door is shown in Figure 3-4. Here, the door is the main entrance of an office building, and leads into a common lobby area. Within the building, two companies rent offices, each with controlled access doors.
Telephone lines Site owner ACDB Modem Control panel 3-SAC 3-MODCOM Common door CR 1 CRC 1
SITE
Lobby SAC bus
Distributor Site Owner SDU Company A RPM Company B ACDB Modem
Suite 101 Company A

CRC 2
Suite 102 Resource profiles

Company B
CRC 3 CR 3
ACDB Modem
Figure 3-4: Common door in a lobby area
CR 2
3.15
The site has an EST3 control panel that includes a 3-SAC and a 3-MODCOM module. The 3-SAC supports the SAC bus. The 3-MODCOM module supports modem communication with the control panel over telephone lines.
SDU programming
As the distributor, you use the SDU to program the control panel for this application. Part of the programming job is to use the Resource Profile Manager (RPM) to create resource profiles for the site owner and for each tenant company. Resource profiles are imported into the Access Control Database (ACDB) program. They determine which devices the user can see and program. Resource profiles also establish transmission routes that permit modem communication with the EST3 panel. When a device is shared, the RPM lets you specify how much of the device is allocated to each company. You can allocate resources either by percentages or by actual numbers. Its a good idea to hold some allocation in reserve, giving each company only what it needs. It is much easier to allocate additional resources as needed than to reclaim resources that are already allocated. In our example, the resource profile for company A would contain CRC 1 (the lobby door) and CRC 2 (the suite 101 door). For Company A, you might choose to allocate 80% of CRC 2, and 20% of CRC 1. Similarly, the resource profile for company B would allocate 80% of CRC 3 and another 20% of CRC 1. The site owner will need access to the CRC2 and CRC3 doors for cleaning or inspection purposes. The site owner resource profile could allocate 20% of CRC 1, 10 % of CRC 2, and 10% of CRC 3. This leaves 40% of CRC1 unallocated, and 10% of CRC2 and CRC3 unallocated. The unallocated resources are reserved for future expansion or changes.
ACDB operation
The site owner, the owner of company A, and the owner of company B, can all use telephone lines to communicate with the control panel via the 3-MODCOM module. They can download additions and changes to the CRCs, and upload usage data for various ACDB reports.
3.16
Delayed egress
Delayed egress doors help to control shoplifting at retail sites. A delayed egress door has card readers and a request to exit (REX) switch. Employees can badge in and out as they would at any other door. In an emergency, customers must press the REX switch to unlock the door. When the REX switch is activated, the CRC sounds the CRCSND horn and sends a security alarm event to the panel. It does not unlock the door immediately, thus allowing site staff time to investigate. The CRC waits for a specific interval of time before unlocking the door. The typical delay time is 15 seconds; however, you may be able to use a delay of up to 30 seconds with the approval of the AHJ. The horn continues to sound for a specific period of time, or until the CRC is reset. After the delay time passes, the CRC unlocks the door, and latches it in the unlocked state. The CRC must be reset in order to relock the door and silence the horn. To reset the CRC, site staff must use a valid badge at the card reader. The CRC also activates the CRCSND horn if the door is opened without badging. For example, if the door is forced open from the outside, the CRCSND activates, even though the REX has not been pressed. Many codes require that delayed egress doors unlock during a fire alarm, or when the panel is in trouble. This requirement allows occupants to evacuate the site immediately when a fire is detected, or when the panel loses its ability to detect a fire or sound the alarm. Figure 3-5 shows a delayed egress door with inside and outside card readers and a request to exit switch. The CRC uses a door contact switch to determine the position of the door, and a maglock to lock the door. The door contact switch and REX switch are connected to the input loops of the CRC.
Note: Refer to NFPA 101 and the local AHJ to determine the requirements for delayed egress applications.
3.17
Card reader inside
CRC CRCSND
Card reader outside
Door contact
Maglock
REX switch
Figure 3-5: Delayed egress doorway
A maglock is most commonly used for delayed egress applications, but you can use any locking device that has no manual override. For example, a strike with no knob could be used. The door contact is used to detect unauthorized opening of the door. The CRC activates the CRCSND and reports a security alarm event when the door is opened without badging or use of the REX. The door contact signal is also required to relock the door when the CRC is reset. The lock cannot be reset until the door is closed.
SDU programming
Most codes require you to program rules that unlock the door when the panel goes into alarm or when the panel goes into trouble. When configuring the CRC, set the Delayed Egress Time field to the value (in seconds) you want to use. Define the input loops as follows.
3.18
For the door contact input loop: Device Type = Security P Monitor Input Circuit Partition = as determined by project Max Delta Count = as determined by project Delays = None Application = Emergency Exit Door Contact Personality = Basic Device Type = Monitor Input Circuit Partition = None Max Delta Count = not applicable Delays = None Application = Request to Exit with Delayed Egress Personality = N.O. with Trouble
For the request to exit switch:
ACDB operation
When an employee badges in or out at the door, the CRC bypasses the door contact for a specified period of time. This is called the Bypass Time, and is specified in the ACDB. The duration of the CRCSND horn is also specified in the ACDB, as the Emergency Exit Sounder Time. This can be set to any value between 0 and 255 seconds. Setting the value to 0 seconds effectively inhibits the CRCSND. Setting the value to 255 seconds programs the CRC to operate the CRCSND until the CRC is manually reset by badging at the CRC card reader.
3.19
Elevator control
An access control system can determine which floors are available to a given cardholder. This application is shown in Figure 3-6. A CRC and independent power source are installed in the elevator cab. When a cardholder presents his card it is processed by the CRC. If valid, the CRC sends an access granted event and a command list request to the CPU via the 3-SAC. The command list operates the Signature relay modules attached to the Signature Controller module. The relays are connected to the elevator controller, and turn on or off access to the correct floors, according to the cardholders access level privileges. The command list includes timing, so the cardholder has a limited window of opportunity during which he can press the desired floor button. After the time has lapsed, he must present his card again.
Note: This application must be used only for floor access, and NOT for elevator control.
3.20
Elevator room Elevator controller SIGA-CR Floor enabling circuits SIGA-CR SIGA-CR
Elevator traveller cable Signature data circuit Electrical room SAC bus (using two spare twisted pairs) Control panel Signature Controller CPU 3-SAC
Elevator line
Elevator cab Operator panel
CRC
Other factors
Card reader
CRCXF Transformer
X Power supply X Hardware configuration X SDU programming X ACDB/KDC operation
Figure 3-6: Access control and elevators
3.21
Power supply
The figure shows an independent power source for the CRC. This is suggested due to the length of cable from the cab to the electrical room. Two pairs of wires are used to connect the CRC to the control panel. The SAC bus requires one pair for data communication. One wire of the second pair is required to maintain a common ground between the control panel and the CRC. For details, refer to the topic Power from an AC source, later in this chapter. If you use an additional power supply other than the CRCXF, that power supply must be listed for fire alarm applications, must have ground fault detection disabled, and must have a circuit ground (circuit common) that is isolated from earth ground.
In this application, none of the CRC input circuits or relay contacts are used. The CRC simply reads the card and passes the command list request to the 3-SAC and CPU for processing. Since the CRC lock and input circuits are not used, you must provide dummy loads to maintain correct supervision currents. See the installation sheet for the correct load values.
SDU programming
The SDU programmer must create a command list for each combination of floors desired.
ACDB operation
The site security officer determines which floors should be accessible for an access level, and assigns the correct command list to the access granted event for that level. The site security officer also determines which cardholders belong to each access level.
3.22
Emergency exit door

An emergency exit door is a door that is unlocked from the inside either by badging out or by opening the door. If the door is opened without badging out, it causes an immediate alarm. Badging out bypasses the door for a specific period of time, so no alarm event occurs. A typical CRC application for emergency exit door is shown in Figure 3-7 below.
CRC CRCSND
Door contact
Card reader outside
Card reader inside
Strike
Figure 3-7: Emergency exit door Note: Refer to NFPA 101 and the local AHJ to determine the requirements for emergency exit applications.
A CRC used for an emergency exit door requires the following additional hardware: CRCSND CRC Sounder Door contact
The CRCSND is installed inside the CRC. The sounder provides a local sound alarm. Opening the door without badging out activates the CRCSND. The door contact is connected to the CRC via the input circuit.
3.23
SDU programming
In the SDU, youll need to define the input circuit for the door contact as follows: Device type: Security P Monitor Delays: None Application: Door Contact Personality: Basic
ACDB operation
Two time periods are defined in the ACDB: Emergency Exit Sounder Time, and Bypass Time. Emergency Exit Sounder Time is the number of seconds (0 through 255) the CRC Sounder sounds when an emergency exit door is opened without badging out. When set to zero, the sounder is disabled. When set to 255, the sounder sounds until manually reset. The sounder is reset when a cardholder badges in at the door. In all cases badging in on the affected CRC can silence the sounder. Bypass Time is the number of seconds (0 through 255) that the door is bypassed after a cardholder badges out.
3.24
Handicap access door

Description of application
A handicap access door is a door that helps a handicapped person enter and exit a door by allowing extra access time and providing an automatic door opener. See Figure 3-8, below. The door can function for both normal access and handicap access. A person without handicap privileges would operate the door just as any other door. When a person with handicap privileges badges in, the CRC recognizes that the person has handicap privileges and provides two extra benefits. The first is giving the handicap person extra time to enter or exit the doorway before relocking the door. The second is an automatic door opener. A second card reader can be installed in parallel to the entry or exit card reader to make it easier for a handicapped person to reach. The second card reader should be placed at a lower level and farther away from the door. The distance from the door should allow the automatic door to open fully without a person needing to move backwards.
CRC
Door opener
Card reader outside
Card reader inside
Lock
Handicap card reader outside
Handicap card reader inside
Figure 3-8: Handicap access door
3.25
Access control applications Note: Refer to the appropriate ADA codes and the local AHJ to determine the requirements for handicap access door applications.
A CRC used for a handicap access door may require the following additional hardware: Automatic door opener Additional card readers
The automatic door opener is installed directly to the access door. The CRC controls the opening of the door with its internal relay.
Caution: The CRC relay is for low-voltage only. Do not exceed
the relay limits stated on the installation sheet. The additional card readers are wired to the standard card readers in parallel.
SDU programming
In the SDU, youll need to define the CRC relay device type as Access Door Control. This will activate the door opener for the time specified by the ACDB.
ACDB operation
The relay open time needs to be defined in the ACDB. This is the number of seconds (0 through 255) that the CRC will activate the relay that automatically opens the door. The default is 30 seconds. The handicap unlock time also needs to be defined in the ACDB. This is the number of seconds (0 through 255) that the lock will stay unlocked. The default is 20 seconds The door will relock when the unlock time has expired and the door has closed. Both of these times can be set to allow a longer access time for a handicapped person.
3.26
Maglock peripherals
Maglocks require maglock peripherals due to NFPA codes. In general, these devices are intended to ensure that an egress door secured with a maglock can always be opened in an emergency. Figure 3-9 shows the CRC using a maglock and required peripherals. Maglock application requires a passive infrared motion detector (PIR) to be mounted above the door. Also required is a request to exit button (REX) to be mounted within five feet of the door and 40 to 48 inches above the ground. The PIR is connected on the input circuit of the CRC. The REX is connected directly to the maglock so that when activated it unlocks the door independently of the CRC. The CRC is designed so that on detection of a fault on the input circuit of the PIR, the door will unlock. The PIR detects an approaching body and unlocks the door. Similarly, the REX button unlocks the door when it is pressed. The REX button must unlock the door for a minimum of 30 seconds.
CRC
Passive infrared detector
Maglock
Other factors Power supply X X Hardware configuration SDU programming ACDB/KDC operation
Request to exit button
Figure 3-9: Maglock and peripherals
3.27
The maglock peripherals consist of the following: Passive infrared motion detector (PIR) Request to exit button (REX)
The PIR is connected via the CRC input circuit. The REX is connected directly to the maglock instead of the CRC input circuit to meet NFPA requirements.
SDU programming
When programming the system for this application youll need to configure the CRC, defining the device type. Youll also need to define the input circuits. For this application define the input circuit for the PIR as follows: Device type = Security interior Application = Request to exit motion detector.
3.28
Multiple card readers

Several access control applications require the use of multiple card readers. For example: Visitor and escort readers High and low position readers
The CRC lets you use multiple card readers of the same technology or of mixed technologies. It can support up to four card readers, provided that the total current draw of the readers does not exceed the limits specified on the CRC installation sheet. A visitor and escort application using multiple card readers is shown in Figure 3-10, below. In this application, both the escort and visitor must badge in to gain access. The escort has a permanent, plastic card, and uses the proximity card reader. The visitor is issued an inexpensive paper bar code card, and uses the bar code reader.
CRC
Proximity card reader
Bar code card reader
Proximity card reader
Bar code card reader
Outside card readers
Inside card readers

Figure 3-10: Multiple card readers
Card reader
This application works best with card readers that support dual LED control. The CRC uses the second LED (or LED state) to
3.29
signal the visitor that the escort must badge in before access is granted.
The proximity card reader and barcode card reader are connected to the same terminals of the CRC.
SDU programming
When an escorted visitor tries to enter a controlled area without an employee, the CRC generates an access denied escort event. You can select a predefined command list that the CPU executes in response to this event.
ACDB operation
Like employees, visitors must be assigned an access level using the ACDB. The site security officer can elect to assign the same access level to all visitor cards, or assign different access levels to ranges of visitor cards.
3.30
Muster
The muster application can be used to determine who has exited the building in the event of an evacuation. During normal operations, staff badge in and out using the inside and outside readers. Note that muster reporting will only work if all employees badge in and out. During an evacuation, everyone exits the building immediately and goes to one of the predetermined muster stations. At the muster station personnel badge in using a reader that is attached to a CRC designated as a muster station. After everyone has badged in at the muster station security staff use the ACDB program to create a muster report. The report lists staff who badged into the building but did not badge out at a muster station. Figure 3-11 shows a typical muster application. CRCs 2, 3, 5, and 6 are normal access control CRCs. CRCs 1 and 4 are muster station CRCs. The ACDB computer must be located in a safe area so security staff can create the muster report after the evacuation. This computer can connect to the access control system either via telephone lines and a 3-MODCOM, or by direct connection to the EST3 control panel.
Note: Links between the ADCB computer and the control panel should be tested regularly to ensure correct operation.
Staff must be made aware of the importance of badging in and out at all times. Failure to do so can result in a false muster report, indicating that someone is still in the building. This in turn can result in rescue personnel risking danger to search for someone who is not actually in the building.
3.31
Muster station Card reader
Entrance CRC 2
CR outside CR inside
Entrance CRC 3
CR outside CR inside
CRC 1 SAC bus Control panel 3-SAC 3-PPS/M MODCOM
CRC 4
CR inside CR outside
CRC 6 Emergency exit Telephone line Muster report station
CRC 5 Emergency exit
Muster station Card reader
ACDB
Figure 3-11: Muster application
3.32
The control panel must contain the following rail modules: 3-SAC Security Access Control module 3-PPS/M Primary Power Supply module 3-MODCOM Modem Communication module or 3-RS232 Card option installed in the CPU
The 3-SAC module supports the SAC bus. Power for the CRC is normally taken from the 3-PPS/M, 3-BPS/M, or 3-BBC/M and is routed with the data lines in a cable composed of two twistedpair wires. The 3-MODCOM module supports modem communication between the control panel and the ACDB program via telephone lines. Alternately, the 3-RS232 Card supports RS-232 communications on a cable connected directly to the CPU. All CRCs controlled by a muster station must be on the same 3-SAC card as the muster station. Badging out at a muster station badges the person out of all partitions for that 3-SAC card. Therefore, a single muster station can serve multiple partitions, provided that they are on the same 3-SAC card. The system must have at least one muster CRC per 3-SAC module. The system cannot exchange muster information between 3-SAC modules, so each must be handled separately for muster purposes. A CRC used for a muster station requires the specified dummy load on the lock terminals to maintain supervision. (Refer to the CRC installation sheet for correct resistor values.) The card reader used for the muster station must be wired as an outside reader.
SDU programming
Each CRC used in a muster application requires specific configuration settings. These are made in the SDU program, on the CRC Configuration tab. If the CRC is used in a partition that has muster control, check the Muster Support box. For the CRC designated as the muster station, check the Muster Station box, but leave the Muster Support box clear. In the SDU, you can also assign a predefined command list to the Access Granted Muster event.
3.33
Power for continuous locks

By continuous locks, we mean locks that operate, on average, more than 30 seconds in every minute. Normally, power for the lock is taken from the CRC battery. However, for continuous locks there is not enough recharge time for the CRC battery to keep up with the drain. Consequently, the CRC must be configured so that an external power supply operates the lock. The CRC can be powered by the 3-PPS/M, by a CRCXF (CRC Transformer), or by a remote 24 Vdc power supply. Any of these supplies is suitable for powering continuous locks. (See the topics Power from an AC source and Power from a remote source for more information about these options.) A typical application using continuous locks is shown in Figure 3-12, below.
Control panel
3-PPS/M
3-SAC
24 Vdc SAC bus 24 Vdc remote power supply or CRCXF transformer
CRC
Other factors X Power supply X Hardware configuration X SDU programming ACDB/KDC operation
Card reader
Strike or maglock
Figure 3-12: CRC controlling a continuous lock The figure shows the power coming from the 3-PPS/M in the control panel. This power supply could be used to operate the
3.34
lock, but use of a CRCXF or remote 24 Vdc supply is recommended to minimize the load on the panel power supply. During open schedules, or when an authorized card is read at a card reader, the CRC provides power from the 3-PPS/M to the door strike to unlock the door. For maglocks, the CRC provides power from the 3-PPS/M, 3-BPS/M, or 3-BBC/M (or CRCXF or 24 Vdc power supply) to activate the lock during closed schedules, or between authorized card accesses.
Power supply
Use power and load calculations to determine the need for remote power supplies or transformers. Refer to the CRC Technical Reference Manual for calculation guidelines. Jumper settings determine the power source and usage for the CRC. Refer to the installation sheet for correct jumper settings. Configure the input power as DC when using power from the control panel or a remote supply. Configure input power as AC when using a transformer. For this application, configure the output power as continuous.
The control panel must contain the following rail modules: 3-SAC Security Access Control module 3-PPS/M Primary Power Supply module
The 3-SAC module supports the SAC bus. Power for the CRC is taken from the 3-PPS/M and is routed with the data lines in a cable composed of two twisted-pair wires.
SDU programming
When configuring the system for this application, youll need to configure the CRC and define the appropriate lock type in the SDU. For this application the Lock Type can be either Strike or Maglock as required to match the lock actually used.
3.35
Power for intermittent locks

By intermittent locks, we mean locks that operate, on average, less than 30 seconds in every minute. In these applications, the CRC battery can provide the power needed to operate the lock. The CRC can be powered by the 3-PPS/M. It uses this power source to charge an internal 1.2 Ah sealed lead acid battery. The battery then provides the power needed to operate the door lock. Because the battery powers the door strike, this configuration cannot be used for maglocks or strikes that are active more than 30 seconds in a minute. In these conditions the battery would not have enough time to charge and keep up with the drain. For heavy or continuous duty applications, refer to the topic Power for continuous locks presented in this chapter. A typical application using CRC battery power is shown in Figure 3-13, below.
Control panel
3-PPS/M
3-SAC
24 Vdc SAC bus
CRC
Other factors X Power supply X Hardware configuration
Card reader
Strike
X SDU programming X ACDB/KDC operation
Figure 3-13: CRC controlling an intermittent strike
3.36
The figure shows the charging power coming from the 3-PPS/M in the control panel. The access control system requires a 24 Vdc power supply to power the CRC and to charge its battery. The 3-SAC connects to the CRC through the SAC bus. When an authorized card is read at a card reader, the CRC provides power from its internal battery to the door strike and unlocks the door.
Power supply
Jumper settings determine the power source and usage for the CRC. Refer to the installation sheet for correct jumper settings. Configure the input power as DC. Configure the output power as intermittent.
The 3-SAC module supports the SAC bus. Power for the CRC is taken from the 3-PPS/M and is routed with the data lines in a cable composed of two twisted-pair wires.
SDU programming
When configuring the system for this application, youll need to configure the CRC and define the appropriate lock type in the SDU. For this application set the Lock Type to Strike.
ACDB operation
Note that a CRC configured and programmed for intermittent lock use cannot support an open schedule (a period when the lock is kept open). Such a schedule would quickly drain the CRC battery and the lock would close. You should document the CRC configuration and include this in your project plans. Make a copy of this documentation available to the site security staff who will use the ADCB to create and assign schedules.
3.37
Power from an AC source

By AC power, we mean that the CRC provides the power to operate the electric door strike or maglock by using a 16.5 Vac transformer (model CRCXF). This supply can provide continuous power to the door strike or maglock, and also power the CRC. Using an AC source: Limits power drawn from the control panel Supports continuous duty locks Supports schedules with unlock periods
Note: Be sure to check the installation sheet for the CRC and CRCXM Card Reader Controller (P/N: 387625) for a list of applications that prohibit the use of the CRCXF.
A typical CRC using AC power is shown in Figure 3-14.
3.38
Control panel 3-PPS/M 3-SAC
SAC bus
24 Vdc connects to CRC terminals, but bypasses CRC internally Passive infrared detector
CRCXF Transformer
CRC
Card reader
Maglock or strike
Other factors X X X Power supply Hardware configuration SDU programming ACDB/KDC operation
Figure 3-14: CRC using AC power
The figure above shows the CRC power coming from the 16.5 Vac transformer. The 3-PPS/M power supply coming from the control panel simply passes through the CRC. The 3-SAC connects to the CRC through the SAC bus. This wiring is shown in Figure 3-15.
3.39
Control panel Power supply 24 Vdc CRC 24 Vdc CRC 24 Vdc
CRCXF Transformer (16.5 Vac) CRC 24 Vdc
Figure 3-15: Wiring details for transformer supply
Power supply
Jumper settings determine the power source and usage for the CRC. Configure the input power as . Configure the output power as continuous. If you use an additional power supply other than the CRCXF, that power supply must be listed for fire alarm applications, must have ground fault detection disabled, and must have a circuit ground (circuit common) that is isolated from earth ground.
The 3-SAC module supports the SAC bus. Power for the CRC is normally taken from the 3-PPS/M and is routed with the data lines in a cable composed of two twisted-pair wires. In this case the power from the 3-PPS/M is connected to the CRC terminals, but internally bypassed. The 16.5 Vac transformer should be plugged into a continuously energized socket, not one controlled by a switch.
SDU programming
When programming the system for this application, youll need to configure the CRC and define the appropriate lock type in the SDU. This can be either a strike or maglock.
3.40
Power from a remote source

By remote power, we mean that the CRC provides the power to operate the electronic door strike or maglock by using a remote power supply. This additional power can provide continuous power to the door strike or maglock. A typical CRC using remote power is shown in Figure 3-16. The additional power is needed because the CRC battery can not keep up with the power needs of maglocks or strikes with an active duty cycle greater than 30 seconds in a minute. In these conditions the battery does not have enough time to charge and keep up with the drain. The figure shows power coming from the additional remote power supply to power the CRC and maglock. The supply is supervised by the Signature data circuit derived from the 3-SSDC module. The 3-SAC connects to the CRC through the SAC bus.
3.41
Control panel 3-PPS/M SAC bus 3-SAC Signature Controller +24 Vdc bypasses CRC
Passive infrared detector Remote power supply 24 Vdc
CRC
Card reader
Maglock or strike
SIGA loop monitors remote power supply
Other factors X Power supply X Hardware configuration X SDU programming ACDB/KDC operation
Figure 3-16: CRC using remote power
The negative side of the 3-PPS/M power supply coming from the control panel connects to the CRC (and to all other CRCs). The positive side is broken and the remote power supply picks up the load. This wiring is shown in Figure 3-17.
3.42
Control panel Power supply 24 Vdc CRC 24 Vdc CRC 24 Vdc
Remote power supply 24 Vdc CRC 24 Vdc
Figure 3-17: Wiring for remote power supply
Power supply
Jumper settings determine the power source and usage for the CRC. Configure the input power as . Configure the output power as continuous. Note that additional power supplies must be listed for fire alarm applications, must have ground fault detection disabled, and must have a circuit ground that is isolated from earth ground.
The control panel must contain the following rail modules: 3-SSDC Single Signature Controller module 3-SAC Security Access Control module 3-PPS/M Primary Power Supply module
The 3-SSDC module supports the SIGA loop, which supervises the remote power supply The 3-SAC module supports the SAC bus. Power for the CRC is normally taken from the 3-PPS/M and is routed with the data lines in a cable composed of two twisted-pair wires. In this case the power from the 3-PPS/M is simply passed through the CRC. The remote power supply is supervised by the 3-SSDC module via the Signature loop. The remote power supply must share a common ground with the 3-PPS/M.
SDU programming
When programming the system for this application, youll need to configure the CRC and define the appropriate lock type in the SDU. This can be either a strike or maglock.
3.43
Remote controls
In any access control system, a card reader and CRC can be used to operate devices that are completely remote from the CRC. In such cases the CRC simply creates an access event and passes it to the 3-SAC for processing by the CPU. Any device that can be controlled by an EST3 panel can be operated in response to an access event. As a typical example, Figure 3-18 shows how the entrance devices to a secured parking area could be operated from a remote card reader. Note that any type of CRC input device could be used in place of a card reader.
Control panel 3-SAC CPU Signature controller Command lists
SAC bus Card reader Signature data circuit
Signature relay
Gate opener
Signature relay CRC

Other factors X Power supply Hardware configuration
VCR
CRCXF
X SDU programming ACDB/KDC operation
Signature relay
Spotlight
Figure 3-18: Remote control of a parking garage entrance
When the cardholder badges in, the access event is sent from the CRC to the 3-SAC and then to the CPU. At the CPU, the access event activates a predefined command list.
3.44
The command list operates the Signature relays on the Signature data circuit supported by the Signature controller module. These relays activate the gate opener, a spotlight, and a VCR image recording system. An inside card reader and could be used to control exits from the area, but it would be more appropriate to use a motion detector, since egress from the area is not controlled.
Power supply
A CRCXF - CRC Transformer power supply is shown, assuming that the CRC is be located at some distance from the electrical room and control panel. If you use an additional power supply other than the CRCXF, that power supply must be listed for fire alarm applications, must have ground fault detection disabled, and must have a circuit ground (circuit common) that is isolated from earth ground.
SDU programming
The SDU programmer must create a command list that specifies activation of the correct relays and devices, the delays required, and the deactivation of the devices. Since there is no restoration phase of access events, the command list should include commands that turn off the devices.
3.45
Two-person rule
A two-person rule ensures that no staff member can be in a controlled area alone. A CRC operating under two-person rule prevents the entrance of a single person into the controlled area. When two people are present in the area, one cannot exit without the other. The controlled area can have a single entrance or multiple entrances. The network coordinates user information between the CRCs that serve a common area. A typical two-person rule application is shown in Figure 3-19, below.
3.46
Control panel 3-SAC 3-PPS/M SAC bus Entrance 1 CRC 1 CR outside CR inside
Controlled room
CRC 2 Entrance 2
Other factors X Power supply X Hardware configuration X SDU programming X ACDB/KDC programming
Figure 3-19: Two-person rule
Card reader
This application works best with card readers that support dual LED control. The CRC uses the second LED (or LED state) to signal the cardholder that a second person must badge in or out of the controlled area.
3.47
The 3-SAC module supports the SAC bus. Power for the CRC is normally taken from the 3-PPS/M and is routed with the data lines in a cable composed of two twisted-pair wires.
SDU programming
If the CRC is to be used for two-person rule it must be configured in the SDU. On the CRC Configuration tab, the 2 Person Rule box must be checked. You can also assign a predefined command list to the Access Denied 2 Person Timeout event. This setting is found on the CRC Command Lists tab.
3.48
Chapter 4
Centralized audio applications
Summary
EST3 supports centralized audio. This chapter introduces you to the equipment required, and discusses special installation and backup considerations for centralized audio applications. Refer to the EST3 Installation Sheets for specific component settings and terminal connections.
Content Equipment required 4.2 ATCP Amplifier Terminal Panel Cabinet 4.3 Overview 4.3 Equipment racks 4.3 ATP Amplifier Terminal Panel 4.6 Battery backup 4.7 Audio amplifiers 4.8 URSM Universal Riser Supervisory Module 4.10 Application 4.10 Installation 4.10 Terminal connections 4.10 Operation 4.11 ATP and 3-ATPINT installation 4.13 ATP installation 4.13 ATP wiring 4.14 ATP terminal connections 4.14 ATP jumper settings 4.15 3-ATPINT terminal connections 4.15 3-ATPINT Jumper Settings 4.16 ATP external battery charger 4.20 Amplifier backup 4.22 Branch speaker wiring 4.25 Troubleshooting 4.27
4.1
Equipment required
The EST3 system requires one 3-ZA20 amplifier for each audio channel to be operated simultaneously. The output of each amplifier is reduced from 25 Vrms to the appropriate input level (1 Vrms) using the 3-ATPINT interface, and then fed into the input of the banked amplifiers. The wiring between the output of each 3-ZA20 and its associated amplifier bank input should be twisted, shielded pair, and may be configured for Class A or Class B integrity monitoring. The output of the banked amplifiers (the audio riser) is directed to the appropriate areas using Signature Series modules. The SIGA-CC1 module, Figure 4-16, is used for single channel systems and the SIGA-CC2 module, Figure 4-17, is used for two channel systems. EST3 audio system programming requires that the Signature modules controlling the audio signals be programmed in addition to the programming required for the 3-ZA20 amplifier(s) supplying the audio signal.
Note: Remember to follow power-limited or nonpower-limited wiring practices as determined by the amplifier providing the audio signal.
4.2
ATCP Amplifier Terminal Panel Cabinet

Overview
The Amplifier Terminal Panel (ATP), the 3-ATPINT Interface, RKS series enclosures, and Dukane 125 W or 250 W audio power amplifiers are the basic components of the Amplifier Terminal Panel Cabinet (ATPC). Appropriately sized standby batteries, and in some situations an external battery charger, round out the equipment required in the ATPC. The ATPC may be located up to 3,000 ft (914 m) from the 3-ZA20 amplifiers supplying the audio signals.
Equipment racks
RKU-Series Equipment Racks are designed to support standard 19 in (48.26 cm) wide rack-mount components. These UL listed enclosures are constructed of 16 gauge steel, and finished in either white or black enamel. Interior-facing louvers on the two side panels and the back door provide ventilation for installed equipment, while maintaining a flush outside surface for side-by-side stacking of multiple racks. Six conduit knockouts for 1/2 in or 3/4 in conduit are available on the top end panel (three on top, three on the flange), and six on the bottom end panel (three on the bottom and three on the flange). Three 2.875 in (7.3 cm) diameter cable access holes are located on the bottom end panel for routing wiring to cabinet components. the equipment mounting rails on the front of the rack are recessed 0.625 in (1.59 cm). The louvered back door attaches to the cabinet with spring hinges allowing easy field access and door removal. A key lock is provided on the door for added security. Multiple racks can be installed side by side where additional cabinet capacity is required. The RKU series of 19 in (48.3 cm) equipment racks is used to house the banked amplifiers and associated equipment. Five sizes of racks are available to meet all requirements. These are listed in Table 4-1, below.
4.3
Table 4-1: RKU enclosure specifications Model RKU-36(B) RKU-42(B) RKU-61(B) RKU-70(B) RKU-77(B) Width 22.31 in (56.7 cm) 22.31 in (56.7 cm) 22.31 in (56.7 cm) 22.31 in (56.7 cm) 22.31 in (56.7 cm) Height 41.06 in (104.3 cm) 46.31in (117.6 cm) 65.56 in (166.5 cm) 74.31in (188.7 cm) 81.31 in (206.5 cm) Depth 18.50 in (47.0 cm) 18.50 in (47.0 cm) 18.50 in (47.0 cm) 18.50 in (47.0 cm) 18.50 in (47.0 cm) Rack Space 36.75 in (93.3 cm) 42.00 in (106.7 cm) 61.25 In (155.6 cm) 70.00 in (177.8 cm) 77.00 in (195.6 cm)
4.4
Figure 4-1: RKU Equipment Rack
4.5
ATP Amplifier Terminal Panel

A 3-ATPINT Interface must be installed on the ATP when used with the EST3 system.
Figure 4-2: 3-ATP, front view
The Amplifier Terminal Panel, is a 5.25 in (13.34 cm) high x 19 in (48.3 cm) wide unit that senses loss of AC power or brownout conditions at the amplifiers. The ATP also provides battery backup to the amplifiers when the audio system is active. The ATP must have a 3-ATPINT interface Card installed in order to work with the EST3 system.
+ S + S + S
PRE-AMP 1 PREAMP 1 70V 25V 1 P1 PREAMP 2 70V 25V 1 P2 IN OUT RISER OUT PRE-AMP PRE-AMP 2 IN OUT RISER OUT PRE-AMP
S
[3atpint3.cdr]
Figure 4-3: 3-ATPINT Interface Card
The ATP with 3-ATPINT installed, is mounted in an RKU rack and provides termination for the power amplifiers audio power and control signals. The panel has an integral battery charger capable of charging a maximum of 40 Ah sealed, lead-acid batteries. The charger is fully supervised and provides a silenceable trouble buzzer and trouble contacts. One ATP is required for every two amplifiers. When a brownout condition is sensed at the ATP, the trouble contacts and AC fail contacts are closed, and an EST3 supervisory zone reports the condition to the EST3 system. The EST3 system is designed to provide +24 Vdc to the ATPs audio activity input via control relay, enabling backup power only when both primary power to the amplifiers has failed and the EST3 audio is active during an alarm condition.
4.6
Battery backup
When multiple ATPs share a common battery, an external battery charger must be used.
Two different methods may be used to charge the batteries. The ATP has an integral battery charger capable of charging 40 Ah batteries. The battery chargers of multiple ATPs may NOT be connected in parallel to increase charger current. When the amplifier backup is to be supplied from a single battery source, a LaMarche model A33-10-24 external battery charger must be used. The Amplifier Terminal Panel switches battery power to the amplifiers. When calculating the battery size required to support the amplifiers, the alarm current must be known. Each 250 W amplifier connected to the system draws 20 amperes at 24 Vdc at full load; 125 W amplifiers draw 10 amperes at 24 Vdc at full load. The amplifiers draw no current in the standby mode. NFPA 72 specifies that designing the system to provide 15 minutes of the evacuation alarm at full load is the equivalent of 2 hours of emergency operation. The local authority having jurisdiction or local codes may modify the amount of time for which standby power must be provided.
4.7
Audio amplifiers
Two Dukane amplifiers are available. Model 1B3125 is rated at 125 watts output. Model 1B3250 is rated at 250 watts output. Both amplifiers operate from 120 Vac, 50/60 Hz, as well as 24 Vdc battery backup. The amplifiers mount in an Amplifier Terminal Panel Cabinet.
Note: Amplifiers should only be loaded to 72% of rated capacity. The amp is derated by 28% to allow for continuous operation and line loss averages.
Two F ifty
T H E R MAL OVE R L OAD
P OW E R
[C1B 325 0X .CDR ]
Figure 4-4: Dukane 250-watt Amplifier, Front View
Table 4-2: 1B3125 Amplifier specifications
Rated output power Max. signal input Input impedance Output voltage Primary power Battery power AC power consumption standby full load DC power consumption standby full load Dimensions (HWD) Weight
125 W 1 Vrms 75 K 25 or 70 Vrms 120 Vac, 60 Hz 24 Vdc 27 W 360 W 0 W (when using the ATP) 11.5 A 5.25 x 19.0 x 6.625 in (13.3 x 48.3 x 16.8 cm) 22.5 lb (10.1 Kg)
4.8
Table 4-3: 1B3-250 Amplifier specifications
Rated output power Max. signal input Input impedance Output voltage Primary power Battery power AC power consumption standby full load DC power consumption standby full load Dimensions (HWD) Weight
250 W (180 W nominal) 1 Vrms 75 K 25 or 70 Vrms 120 Vac, 60 Hz 24 Vdc 48 W 700 W 0 W (when using the ATP) 20 A 8.5 x 19 x 15 in (21.6 x 48.3 x 38.1 cm) 55 lb (24.9 Kg)
4.9
URSM Universal Riser Supervisory Module

The Universal Riser Supervisory Module provides open and short circuit, and amplifier supervision of two risers, audio (25 or 70 Vrms), and/or firefighter telephone riser. A form C dry relay contact is provided for each riser circuits trouble annunciation.
Figure 4-5: URSM
Application
The URSM is required on 70 Vrms audio system risers, and 25 Vrms audio systems. The URSM should be located in an equipment cabinet convenient to the end of the risers, which has 24 Vdc power available. URSM trouble contacts should be monitored with a SIGA-CT2 module to feed riser trouble information back to the network.
Table 4-4: URSM specifications Voltage Standby Current Trouble Contact Rating Trouble Detection Levels 25Vrms Audio 70 Vrms Audio Firefighters Phone 24 Vdc 40 mA 30 Vdc @ 2A 10 Vrms 23 Vrms 2.7 Vrms
Installation
The URSM requires one-half of a standard mounting footprint and should be installed where the power pigtails can reach the power supply.
Terminal connections
Refer to Figure 4-6. Black pigtail = (-)24 Vdc power in Red pigtail = (+)24 Vdc power in TB1-1 to 3 = Channel 2, trouble relay contacts
4.10
TB1-4 to 6 = Channel 1, trouble relay contacts TB1-7 = Channel 2, 70 Vrms audio riser input TB1-8 = Channel 2, 25 Vrms audio riser input TB1-9 = Firefighters Telephone riser input, Ch 2 TB1-10 = Channel 2, Riser input, common TB1-11 = Channel 1, 70 Vrms audio riser input TB1-12 = Channel 1, 25 Vrms audio riser input TB1-13 = Firefighters Telephone riser input, Ch 1 TB1-14 = Channel 1, Riser input, common
Operation
The trouble relay will activate 45-60 seconds after a circuit short, circuit open, or amplifier failure is detected.
4.11
POWER/ BOOSTER MONITOR MODULE
Audio Risers from Banked Amplifiers
[2]
RED BLACK
[1] [3] UL/ULC Listed 47 K Ohm EOL
URSM
G
10
11
12
13
14
CONT 5A RES.240AC
URSM 130102
1725S DC 24V A410-367396-13 JAPAN 692NA
TB1
CHANNEL 2 TROUBLE CHANNEL 1 TROUBLE TELEPHONE 25V AUDIO 70V AUDIO CHANNEL 2 TELEPHONE 25V AUDIO 70V AUDIO CHANNEL 1
CONT 5A RES.240AC 1725S DC 24V A410-367396-13 JAPAN 692NA
[3URSMWIR.CDR]
[1] [2]
7 6 5
Notes
SIGA-CT2 Dual Input Module (Personality Code 3)

4 3 2 1
[1] Supervised [2] Power limited [3] Nonpower-limited
TB1
From Signature Controller or Previous Device
DATA IN (+) DATA IN (-)
DATA OUT (+) DATA OUT (-)
To Next Device
[1] [2]
Figure 4-6: URSM wiring
4.12
ATP and 3-ATPINT installation

ATP installation
Refer to Figure 4-7.
To install the ATP:
1. Remove the old cover plate on the left side of the ATP (4 screws). 2. Install four short spacers [5] in the flanges of the card cage, and secure with nuts [6]. 3. Mount the 3-ATPINT board [4] on the four short spacers [5] and secure with four long spacers [3]. 4. Install the new cover plate [2] on the long spacers with the screws [1] provided.
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
[3atpint2.cdr]
Figure 4-7: 3-ATPINT installation, bottom view
4.13
ATP wiring
Do Not Use
+
AMPLIFIER TERMINAL PANEL (ATP) P/N 240068
+ S + S + S
PRE-AMP 1 PREAMP 1 70V 25V 1 P1 IN OUT RISER OUT PRE-AMP
S IN
S + OUT
S +
S + OUT IN PWR AMP #1
+ BATT. OUT
TB4
120VAC 60HZ 10A MAX.
TB1
OUT PREAMP #1
H N G
AMP #1 TB3 + 120 VAC OUT

POWER PANEL ACTIVITY FAIL TRBL
WARNING
PREAMP 2 70V 25V 1 P2
Removable 3-ATPINT Cover

IN OUT RISER OUT PRE-AMP
FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST THE RISK OF FIRE, REPLACE ONLY WITH SAME TYPE 8 RATING FUSE.
3AB-20A FUSE TB5
WARNING PRE-AMP 2 IMPROPER CONNECTION OF TERMINALS + S + S + S WILL RESULT IN A FAILURE OF POWER SUPPLY
AMP #2 PWR AMP #2 IN OUT S + S + S
BATT. IN 24 VDC 40AH MAX. BATT. OUT +
TB2 +
IN S
PREAMP #2 OUT + S +
OUT
+
[3atpint1.cdr]
Do Not Use
Figure 4-8: ATP with 3-ATPINT installed, rear view
ATP terminal connections

AMP POWER 1 = Type NEMA 5-15p receptacle to plug in one amplifier. Output is rated at 120 Vac, 5 A max. AMP POWER 2 = Type NEMA 5-15p receptacle to plug in one amplifier. Output is rated at 120Vac 5 A max. BATT IN - These terminals are for connection of gel cell batteries. When the internal battery charger is enabled (J3 on the APSB terminal board installed) a maximum of 40 Ah of gel cell batteries may be charged. POWER FAIL - Normally open that activates when primary power to the amplifiers is either lost or in brownout condition. This contact is to be supervised by Signature series input module configured as a supervisory input. PANEL TROUBLE - Normally open relay contacts that close when any of the following power problems are sensed: Loss of 5 Vdc power Loss of 24 Vdc power Failure of the battery charger circuit (if enabled) Any blown fuse or circuit breaker Ground fault, if enabled
ACTIVITY = 24 Vdc should be provided to these terminals through SIGA-CR contacts when either an alarm is present in the system or when the system user activates the paging system. When this input is active and the amplifier is in power fail, power relay contacts will transfer and provide battery power to the terminals marked BATT OUT. Each battery output terminal is capable of providing 20 A of battery current.
4.14
In addition to the terminals listed above, two groups of terminals are provided for connection of audio signals, one for each channel
WARNING: When
the 3-ATPINT Interface is installed on the ATP, Do NOT use the preamp in and out terminals on the main body of the ATP. ALL preamp wiring must go to the 3-ATPINT. The following terminals are provided on the ATP for audio channel 1 and channel 2. PREAMP IN = Not used. Refer to 3-ATPINT terminal connections. PREAMP OUT = Not used. Refer to 3-ATPINT terminal connections. PREAMP OUT = Not used. Refer to 3-ATPINT terminal connections. AMP IN = From the 70 V or the 25 V output of the power amplifier. AMP OUT = to be connected to the Signature Series control modules and terminated with a URSM Universal Riser Supervisory Module. The URSM must be monitored by a Signature Series input module configured as a supervisory circuit. Each riser may not supply a load greater than 180 W.
ATP jumper settings

Table 4-5: 3-ATP Jumper Settings Function Jumper Setting
Ground fault detection No ground fault detection Internal battery charger operable Internal battery charger disabled
J1 = enable J1 = disable J2 = in J3 = in
3-ATPINT terminal connections

Refer to Figure 4-9. IN RISER = To audio source amplifier 25 Vrms or 70 Vrms output or previous 3-ATPINT riser output. OUT RISER = 25 Vrms or 70 Vrms output to next 3-ATPINT IN RISER or EOL resistor.
4.15
OUT PREAMP = Low level audio to audio power amplifier input.
3-ATPINT Jumper Settings

Table 4-6: 3-ATPINT jumper settings Input / Voltage Jumper setting
Preamp #1, 70 Vrms Preamp #1, 25 Vrms Preamp #2, 70 Vrms Preamp #2, 25 Vrms
P1 = 1/2 P1 = 2/3 P2 = 1/2 P1 = 2/3
4.16
15K EOL
15K EOL
15K EOL
15K EOL
10
10
10
10
To TB1 on Audio Amplifier

TB1
AUDIO AMPLIFIER MODULE

(BACKUP)
TB2

(Riser 1)

(Riser 2)

(Riser 3)
10
10
10
10
[3AMPCON1.CDR]
Shield, if used Shield, if used
Field wiring identical to riser #1
Field wiring identical to riser #1
Class A circuits Only Audio Riser Output

2 4
UL/ULC Listed 15K EOL ON LAST ATP ONLY

(For Class B circuits Only)
From Power Amp Output
2 3
To Power Amp Audio Input

2 3
+ TB1
Do Not Use
S IN + S + OUT S + S + S + BATT. OUT TB4

+ S + S + S
PRE-AMP 1 PREAMP 1 70V 25V 1 P1 PREAMP 2 70V 25V 1 P2 IN OUT RISER OUT PRE-AMP PRE-AMP 2 IN OUT RISER OUT PRE-AMP
OUT PREAMP #1
OUT IN PWR AMP #1
H N G

WARNING
3AB-20A FUSE TB5
AMP #2 PWR AMP #2 IN OUT S + S + S
BATT. IN 24 VDC 40AH MAX. BATT. OUT +
IMPROPER CONNECTION OF TERMINALS + S + S + S [3atpint3.cdr] WILL RESULT IN A FAILURE OF POWER SUPPLY TB2 +
IN S
PREAMP #2 OUT + S +
OUT
+
[3AMPCON1.CDR]
Input #2 wired identical to Input #1
Do Not Use
Wiring Notes
1. 2. 3. 4. 5 Circuit polarity shown in supervisory condition. Supervised circuit. Power limited circuit. Non-Power limited circuit. Back up amplifier size must equal the wattage of the largest amplifier to be backed up. 6. Set J1 & J2 to match source amplifier output voltage. 7. Additional ATPs may be connected to the same audio source by connecting the ATP pre-amp output to the pre-amp input of the next ATP.
JUMPER SETTINGS P1 = 1/2, Pre-Amp #1 Input 70 VRMS P1 = 2/3, Pre-Amp #1 Input 25 VRMS P2 = 1/2, Pre-Amp #2 Input 70 VRMS P2 = 2/3, Pre-Amp #2 Input 25 VRMS
Figure 4-9: ATP with 3-ATPINT wiring
4.17
FUSE 25A
70.7 V 25 V 25 V CT 8 OHM OUTPUT COM
LEVEL ADJUST
BRIDGING INPUT COM
FUSE 6.25A SB 120VAC 60HZ

TO ATP POWER RECEPTACLE
24 VDC
EARTH N/C
Do Not Use
+
+ S + S + S
PRE-AMP 1 PREAMP 1 70V 25V 1 P1 PREAMP 2 70V 25V 1 P2 IN IN OUT RISER OUT PRE-AMP
AUDIO RISER OUT

S + S + OUT IN PWR AMP #1 S + BATT. OUT TB4
S + IN
S + OUT
TB1
OUT PREAMP #1
H N G

WARNING
3AB-20A FUSE TB5
3-ATPINT
OUT RISER OUT PRE-AMP PRE-AMP 2
AMP #2 PWR AMP #2 IN OUT S + S +
BATT. IN 24 VDC 40AH MAX. BATT. OUT S +
TB2 +
IN
PREAMP #2 OUT S + S +
OUT
+
[3ATPINT6.CDR]
Do Not Use
Figure 4-10: Wiring from Dukane amplifier to ATP
4.18
Figure 4-11: Power supply terminal card, with 3-ATPINT, cover removed
The output of the amplifier must be set for the proper value by adjusting the INPUT LEVEL adjustment on the back of the amplifier. With a 1,000 Hz tone generated by the 3-ACPor 3ZA20, the amplifier must be adjusted for 70 Vrms output using the appropriate RMS voltmeter.
Figure 4-12: Dukane amplifier, rear view
4.19
ATP external battery charger

When multiple ATPs are connected to a common battery set, the ATP internal battery charger must be disabled by installing J3 and removing J2 on the APSB terminal board which is located in the Amplifier Terminal Panel. (see Figure 4-11). A La Marche model A33-10-24 external battery charger is used to charge up to 160-Ah batteries, as shown in Figure 4-13.
4.20

UL/ULC Listed 47 K Ohm EOL
ATP
120 VAC
BATTERY INPUT
J3 CHARGER DISABLE
PANEL TROUBLE
ATP
120 VAC
BATTERY INPUT
J3 CHARGER DISABLE
PANEL TROUBLE
1
120 VAC
BATTERY CHARGER AA33-10-24

1 3
LOAD
BATTERY TRBL
[3ATPXBCW.CDR]
24 VDC 160 AH MAX.

1 Supervised 2 Power Limited 3 Not Power Limited 1 2
8 7
NOTE: THE A33-10-24 MUST BE INSTALLED IN THE SAME ENCLOSURE AS THE ATP .
SIGA-CT1 Single Input Module (Personality Code 3)

4 3 2 1
DAT A IN (+) DAT A IN (-) F rom S ignature Controller or P revious Device
DAT A OU T(+) DAT A OU T(-) T o Next Device
Figure 4-13: ATP External battery charger wiring
4.21
Amplifier backup
Various methods are available to provide a spare amplifier in the event that a primary amplifier fails. Depending upon the local Authority Having Jurisdiction, a single backup amplifier may be required for each primary amplifier or a single backup per bank of amplifiers.
4.22

SIGA-CT1 or CT2 INPUT MODULES (Personality Code 3) DEFINED AS MONITOR DEVICE TYPE 'AMP1_FAIL' 'AMP2_FAIL'
8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5
'AMP3_FAIL'
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
MODULES REPORT RISER TROUBLE TO NETWORK CONTROLLER
3 2 1
3 2 1
URSM
URSM
URSM
1
RKU SERIES ENCLOSURE
3 AUDIO RISER,180 WATT MAXIMUM PER RISER
ARA-1 RELAY
EOL
PRE-AMP OUT IN OUT 1 AMP 1 IN RISER 1 OUT 3-ATPINT IN ACT RISER 2 OUT PRE-AMP AMP 2 OUT 2 OUT IN
RELAY ACTIVATES ON AMP 1 FAILURE

8 7 6 5
ATP 1
'AMP1_BKUP'
AUDIO POWER AMPLIFIER 1 AUDIO POWER AMPLIFIER 2
4 3 2 1
SIGA-CR DEFINED AS NONSUPERVISED OUTPUT
ARA-1 RELAY
7 6 5
7 6 5
+24VDC
4 3 2 1
'AMP2_BKUP'
4 3 2 1
'ATP1_ACT'
ARA-1 RELAY
PRE-AMP OUT IN OUT 3 AMP 3 IN RISER 1 OUT 3-ATPINT IN ACT RISER 2 OUT PRE-AMP AMP 4 OUT 4 OUT IN

8 7 6 5
ATP 2
'AMP3_BKUP'
8 4 3 2 1
SIGA-CR DEFINED AS NONSUPERVISED OUTPUT SIGA-CR DEFINED AS NONSUPERVISED OUTPUT

7 6 5
3 2 1
+24VDC
'ATP2_ACT'
BACKUP RISER
FROM 3-ZAxx
'AMP1_PRI'
1 Supervised
2 Power Limited 3 Not Power Limited

(3ATPINT5.CDR)
Figure 4-14: Amplifier bank with spare amplifier
4.23

SIGA-CT1 or CT2 INPUT MODULES (Personality Code 3) DEFINED AS MONITOR DEVICE TYPE 'AMP1_FAIL' 'AMP2_FAIL' 'AMP3_FAIL' 'AMP4_FAIL' MODULES REPORT RISER TROUBLE TO NETWORK CONTROLLER
8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
URSM CH1
URSM CH2
URSM CH1
URSM CH2
1
RKU SERIES ENCLOSURE
3 AUDIO RISER,180 WATT MAXIMUM PER RISER
ARA-1 RELAY
EOL EOL
IN RISER 1 OUT 3-ATPINT
PRE-AMP OUT IN OUT 1 AMP 1

8 7 6 5
'AMP1_BKUP'
4 3 2 1
ATP 1

8
SIGA-CR DEFINED AS NONSUPERVISED OUTPUT SIGA-CR DEFINED AS NONSUPERVISED OUTPUT

7 6 5
IN ACT RISER 2 OUT PRE-AMP AMP 2 OUT 2 OUT IN
+24VDC
4 3 2 1
'ATP1_ACT'
ARA-1 RELAY
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
'AMP2_BKUP'
ARA-1 RELAY

8 7 6 5
'AMP3_BKUP'
8 7 6 5
3 2 1
ATP 2
3 2 1
+24VDC
'ATP2_ACT'
ARA-1 RELAY
BACKUP RISER
7 6 5
'AMP4_BKUP'
3 2 1
SIGA-CR DEFINED AS NONSUPERVISED OUTPUT AUDIO POWER SPARE AMP
ATP 3

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
+24VDC
ARA-1 RELAY
'ATP3_ACT'
RELAY ACTIVATES IF AMP 2 OR AMP 4 FAILS
1 Supervised
2 Power Limited
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3 Not Power Limited
'AMP24_BKUP'
(3ATPINT4.CDR)
FROM 3-ZAxx #1 FROM 3-ZAxx #2
'AMP1_PRI'
'AMP2_PRI'
Figure 4-15: One spare amplifier in dual channel system
4.24
Branch speaker wiring

Signature modules are used to connect individual floor branch speaker circuits to the main riser. Single channel branch speaker circuits can be wired as Class A (Style Z) using the Signature UM module. Class B (Style Y) circuit configuration can be accomplished using either the Signature UM or CC2 modules. The branch speaker circuits of two channel can be wired as Class B (style Y) circuits using the Signature CC2 module.
Typical Speaker Circuit: Style Y (Class B)
10 9
TB3
8 7 6 5
4 3 2 1
TB2
TB1
From ATP RISER IN (+) RISER IN (-) DATA IN (+) DATA IN (-) From Signature Controller or Previous Device
[3bwire1.cdr]
UL/ULC Listed 47K EOL
RISER OUT (+) To Next Device or URSM Suprvisory RISER OUT (-) Module
To Next Device
Figure 4-16: Single channel Class B wiring, SIGA-CC1 Module
From ATP CH2 (INPUT 2) RISER IN (+) CH2 (INPUT 2) RISER IN (-)
Typical Speaker Circuit: Style Y (Class B)
UL/ULC Listed 47K EOL
CH2 (INPUT 2) RISER OUT (-) To Next Device or
TB4
14 13 12 11 10 9
+
TB3
CH2 (INPUT 2) RISER OUT (+) Module
URSM Supervisory
8 7
6 5
4 3
2 1
TB2
From ATP CH1 (INPUT 1) RISER IN (+) CH1 (INPUT 1) RISER IN (-) DATA IN (+) DATA IN (-) From Signature Controller or Previous Device
TB1
[3bwire2.cdr] CH1 (INPUT 1) RISER OUT (+) To Next Device or CH1 (INPUT 1) RISER OUT (-) Module
URSM Supervisory
To Next Device
Figure 4-17: Two channel Class B wiring, SIGA-CC2 Module
4.25
Typical Speaker Circuit:
Style Z (Class A) Only
Style Y (Class B)
TB4
+
JP1
+
TB3
UL/ULC Listed 47K EOL (Class B Only)
16 15 14 13
12 11 10 9
8 7
6 5
4 3
2 1
TB2
From ATP CH1 (INPUT 1) RISER IN (+) CH1 (INPUT 1) RISER IN (-) DATA IN (+) DATA IN (-) From Signature Controller or Previous Device
TB1
[3bwire3.cdr] CH1 (INPUT 1) RISER OUT (+) To Next Device or URSM Supervisory CH1 (INPUT 1) RISER OUT (-) Module DATA OUT (+) DATA OUT (-)
To Next Device
Figure 4-18: Single channel Class A wiring, SIGA-UM Module
4.26
Troubleshooting
The amplifier terminal power is basically a panel with terminals for convenient termination of the amplifier, preamplifier and field wiring. In addition, the panel will sense a trouble condition when the power relay switches battery power to the input of the power amplifiers. The ATP power faults that will cause a trouble event are as follows: ATP brownout or loss of AC power Low battery or no battery (with J2 enabled) Ground fault (if ground fault detection J1 is enabled) Fuse fail Loss of 5 Vdc. This fault will produce a non-silenceable trouble condition.
4.27
4.28
Chapter 5
Installation
Summary
This chapter provides installation information for system components and applications that supplement the instructions provided on individual component installation sheets.
Content Installation overview 5.2 Electrostatic discharge precaution 5.2 Energized system precaution 5.2 Circuit compatibility 5.2 Recommended cable manufacturers 5.3 Creating an initial startup version of the project database 5.4 System installation sequence 5.6 Preliminary field wiring testing 5.7 Chassis installation in EIA 19-inch racks 5.10 ATCK Attack Kit for cabinets 5.11 Local rail module installation 5.12 3-MODCOM Modem Communicator module 5.14 Features 5.14 Functions 5.15 Equipment 5.16 Configuration options 5.17 Failover operation 5.18 Compatibility 5.19 Transmission protocols 5.19 Transmission process 5.20 Programming considerations 5.22 Installation 5.23 3-SAC Security Access Control module 5.28 Product description 5.28 SAC bus 5.28 Recommended cabling 5.28 Additional power supply wiring 5.28 AC power and DC battery wiring 5.29 Connecting the PT-1S impact printer 5.32 System printer power supply 5.34 Adjusting amplifier output levels 5.35 What you will need 5.35 Adjustment procedure 5.35 Design considerations 5.35 Connecting a CDR-3 Zone Coder for coded tone output 5.36 What you will need 5.36 Adjusting the gain on the 3-ASU auxiliary input 5.36 Connecting an external modem for use with the Remote Diagnostics Utility 5.39 Running the RPM and distributing profiles 5.41
5.1
Installation
Installation overview
Electrostatic discharge precaution
Observe static sensitive material handling practices.

The components used in this system are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). When handling electronic assemblies, you must take precautions to avoid the build up of static charges on your body and on the equipment. Do not open the anti-static packaging until you are ready to install the electronics. Wear a grounded wrist strap to bleed off any static charge, which may have built up on your body.
Energized system precaution

Caution: Never install or remove a module or cabinet
component with power applied to the cabinet.
Circuit compatibility
The following circuit compatibility matrix indicates which circuit types may occupy the same conduit or be bundled together, where permitted by code.
5.2
Installation
Recommended cable manufacturers

Atlas Wire & Cable Corp. 133 S. Van Norman Road Montebello, CA 90640 (213) 723-2401 Paige Electric Co., L.P. PO Box 368 1160 Springfield Road Union, NJ 07083 Toll free: (866) 687-2443 or (800) 997-2443 ext 25 Fax: (847) 797-3853 Belden Wire & Cable Corp. PO Box 1980 Richmond, IN 47375 (317) 983-5200 BSCC 233 Florence Street Leominster, MA 01453 Phone: (508) 537-9138 Fax: (508) 537-8392 Remee Products, Inc. 186 North Main Street Florida, NY 10921 West Penn Wire Corp. 2833 West Chestnut Street PO Box 762 Washington, PA 15301 (412) 222-7060
5.3
Installation
Creating an initial startup version of the project database

Creating an initial startup version of the project database is useful for: Assigning panel addresses when you bring up a system for the first time Verifying the correct installation of the rail modules and control/display modules Adjusting the gain on the 3-ASU and amplifier modules installed in a cabinet
Follow these suggestions when creating an initial startup version of the project database: Only include the hardware configuration for each cabinet in the system. Do not include any device loops in the database. These should be installed after verifying the cabinet configuration. It is also not necessary to configure any rail modules. The easiest way to create an initial startup version of the project database is to save the project under a different name using the Save As command. Save the project as a different version after you have defined the cabinet chassis configuration and added all the rail modules for all the cabinets in the system. Using this method eliminates doubling your workload by having to edit two databases as you add cabinets to the system. If the cabinet contains amplifiers and a 3-ASU, include the following features in the initial startup version of the project database: Program a control/display module toggle switch to send a 0.7 Vrms, 1 kHz tone to the amplifiers. Label the switch 1KHZ_TONE and add the following rule to the rules file:
[AMPLIFIER_SETUP] SW '1KHZ_TONE': AMPON '*' TO 'Ch_Gen*', MSGON '1KHZ_TONE' TO 'Ch_Gen*';
Record a message in the 3-ASU database labeled 1KHZ_TONE. Import the Steady tone at 1kHz.wav file from the EST3 Fire Alarm Support Tools CD-ROM into this record.
Note: For firmware versions earlier than 1.5, copy the Steady tone at 1kHz.wav file from the \Library\Sounds\FCCA directory on the EST3 Fire Alarm Support Tools CD-ROM to a directory on your hard drive that doesnt contain any other files. You can import the file from this directory.
5.4
Installation
If a CDR-3 Zone Coder is installed and connected to the AUX input on a 3-ASU, include the following features in the initial startup version of the project database: Program a control/display module toggle switch that is to turn on the amplifiers and select the Auxiliary channel. Label the switch AUX_INPUT_ADJUST and add the following rule to the rules file:
[3-ASU_AUX_INPUT_SETUP] SW 'AUX_INPUT_ADJ': AMPON '*' TO 'Ch_Aux*';
5.5
Installation
System installation sequence

Follow these general instructions when installing a panel as part of an EST3 system. Refer to the installation sheets that came with the product for specific instructions. The EST3 Installation Sheets book contains copies of the installation sheets. 1. Install the equipment enclosure backbox at the required location and pull all the required conductors through the conduit into the backbox. 2. Verify the field wiring. Refer to Table 5-1. 3. Install the chassis assemblies that go into the panel. 4. Install the primary and booster power supplies. 5. Install all rail modules and control / display modules in their required locations. 7. Apply power to the panel. Refer to the topic Cabinet power-up procedure in Chapter 5. 8. Download an initial startup version of the CPU database, and clear panel troubles. See the topic Creating an initial startup version of the project database, later in this chapter. 9. Connect field wiring and clear any field wiring problems. 10. Download the final applications program. Refer to Chapter 5: Power-up and testing. 11. Disconnect the SDU from the panel. 12. Verify proper operation. Refer to the topic Detector, input module, and output module testing in Chapter 5. 13. Fill out a Certificate of Completion for the system. Example forms are included in Chapter 5.
5.6
Installation
Preliminary field wiring testing

We recommend that you test all circuits before they are connected to the control equipment. Table 5-1 indicates the recommended tests and acceptable test results.
Note: Individual devices are not checked as part of these tests. All equipment installed on field circuits must be individually tested to ensure proper operation when the system running. Table 5-1: Field wiring tests Circuit type DC notification appliance circuit Test 1) Measure the resistance between conductors. The circuit resistance should be infinite if no devices are installed on the circuit. The circuit resistance should be approximately 15 k when the polarized notification appliances and the end-of-line resistor are correctly installed. 2) Reverse the meter leads. The circuit resistance between conductors should read approximately 10 to 20 . If the resistance reading is still approximately the same value when the meter leads are reversed, one or more polarized devices are installed incorrectly. 3) Measure the resistance between each conductor and earth ground. The resistance should be infinite. Audio notification appliance circuit 1) Measure the resistance between conductors. The circuit resistance between conductors should be infinite if no devices are installed on the circuit. The circuit resistance should be approximately 15 k when the polarized notification appliances and the end-of-line resistor are correctly installed. 2) Reverse the meter leads. The circuit resistance between conductors should still read approximately 15 k. 3) Measure the resistance between each conductor and earth ground. The circuit resistance between a conductors and earth ground should be infinite. Signature data circuits 1) With field wiring disconnected, verify the continuity of each conductor. Each conductor should measure less than 38 . 2) Measure the resistance between conductors. The circuit resistance between conductors should be infinite if no devices are connected to the circuit. The circuit resistance between conductors should be between approximately 18 k (250 devices) and 4.5 M (1 device) when devices are installed. 3) Measure the resistance between each conductor and earth ground. The circuit resistance between a conductors and earth ground should be infinite.
5.7
Installation
Table 5-1: Field wiring tests Circuit type Addressable analog circuits Test 1) Verify the continuity of each conductor. Each conductor should measure less than 50 . 2) Measure the resistance between conductors. The circuit resistance between conductors should be infinite if no devices are connected to the circuit. 3) Measure the resistance between each conductor and earth ground. The circuit resistance between a conductors and earth ground should be infinite. Traditional initiating device circuits 1) Verify the continuity of each conductor. 2) Measure the resistance between conductors. The circuit resistance between conductors should be infinite if no devices are connected to the circuit. The circuit resistance between conductors should be approximately 4.7 k when devices are installed. 3) Measure the resistance between each conductor and earth ground. The circuit resistance between a conductors and earth ground should be infinite. Telephone riser circuit 1) Verify the continuity of each conductor. Each conductor should measure between 0 and 25 . 2) Measure the resistance between conductors. The circuit resistance between conductors should be infinite if no devices are installed on the circuit. The circuit resistance between conductors should be approximately 15 k with SIGA-CC1 Single Input Signal Modules and the end-of-line resistor correctly installed. 3) Measure the resistance between each conductor and earth ground. The circuit resistance between a conductors and earth ground should be infinite. RS-485 communication circuits EST3 uses RS-485 circuits for the: Network data riser Network audio riser SAC bus
1) Verify the continuity of each conductor. Each conductor should measure between 0 and 50 . 2) Measure the resistance between conductors. The circuit resistance between conductors should be infinite if no devices are connected to the circuit. The circuit resistance between conductors should be approximately 50 when devices are installed. 3) Measure the resistance between each conductor and earth ground. The circuit resistance between a conductors and earth ground should be infinite.
5.8
Installation
Table 5-1: Field wiring tests Circuit type RS-232 Communication Circuits Test With both ends of the circuit disconnected: 1) Verify the continuity of each conductor. Each conductor should measure between 0 and 25 . 2) Measure the resistance between conductors. The circuit resistance between conductors should be infinite. 3) Measure the resistance between each conductor and earth ground. The circuit resistance between a conductors and earth ground should be infinite. Earth Ground 1) Measure the resistance between the earth ground terminal and a convenient water pipe or electrical conduit. The circuit resistance should be less than 0.1
5.9
Installation
Chassis installation in EIA 19-inch racks

Each 3-CHAS7 chassis or 3-ASU(/FT) Audio Source Unit requires 12 inches (30.48 cm) of vertical rack space. 3/4 inch (1.9 cm) blank plates are required at the top of the upper chassis and the bottom of the lower chassis. A 1-1/2 inch (3.81 cm) blank plate is required between each chassis.
3/4 In (1.9 cm) BLANK PLATE
Chassis 1
12 In (30.48 cm)
1 1/2 In (3.81 cm) BLANK PLATE
Chassis 2
12 In (30.48 cm)
1 1/2 In (3.81 cm) BLANK PLATE
Chassis 3
12 In (30.48 cm)
3/4 In (1.9 cm) BLANK PLATE
[RACKSPAC.CDR]
Figure 5-1: Rack-mounted chassis
5.10
Installation
ATCK Attack Kit for cabinets

EST3 supports several UL1635 certification installations. Each of these requires that an ATCK Attack Kit be attached to an RCC7R series control panel cabinet. The kit provides a twominute attack delay time. The ATCK kit lets you replace the standard, hinged outer door with a box cover that has no window. The cover attaches to the backbox sides using sheet metal screws and four locks. The kit also includes special knockout locks that secure the unused knockout holes. Follow the instructions shipped with the kit. In general, youll need to: 1. Discard the standard door included with the cabinet. 2. For older cabinets, use the ATCK cover as a template to mark and drill screw holes. (New cabinets include the correct screw holes.) 3. Remove any unused knockouts and insert knockout locks. 4. Use the screws provided to attach the new cover.
5.11
Installation
Local rail module installation

Please refer to the installation sheet that came with the product for installation instructions. Equipment locations within a chassis are referred to as rail slots. Figure 5-2 indicates the rail slot numbers for the various cabinet sizes available in the EST3 product line. The CPU must always occupy rail slots 1 and 2. The primary power supply monitor module should occupy rail slot 3.
Figure 5-2: Local rail module slot identification
A 3-ASU Audio Source Unit occupies the first three slots on its chassis, and is identified using the lowest slot number of the three. When a Firefighters Telephone Control Unit is supplied as part of the 3-ASU/FT, the telephone control unit occupies the last four slots on the chassis, and is identified as the fourth slot number (11 or 18) on the chassis. Connect the DC power cable (P/N 250187) to connector P2 on the power supply. For the 3-PPS Primary Power Supply, connect the 16-pin data ribbon cable (P/N 250188); (Booster = P/N 250189) to connector P3 on the power supply. For 3-BPS and 3-
5.12
Installation
BBC Booster Power Supplies, connect a 14-pin data ribbon cable (P/N 250189) to connector P3 on the power supply. Route both cables up through the rails for later connection to the power supply/booster monitor module. Install any local rail module option cards required by your application. Option cards should be firmly seated in their connectors, and then secured to the rail module by pressing the snap rivet fastener or threading the nylon screw. If a control/display module is required by your application, place the display in the recess on the front of the module. Secure the display with the four supplied plastic rivets. Install the display ribbon cable (P/N 250186) between the displays connector and the modules display connector. If no display is required, insert the blank plate supplied with the module. Locate the required rail slot positions on the rail chassis. Remember, the module location must match the location entered in the System Definition Utility program. Position the module so that any option card(s) rests in the card guides slot. Push the module toward the rails, sliding the daughter card into the slot. When the four alignment pins match up with the guide holes in the module, push the module in to firmly seat the module on the rail connectors. Push in the snap rivets to lock the module on to the rail. An LRMs plug in terminal strips may be removed to facilitate field wiring. Close the module display door. Latch the door by sliding the upper latch down and the lower latch up.
Note: If there are empty rail spaces in a cabinet, you should consider installing 3-LRMF blank modules to fill up the spaces.
5.13
Installation

Features
The 3-MODCOM Modem Communicator is a local rail module that supports telephone line communication. It combines the functions of a dialer and modem in a single module. The module has two eight-position modular jacks for connecting to telephone lines. It includes two red LEDs (DS1 and DS2) to annunciate line ringing and data exchange. The module accepts a control / display layer and has provision for a future expansion module. A nonvolatile, flash memory chip stores customization data that includes account information, user identifiers, telephone numbers, and other dialing details. The 3-MODCOMP is identical to the 3-MODCOM, but supports remote paging using the Telocator Alphanumeric Protocol (TAP). Both versions of the module are equipped with a modem that is Bell 103 and V.32bis compliant. The modem includes support for these protocols: Contact ID SIA DCS SIA P2 (3/1 pulse format) SIA P3 (4/2 pulse format) TAP (3-MODCOMP only)
Several 3-MODCOMs (up to ten) can be installed in a network for increased reliability. These can be configured to provide dynamic failover operation. You can program the 3-MODCOM in any of the following configurations: One-line dialer Two-line dialer Modem Modem and one-line dialer Modem and two-line dialer
The dialer circuit is compatible with pulse dialing or touch-tone (DTMF) dialing. The module can be configured to detect and answer any of these ring types: Any ring Normal ring Distinct ring 2 (type II) Distinct ring 3 (type III)
Note: Only Line 1 can be used to receive incoming calls.
5.14
Installation
Using the 3-MODCOM, messages can be sent to a central monitoring station (CMS) or received from remote PCs. When reporting to a CMS, alarm, trouble, and supervisory status data are transmitted as they occur. Each message identifies the point (or device or circuit) that is involved. The 3-MODCOM can receive data from two programs: the Access Control Database program (ACDB) or the Keypad Display Configuration program (KDC). ACDB and KDC information is downloaded on demand from remote computers. This lets the end users create and maintain their own security and access control databases.
Functions
Configuration
You create the required configuration data using the 3-SDU and download this data to the module using standard programming procedures. The data is stored in the nonvolatile memory of the 3-MODCOM. Configuration data determines the setup of the 3-MODCOM, defines the line properties, the receiver attributes, and the account parameters. This data includes transmission details, such as telephone numbers and dialing options. Some reference data relating to user access control and security systems is downloaded from the ACDB or KDC programs and stored in the 3-MODCOM.
Point transmission
Using enhanced communication protocols, the 3-MODCOM module is capable of transmitting data that identifies the specific device (or circuit) and event status, as reported by the CPU. This capability is known as point transmission because each and every device (or circuit) that goes into alarm or trouble, or is restored, can be reported by order of occurrence and priority.
Receiving user data
In addition to transmitting device data, the 3-MODCOM module can receive user data from remote PCs. In this mode, the module receives access control or security database information from one or more end users. This data establishes the operating characteristics of the users security and access control system as well as the various access options and PIN numbers. All downloaded data is received over the telephone lines. The remote programs, ACDB and KDC, use passwords defined during 3-SDU programming to gain access to the 3-MODCOM.
5.15
Installation
At the start of the downloading process, a connection is established between the modem portion of the 3-MODCOM module and the ACDB or KDC program. Connection is over the telephone network. The 3-MODCOM module receives data and transfers it to the CPU. The data is then routed via the 3-SAC to the CRC and KPDISP modules on the SAC bus. The data is stored in the nonvolatile flash memory chips of these devices.
Monitoring and diagnostics
Each line has a voltage monitor for detecting loss of phone line during on-hook condition, and a current monitor for detecting the loss of phone line and phone line usage during off-hook conditions. Optical coupler circuits are used for these monitors. Two red LEDs (DS1 and DS2) annunciate line ringing, in use, and fault conditions. States and explanations for DS1 and DS2 are given in the Service and Troubleshooting chapter.
Equipment
3-MODCOM Modem Communicator
The 3-MODCOM interfaces between the EST3 system and the switched telephone network. The card is a single rail module with two eight-position modular jacks for the connection of two loop-start lines. The card has provisions for a control / display layer and for a future expansion insert card. The 3-MODCOM can support 255 accounts communicating to up to 80 receivers in any of four protocols. The module is supplied with two seven-foot cables (P/N 360137). These are eight-conductor, flat telephone cables, with eight-position modular plugs on both ends. One end of the cable plugs directly into the 3-MODCOM and the other end plugs directly into an RJ-31X jack. You must obtain the RJ-31X jack locally, and wire it to the telephone lines as indicated on the 3-MODCOM installation sheet.
3-MODCOMP Modem Communicator with paging
The 3-MODCOMP is identical to the 3-MODCOM except for the inclusion of the TAP paging protocol. The end user must subscribe to a TAP-compatible alphanumeric paging service. Depending on the paging service provider, the TAP message can be broadcast via radio to a pager, converted to an e-mail, or faxed to an end user.
5.16
Installation
The module is supplied with two seven-foot cables (P/N 360137) for connecting the 3-MODCOMP to an RJ-31 jack. You must obtain the RJ-31X jack locally, and wire it to the telephone lines as indicated on the 3-MODCOM installation sheet.
RJ-31X jack telco jack
An RJ-31X jack must be used to connect each line of the 3-MODCOM to the switched telephone network. One jack is required for each phone line. The jack is an eight-position jack with a special jumper between terminals 1 and 4 and 5 and 8. This jumper is in effect when the plug is removed from the jack. Removing the plug re-establishes connection to the premises telephones. Inserting the plug opens the jumper and connects the 3-MODCOM, which provides a series connection to the telephones. Refer to the 3-MODCOM installation sheet for a diagram of the jack wiring.
Note: Failure to use an RJ-31X jack violates FCC and NFPA regulations. A telephone connected directly to the incoming phone line without the proper use of the RJ-31X jack will cause a telco trouble when used and possibly prevent the dialer from getting through to the CMS receiver in an emergency.
Configuration options
3-MODCOM and 3-MODCOMP can be configured as: One-line dialer Two-line dialer Modem Modem and one-line dialer Modem and two-line dialer
For UL listed or FM approved installations, you must configure the 3-MODCOM as a two-line dialer, and both lines must have supervision (line-cut detection) selected. The 3-MODCOM operates in accordance with programmed instructions. Details of items such as telephone numbers, dialing details, activation of a dialer test signal, etc., are all a part of the information that is downloaded into the nonvolatile memory of the 3-MODCOM by the SDU. The 3-MODCOM electronically dials receivers in the central monitoring station (CMS) using either pulse or tone dialing, as specified during configuration. The module dials the stored CMS telephone number using the same digits that would be used if a person were dialing from the premises with an ordinary telephone.
5.17
Installation
There are provisions for programming a periodic test transmission to the CMS station on a one-minute to 45-day basis. A daily test signal is primarily intended for certified installations, and is mandatory for all fire alarm installations. The 3-MODCOM sends messages in order of their priority. Messages may include device and user ID information regarding events, such as openings, closings, alarms, and tamper or trouble events. The module waits for receipt of an acknowledgement for each message transmitted.
Failover operation
You can create dynamic failover operation for 3-MODCOMs. By dynamic failover we mean that in the event of a communication failure or device trouble, the system switches from accounts on one 3-MODCOM to matching accounts on another 3-MODCOM. Failover operation results in a system that is resistant to trouble arising from phone lines, 3-MODCOMs, or CPUs. The operation can be limited to a single panel, or can span two or more panels anywhere in a network. In systems with a single 3-MODCOM you can include a second 3-MODCOM that acts as a redundant unit. In systems with two or more 3-MODCOMs, you can program the system so that the units back up each other, while still handling their normal traffic. Failover operates by enabling and disabling various accounts defined for the project. On detection of a fault or trouble, project rules disable accounts on the failed 3-MODCOM and enable matching accounts on the backup 3-MODCOM. When a 3-MODCOM acts as a backup it still provides line supervision. Only the backup accounts are disabled. Further, backup units should conduct their own dialer tests, using unique accounts that identify the 3-MODCOM. Even when not in use, a backup unit should generate a trouble event if it cannot contact the assigned receiver. Because of the way rules are processed, when the primary 3-MODCOM comes out of trouble, the accounts are automatically switched back to their normal state. Messages already queued for transmission in the backup unit will still be sent, even after backup accounts are disabled. Only new messages will be routed differently. This means that device activation and restoral messages sent to the CMS will still be properly paired. Failover operation is created by specific configuration and programming steps. These are outlined below.
5.18
Installation Configuration requirements
For each primary 3-MODCOM add (or select) a backup 3-MODCOM in the same panel or in a different panel according to the scope of failover operation you need Configure the primary and backup 3-MODCOMs identically except for their labels and the labels of the accounts Label the accounts so that its easy to recognize the 3-MODCOM in which they are used Make sure each 3-MODCOM uses a unique account for dialer tests
Programming requirements
Create message rules that send identical messages to both accounts On system startup, disable the accounts on the backup 3-MODCOM On activation of a panel comm fault, line fault, or LRM comm fault, disable the primary accounts and enable the backup accounts
ACDB requirements
Additional steps are required when the project includes reporting to a CMS that requires translation from a Cardholder ID to a cardholder name. In this situation, the ACDB user must enter a User ID (name) for both CMS Accounts (the primary and backup accounts). These entries are made on the System tab of the Cardholder tab. The ACDB user should enter a User ID for each CMS Account.
Compatibility
EST3 versions
The 3-MODCOM Module will operate with EST3 Version. 3.0 or above. Do not use this communication module with earlier versions.
Receiver compatibility
Refer to Appendix D, System Compatibility, for a list of compatible receivers.
Transmission protocols
The 3-MODCOM is capable of transmitting messages in five formats, or protocols: Contact ID
5.19
Installation
SIA DCS SIA P2 (3/1 Pulse Format) SIA P3 (4/2 Pulse Format) TAP (3-MODCOMP only)
All formats consist of short, predefined messages. Most contain several parameters, some of which are optional. Check with your dialer receiver and central monitoring station software provider for the exact structure they require. When programming transmissions, remember that device messages require two separate send commands, one for activation, and one for restoration.
Contact ID: numeric messages with several parameters including event code, partition, and device or user. The format is:
[EventCode] [Partition] [DeviceNumber | User]

SIA DCS: ASCII text messages that include a number of optional parameters, including time, date, user, partition, and device. The format is:
[Date] [Time] [UserID] AlarmCode [Device | User | Partition]

SIA P2 (3/1): numeric messages that consist of four digits. These
contain the account number (three digits) and the alarm code (one digit). The format is: AccountNumber AlarmCode The is no standard assignment of alarm codes and meanings. Obtain the codes used by your CMS.
SIA P3 (4/2): numeric messages that contain two numbers and
no other parameters. The format is: EventCode

TAP: consists of two fields separated by a carriage return (CR).
The first field is the User ID. The second field is the text message that will be displayed on an alphanumeric pager. Message length, including User ID and CR is 60 characters. The format is: User [CR] Message [Location] No standards describe the content of the message. Typically, you'll use the device location message, as displayed on the 3LCD(XL). Check with your paging service provider to ensure they accept the TAP protocol and determine any message limitations.
Transmission process
The 3-MODCOM includes features that provide an appreciable level of transmission integrity. Multiple phone lines and multiple
5.20
Installation
telephone numbers help to ensure that a call to the receiver gets through. The 3-MODCOM module sequences through the following basic steps to contact the central monitoring station receiver. 1. The 3-MODCOM seizes one of the telephone lines and puts the line on-hook for a minimum of three seconds. This cuts off any ongoing call and disconnects the line from any telephone or dialing devices that are connected downstream.
Note: The module tries to select an unused line for its first two attempts.
2. The 3-MODCOM takes the line off-hook and waits for a dial tone. LED DS1 or DS2 lights steadily. If a dial tone is not received by the configured time, the module goes on-hook, increments the attempt counter, and continues to alternate lines and numbers until a dial tone is acquired. If the 3-MODCOM is configured with two telephone numbers and only one telephone line, it will make four attempts using the first telephone number, then four attempts using the second telephone number. This alternation of telephone numbers continues as needed until a connection is made or the configured number of dial attempts have been made. 3. The 3-MODCOM dials the CMS using the programmed dialing mode and telephone number. 4. The 3-MODCOM waits for a handshake message from the CMS indicating that a connection has been established. If a handshake is not received within 40 seconds the module puts the phone line on-hook and waits for the configured period. After the wait, steps 2 through 4 are repeated. If the module is still unable to contact the receiver it seizes the other telephone line. The module repeats two attempts on the other telephone line. If still unable to contact the receiver it switches back to the first telephone line and attempts to contact the receiver using the secondary telephone number. If still unable to contact the receiver the module continues to alternate lines and numbers until the configured maximum number of attempts have been reached.
5.21
Installation
If the maximum number of attempts is reached, the module sends a trouble message to the CPU. The 3-MODCOM retries the full number of attempts if another event is activated or make one attempt if a configured period (Wait Time Between Attempts) expires. 5. When the call is completed, ringing is detected by the CMS dialer-receiver (DACR). The DACR goes off-hook and transmits a handshake. 6. If the handshake matches the desired transmit format, the 3-MODCOM transmits, in the specified format, all premises event data. LED DS1 or DS2 flashes rapidly to indicate data is being transmitted. 7. The 3-MODCOM waits for an acknowledgement and a shutdown signal from the CMS receiver, then puts the line on-hook, ending the call. LED DS1 or DS2 extinguishes.
Programming considerations
Accounts and receivers
In addition to the general operating characteristics of the 3-MODCOM, youll need to specify each account and receiver used by the system. You may want to gather this information before you begin using the SDU. A receiver is a destination for a 3-MODCOM call to a CMS. Typically, a CMS will have many receivers in operation, each capable of receiving multiple calls. The CMS will determine which receiver you should use for each account. For configuration purposes, heres what youll need to specify about the receiver: Label Description Primary phone number Secondary phone number Protocol to use Maximum number of dial attempts Wait time between dial attempts
An account links a specific end user to a specific receiver. Each message sent from the 3-MODCOM includes an account number assigned by the CMS. This identifies the user site sending the message and the receiver to which the message is sent. For each account youll need to define: Label
5.22
Installation
Description Receiver to use Account number (as assigned by the CMS) Dialing test interval and time of day
Several accounts may use the same receiver, but each account is assigned to only one receiver.
Events and commands
One event and two commands are particularly important when you create SDU rules for the 3-MODCOM. These are: activation, activate, and send. Security and access control devices do not send event messages to the CPU. Rather, they send requests to execute predefined command lists. You need to define the command lists and assign the correct command list for each security or access control event.
Activation: an event that lets you define a command list. Activate: a command that lets you execute a command list in a
rule.
Send: a command that sends a message to a CMS through the 3-MODCOM.
Installation
Caution: Prior to installation, remove power from the rail.
To install the 3-MODCOM, youll need to follow these general steps: 1. Arrange suitable telco lines and services. 2. Install the 3-MODCOM on the rail. 3. Connect the 3-MODCOM to the telco lines. 4. Download configuration data from the 3-SDU. 5. Make test transmissions to verify proper operation.
Requirements for phone lines
3-MODCOM dialers can be used for most applications that use telephone lines, the exceptions being: The central station telephone number cannot be dialed directly (using access numbers and area code where necessary) without operator interception of the call Multiparty service (a party line) exists
5.23
Installation
Operator assistance is required to complete a telephone call and a foreign exchange cannot be introduced Connection is not established within 38 seconds following completion of dialing
The 3-MODCOM dialer circuit is compatible with any switched telephone network that employs direct dialing (local) and Direct Distance Dialing (DDD), without operator interception of the call. Operator interception occurs in some areas where message billing is not completely automatic. Where operator interception is involved, you must obtain a foreign exchange (FX) connection must from the central station exchange to the exchange serving the customer. The FX provides a local number for calling the central station without toll billing. A WATS or ground-start line connection must not be used for this purpose because the line cannot be supervised. The 3-MODCOM includes a feature that prevents jamming by an incoming telephone call. The feature is based on a telephone service option referred to as called party disconnect. This option lets the receiver of a call disconnect by hanging up the telephone for a period of time, even if the caller stays on the line. The time required for disconnect varies in different areas, but is usually between 18 and 90 seconds. Called party disconnect is available in most areas. To determine whether called party disconnect control is available in the area to be served, consult the local telco. In areas not having called party disconnect, the 3-MODCOM module is vulnerable to jamming by an incoming call. To minimize the possibility of jamming, we recommend that the customer order a separate, unlisted number for exclusive use of the 3-MODCOM module. The customer should keep this number confidential. In the case of the two-line dialer, two premises telephone numbers would have to be busied by incoming calls to jam the system. Progressive anti-jamming measures would entail the use of one unlisted telephone number, or two unlisted numbers for maximum dialer integrity. The 3-MODCOM must be connected to the incoming line ahead of all connected equipment on that line, but just behind the demarcation block. This puts the control unit telephone connection in series, assuring that all telephones, answering machines, and FAX machines are disconnected during dial-out to the CMS. This requirement is necessary so the 3-MODCOM dialer circuit can seize the line for its exclusive use in the event of an alarm.
5.24
Installation
Do not use a telephone line that is considered essential for conducting business at the site. Use a separate line for the 3-MODCOM. The dialer must be the first connection in line, and it seizes the line and disconnects all other equipment when making a call. If the incoming lines to the protected premises involve a rotary telephone line arrangement, make the connection to the line having the highest number. This will create the least interference with business lines.
Note: If connection will be made to a telco line that is also used
for normal business purposes, advise customer that the telephone service will be disrupted for a few minutes during the connection period. In areas where the telephone company requires that their own connector block be installed, it should be wired as per the USOC RJ-31X or RJ-38X configuration. (The RJ-38X configuration is identical to RJ-31X except for a jumper between 2 and 7 which is used in some residential applications but is not used by the 3-MODCOM.) When the 3-MODCOM is configured as a two-line dialer module, two incoming lines must be used and connections must be made to each line.
Installing the 3-MODCOM module
Make sure that panel power is off, then proceed as follows, 1. Use an antistatic wrist strap to ground yourself to an unpainted part of the cabinet. 2. Carefully remove the 3-MODCOM from the antistatic bag in which the module is packed. Always handle the board by the edges or by the plastic door. 3. Place the bag on a flat work surface, then place the module, connector side up, on the empty bag. Check that there is no visible shipping damage and orient the module so the two eight-position modular telephone jacks are on the top. 4. If a control / display module is needed, remove the blank front plate and attach the ribbon cable to the front of the 3-MODCOM board. 5. Refer to the SDU cabinet report to determine the proper location for the module, then plug the module into the rail. Be careful to align the module and rail sockets so that the pins are in the proper holes and that seat the module firmly. 6. Fasten the module in place with the push-pins.
5.25
Installation
7. Restore power to the panel. 8. Install wiring to module as described on the 3-MODCOM installation sheet.
Connecting the 3-MODCOM to the telco lines
Plug one end of the supplied telephone connecting cord (P/N 3601370) into the telco line jack on the 3-MODCOM. Do not plug the other end into the RJ-31X jack until you are ready to test the system. This prevents unnecessary interference with other equipment connect to the line downstream. When you are ready for final connections and testing, use the telco line jacks as follows:
Line 1 jack Single-line dialer Incoming modem line Line 2 jack Second line of 2-line dialer
For the installation of a fire alarm system in compliance with NFPA 72, the 3-MODCOM must be connected to loop-start telephone lines. If the site has ground-start lines, two separate loop-start lines must be installed for the dialer. To determine the type of telco line, disconnect the line pair and connect the lines to a test meter. If the line is equipped for loop-start, the meter should read 48 to 52 Vdc between the lines. If the line is equipped for ground-start, the meter will read 0 Vdc between the lines, 48 to 52 Vdc between one line and ground, and 0 Vdc between the other line and ground.
Note: AT&T Horizon PBX systems and some Type 75 systems are of the loop-start type. AT&T Dimension PBX systems and other Type 75 systems are equipped for ground-start.
If this installation is for a certified fire alarm system or a burglar alarm system in compliance with NFPA 72, the telco line must be of the called party disconnect type (also called timed-release disconnect). This feature permits the communication module to seize the line and dial out, even when the telco line is in use. To determine the type of telco line, have someone call the premises from the outside. Hang up the called telephone, but not the calling telephone. After 40 seconds, pick up the called telephone again. If you are still connected to the caller, the phone system does not have called party disconnect. If you hear a dial tone, the telephone has called party disconnect.
5.26
Installation Loading configuration data
After installing the 3-MODCOM module, use the SDU network downloading process to load the configuration data for the 3-MODCOM. The SDU provides a report of all central monitoring station codes that can be transmitted from the 3-MODCOM by account. Give this report to the appropriate CMS.
Testing transmission
After the CMS has programmed the central monitoring database, perform transmission tests as required by the AHJ and CMS.
Note: Transmission failures are latched at the panel. You must reset the panel to clear them.
5.27
Installation

Product description
The 3-SAC is a high-speed RS-485 module used to support Card Reader Controller modules and Keypad Display modules. Events are passed to the 3-SAC module, then passed to the CPU for alarm processing. The 3-SAC has two sets of circuit terminals, and is capable of Class A or Class B configuration. Each Class B circuit can handle 31 devices, for a total of 62 devices per module. Class A circuits can handle 30 devices total.
SAC bus
The 3-SAC Security Access Control module supports the SAC bus, an RS-485 communication line. When properly constructed, the SAC bus runs over longer distances, supports more drops, and is more immune to noise than an RS-232 line. The SAC bus consists of two lines: SAC bus + SAC bus
Recommended cabling
Since our security and access control devices require 24 Vdc, we suggest that you always use a four-wire cable for the SAC bus and a 24 Vdc power supply. For the data wires we suggest unshielded, twisted pair, with greater than 6 twists per foot, in 14 to 22 AWG (1.50 to 0.25 sq mm). For the power wires, we recommend 14 or 16 AWG.
Additional power supply wiring

When an additional power supply is required, you must connect a circuit common point for correct operation. To establish a circuit common, connect the 24 Vdc terminal on the additional power supply to the 24 Vdc terminal of the last device. This circuit common must be connected to the panel, to every device, and to the circuit common point of any additional power supplies.
5.28
Installation
AC power and DC battery wiring

Due to power-limited/nonpower-limited wiring separation requirements, it is easier to route and wire the nonpower-limited AC power and battery conductors before installing the LRMs in the rails. Nonpower-limited wiring should be routed to the chassis notches to the left and rear of the cabinet. Power-limited wiring should be routed to the right and front of the cabinet.
WARNING: Do not energize power until instructed to do so!
1. Connect the AC power source to TB1, line, neutral, and ground terminals on the 3-PPS/M Primary Power Supply Heat Sink, 3-BPS/M Booster Power Supply Heat Sink(s), and the 3-BBC Booster Power Supply Heat Sink. DO NOT ENERGIZE THE AC POWER SOURCE AT THIS TIME! 2. Connect the positive battery lead to TB2-1 and the negative battery lead to TB2-2. Each heat sink assembly must have its own pair of 12 AWG (2.5 mm2) wires going to the battery. Do not connect the heat sinks assemblies together and run a common wire to the battery! DO NOT TERMINATE THE WIRES AT THE BATTERY AT THIS TIME. The 3-BBC must be used with separate batteries.
WARNING: Do not connect batteries until instructed to do so!
The following figures illustrate typical arrangements of power supplies and batteries. For all configurations of power supplies and batteries, the following notes apply: A minimum of one 10Ah battery is required for all system applications. Each set (pair) of batteries must be connected to a separate battery charging circuit, either on a 3-PPS/M(-230) or on a 3-BBC/M(-230) Each power supply must be connected to only one set of batteries. A 3-PPS/M(-230) and a 3-BPS/M(-230) can be wired to the same set of batteries, as well as a 3-BBC/M(-230) and a 3-BPS/M(-230), but never a 3-PPS/M(-230) and a 3-BBC/M(-230). Each power supply must have its own separate pair of wires connecting it to a set of standby batteries. Daisy chaining battery connections from power supply to power supply is not allowed. All battery wiring must be the same length and wire gauge
5.29
Installation
All batteries connected to the same control panel must have the same ampere-hour rating, be from the same manufacturer, and have the same manufacturing date code Batteries greater than 17 Ah and any additional batteries must be installed in an external battery cabinet If an external battery cabinet is used to house standby batteries, the cabinet must be installed within three feet and in the same room as the control panel, and the wires between the control panel and battery cabinet must be run through conduit
CONTROL PANEL CABINET 3-PPS(-230) BATTERY TEMP + MON TB2 3-BPS(-230) BATTERY + TB2
3-BPS(-230) BATTERY + TB2
3-BPS(-230) BATTERY + TB2 CONDUIT REMOTE BATTERY CABINET
8 AMP FUSES (P/N 46097-0110) JUMPER
+ BATTERY 1
+ BATTERY 2
Figure 5-3: Minimum number of batteries, housed in a remote cabinet
5.30
Installation
CONTROL PANEL CABINET 3-PPS(-230) BATTERY TEMP + MON TB2 3-BBC(-230) BATTERY + TB2
REMOTE BATTERY CABINET
8 AMP FUSES (P/N 46097-0110) JUMPER 3-BBC(-230) BATTERY + TB2 3-BBC(-230) BATTERY + TB2 CONDUIT CONDUIT + BATTERY 1 + BATTERY 2
JUMPER BATTERY 3
BATTERY 4
REMOTE BATTERY CABINET
8 AMP FUSES (P/N 46097-0110) JUMPER BATTERY 1
BATTERY 2
JUMPER BATTERY 3
BATTERY 4
Figure 5-4: Maximum number of batteries, housed in two remote cabinets
5.31
Installation
Connecting the PT-1S impact printer

The PT-1S impact printer can be connected to an EST3 panel to provide a hard copy printout of system status, active events, panel reports, etc. The PT-1S is a 80-character line width, freestanding printer that uses standard form feed paper.
L INE FOR M T OP S E L E CT F E E D FE E D S E T
AL AR M
POWE R
PIT CH
MODE S YS T E M PR INT E R PT 1-P
[CP T 1S X.CDR ]
When connecting the PT-1S impact printer by itself: Configure the serial port as a Printer port type and set the baud rate for the printers baud rate. Set printer switches SW1-1, -2, and -3 to OFF, ON, and ON, respectively (8 bits, no parity).
When connecting the PT-1S impact printer to a serial port that is shared with a CDR-3 Zone Coder: Configure the panels serial port as a CDR-3/Printer port type and set the baud rate for the CDR-3s baud rate. Set printer switches SW1-1, -2, and -3 to OFF, OFF, and ON, respectively (8 bits, even parity). These are the factory settings. Set printer switches SW2-1, -2, and -3 to match the baud rate set on the CDR-3 zone coder.
PT-1S Printer Specifications Dimensions (HWD) Print Speed Baud Rates Wiring Voltage Standby Power Printing Power 3.2 in x 14.2 in x 10.8 in (8.13 cm x 36 cm x 27.4 cm) 232 Characters/Second 110, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 (recommended), and 19200 bps 3 #18 AWG (0.75 mm2) 120 Vac @ 60 Hz 40 VA 120 VA
5.32
Installation Switch DIPSW factory settings (located on main board) SW1 OFF (English) SW2 OFF (English) SW3 OFF (English) SW4 OFF (11-in form) SW5 ON (11-in form) SW6 OFF (auto LF off) SW7 ON (8 bits) SW8 OFF (enable front panel)
Switch SW1 factory settings (located on serial board) Switch SW1-1 SW1-2 SW1-3 SW1-4 SW1-5 SW1-6 SW1-7, -8 Factory Setting OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON,ON Description ON: Odd parity OFF: Even parity ON: No parity OFF: With parity ON: 8 bits OFF: 7 bits ON: Ready/Busy protocol OFF: XON/XOFF protocol ON: Circuit test OFF: Monitor test ON: Print mode OFF: Test mode OFF,OFF: SSD Busy OFF,ON: SSD Busy ON,OFF: RTS Busy ON,ON: DTR Busy
Switch SW2 factory settings (located on serial board) Switch SW2-1, -2, -3 Factory Setting OFF,OFF,ON Description OFF,OFF,OFF: 110 bps ON,OFF,OFF: 300 bps OFF,ON.OFF: 600 bps ON,ON,OFF: 1200 bps OFF,OFF,ON: 2400 bps ON,OFF,ON: 4800 bps OFF,ON,ON: 9600 bps ON,ON,ON: 19200 bps ON: DSR active OFF: DSR inactive
SW2-4
OFF
5.33
Installation
Switch SW2 factory settings (located on serial board) Switch SW2-5 Factory Setting ON Description ON: 32-byte buffer threshold OFF: 256-byte buffer threshold ON: 200ms busy signal OFF: 1s busy signal ON: Space after power on OFF: Space after printer select not used
SW2-6 SW1-7
ON OFF
SW1-8
OFF
System printer power supply

If your PT-1S system printer is required to operate during a brownout or AC power failure, install an uninterruptible power supply per Figure 5-5.
UPS Trouble Contact Monitor
To 120 VAC 15 Amp Circuit
Signature Module To CPU
Best Model FE700VA UPS

Uninterruptible Power Supply
LINE FO RM TOP S ELE CT FE ED FE ED S ET
ALARM
P OWE R
P IT CH
M ODE S YS TEM P RINT ER P T1-P
Run Time 174 minutes+ 20%

3prtups1.cdr
PT-1S Serial Printer
Figure 5-5: Printer uninterruptible power supply wiring
5.34
Installation
Adjusting amplifier output levels

What you will need
An initial startup version of the project database that contains a 1kHz tone and a switch programmed to turn the tone on. See Creating an initial startup version of the project database. An RMS voltmeter (Fluke 83 or equivalent)
Adjustment procedure
1. Disconnect the field wiring to all the zoned amplifier modules in the cabinet. 2. Place an RMS meter across an amplifiers TB2 NAC/B+ and NAC/B- terminals. 3. Use the 1KHZ_TONE switch to turn on the tone. 4. Adjust the amplifiers gain pot until the RMS meter displays the configured output level (25 or 70 Vrms). 5. Connect the amplifiers field wiring. 6. Use the 1KHZ_TONE switch again and verify that the output level remains the same. Readjust the amplifiers gain pot if necessary. 7. Disconnect the amplifiers field wiring. 8. Repeat steps 2 through 6 for each amplifier in the cabinet.
Gain pot on daughter card
9. Reconnect the field wiring for all the amplifiers in the cabinet.
Design considerations
Your audio system will work best if the prerecorded tones and messages have roughly the same volume, or amplitude. The process of establishing a common maximum amplitude is sometimes called normalizing.
CCW increases gain
We suggest that you normalize your tones and messages to a maximum amplitude of 1 V peak-to-peak, or an average of 0.7 Vrms. The SDU does not contain a tool for normalizing your audio clips, so you'll need to use a sound editor to normalize the clips before you import them into the SDU database. The audio clips included in the EST3 Support Library CD have already been normalized.
5.35
Installation
Connecting a CDR-3 Zone Coder for coded tone output

The CDR-3 Zone coder can be connected to the 3-ASUs AUX input to provide a coded or march time tone to the audio system. Refer to Figure 5-6.
What you will need

An initial startup version of the project database that contains a switch programmed to turn the amplifiers onto the Auxiliary channel. See Creating an initial startup version of the project database. An RMS voltmeter (Fluke 83 or equivalent)
Adjusting the gain on the 3-ASU auxiliary input

The 3-ASU auxiliary input gain adjustment is critical to the operation of this application. Before adjusting the 3-ASU, set each zoned amplifier module in the cabinet for their configured RMS output level. See Adjusting amplifier output levels.
To adjust the gain on the 3-ASU auxiliary input
1. Connect the coded tone output on the CDR-3 directly to the 3-ASU auxiliary input by bypassing the duration relay. 2. Set the 3-ASU auxiliary input gain pot to the mid-range position. 3. Determine which zoned amplifier module requires the highest gain adjustment (the module whose gain adjustment pot is turned the most counter-clockwise). Use this amplifier as the worst-case amplifier. 4. Disconnect the field wiring from all the amplifiers in the cabinet except for the worst-case amplifier. This is to prevent the CDR-3s supervisory tone from being broadcast throughout the premises. 5. Place an RMS meter across the worst-case amplifiers TB2 NAC/B+ and NAC/B- terminals. 6. Press the AUX_INPUT_ADJ switch. This places the coders supervisory tone onto the Auxiliary channel. The supervisory tone occurs approximately every 5 seconds. 7. Adjust the 3-ASUs auxiliary input gain pot until the RMS meter displays the amplifiers configured output level (22-28 Vrms or 65-75 Vrms). Turning the pot clockwise increases the gain while counter-clockwise decreases the gain. 8. Press the AUX_INPUT_ADJ switch a second time to restore the input.
5.36
Installation
9. Reconnect the coded tone output of the CDR-3 back through the duration relay. 10. Reconnect the field wiring to the remaining amplifier modules.
5.37
Installation
CPU
TB2
Note: Connect 3-ASU output to AUDIO A OUT +/- for single cabinet applications.
AUDIO A IN AUDIO A OUT AUDIO B IN AUDIO B OUT R X 1 T X 1 R T S 1 C O M 1 R X 2 T X 2 R T S 2 C O M 2
3-PSMON
AUXILIARY POWER
TB1
DB25 male connector (rear view)
JB1
JB4 TB2 JB2 JB3 TB3 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4
3 2 1
TB1
UP
SW1
IOP3A
10 k EOL
TEMPORL TONE EARTH GRND 24 VDC
AUDIO DATA TELEPHONE PAGE OUT PRIMARYSECONDARY REMOTE MIC KEY AUDIO AUX
COMMON RS232 INPUT
TB1
47 k EOL
PRINT SUPV TRBLE OUT CODED TONE
3-ASU
10 k EOL SW1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CDR-3
SIGA-CT1
Note: Configure the SIGA-CT1 as a non-latching input circuit with the Monitor device type.
Note: Refer to the CDR-3 installation sheet for SW1 settings.
ON
DURATION
From Signature controller or previous device
From 24 Vdc NAC signal power source To next device
JP2
TEMP BELL CODE
JP1
[CDR3_ASU.CDR]
To 24 Vdc notification appliance circuit
Figure 5-6: Application wiring diagram
5.38
Installation
Connecting an external modem for use with the Remote Diagnostics Utility
Using the Remote Diagnostics Utility requires that you connect an external modem to a CPU equipped with a 3-RS232 option card. Some applications may require that the modem be permanently mounted. The following is a suggested method for mounting a modem connected to the CPU. First you will need to obtain the following parts MFCA accessory enclosure SIGA-MP1 mounting plate 2 cable ties long enough to go around the modem and through the slots on the SIGA-MP1
To mount the modem:
1. Mount the MFCA enclosure back box at an acceptable location within reach of the panel. Refer to Figure 5-7. 2. Secure the modem to the SIGA-MP1 with the 2 cable ties. 3. Screw the SIGA-MP1 to the MFCA enclosure back box. 4. Connect all modem wiring. Refer to the technical documentation that came with the modem for wiring connections.
Note: RS-232 wiring must maintain a 1/4-in minimum
separation between nonpower-limited wiring. 5. Screw the MFCA cover to the back box. 6. Attach the modem RS-232 wires to the CPU serial port terminals. The serial port must be configured for Remote Diagnostics in the project database. See below.
CPU
TB2
R X 1 T X 1 R T S 1 C O M 1 R X 2 T X 2 R T S 2 C O M 2
Modem serial cable
DB25 male connector (rear view) to modem RS-232 connector
5.39
Installation
6 7 1 3 2 Modem 8
MFCA/Modem Installation 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SIGA-MP1 mounting plate Slotted pan head screw, #6-32X3/8 Lock washer, #6 MFCA Enclosure Quick opening screw #362219 Conduit knockout Tamper switch mounting screws Cable ties [MODEM MOUNT.CDR]
Figure 5-7: Suggested modem installation using MFCA and SIGA-MP1
5.40
Installation
Running the RPM and distributing profiles

The Resource Profile Manager (RPM) is an add-on tool that works with the SDU. The RPM lets you: Create a description of the companies and buildings at a site Assign security and access control devices to companies and buildings Specify a primary company (owner) for CRCs Allocate device resources among companies that share the devices
This information is displayed in a two-pane window that includes a tree structure and a data table. The tree structure shows the organization of companies and buildings and the assignment of partitions and devices to the buildings. The data table shows the labels, properties, and allocation numbers for the current tree selection. You could think of this as the overall resource profile for the project. The RPM lets you export resource profiles for individual companies. These are later imported into the Access Control Database (ACDB) and Keypad Display Configuration (KDC) programs. Once imported, the profiles determine what the users see and control when creating their portions of the security or access control system. To create and distribute resource profiles, you follow these general steps: 1. Enter company and installer contact information. 2. Create buildings and assign them to companies. 3. Assign partitions and devices to the buildings for each company. 4. Allocate device resources to each company. 5. Export a resource profile for each company. The RPM includes a Mass Assign function to help you establish a uniform baseline allocation of resources. A Summary display is available so you can review and print the profile in several different forms. When your project includes security or access control applications, you'll need to run the RPM and distribute resource profile diskettes to the ACDB and KDC users. Refer to the SDU online Help for details on these steps.
5.41
Installation
5.42
Chapter 6
Power-up and testing
Summary
This chapter provides information and procedures necessary to perform initial system power-up and acceptance testing.
Content Cabinet power-up procedure 6.3 Initial power-up 6.3 Runtime and system errors 6.4 Introduction 6.4 Runtime errors 6.4 System errors 6.5 Initial and reacceptance test procedures 6.6 Introduction 6.6 Control and emergency communications equipment testing 6.7 Primary power supplies 6.7 Booster power supplies 6.7 CPU with 3-LCD(XL) display 6.8 3-RS232 card installed in CPU 6.10 3-RS485 card installed in CPU, Class B configuration 6.10 3-RS485 card installed in CPU, Class A configuration 6.11 3-IDC8/4 Initiating Device Circuit module 6.11 Signature Driver Controller modules 6.11 Addressable Analog Driver Controller module 6.12 3-OPS Off-premises Signaling module 6.12 3-ASU Audio Source Unit 6.13 3-FTCU Firefighter Telephone Unit 6.14 3-ZAxx Audio Amplifiers 6.16 Control/display modules 6.16 Amplifier transfer panel (ATP) 6.16 Detector, input module, and output module testing 6.18 Signature Series detectors and bases on a Signature Driver Controller module circuit 6.18 Addressable analog detectors on a 3-AADC Module circuit 6.19 Traditional 2-wire smoke detectors connected to 3-IDC8/4 modules 6.19 Conventional 2-wire smoke detectors connected to SIGA-UM modules 6.19 Signature series input modules 6.20 Signature series output modules 6.20 Initiating device testing 6.21 Manual stations 6.21 Nonrestorable heat detectors 6.21 Restorable heat detectors 6.21 Waterflow switches 6.21
6.1
Power-up and testing Notification appliance testing 6.23 Visual devices 6.23 Speakers 6.23 Bells and horns 6.23 Record of completion 6.24
6.2
Cabinet power-up procedure

Initial power-up
1. Energize AC power at 3-PPS/M (-230), 3-BPS/M (-230), and the 3-BBC/M (-230) Booster Power Supplies. 2. Connect batteries to the 3-PPS/M (-230), 3-BPS/M (-230), and the 3-BBC/M (-230) Booster Power Supplies. While the CPUs microprocessor is initializing, the 3-LCD displays status messages. 3. Connect the download cable assembly between the SDU computer and CPU connector J5. 4. Using the SDU, download the CPU database into the panel controller. Refer to the next topic, Runtime and system errors, should error messages be displayed on the 3-LCD(XL) display. 5. If an Audio Source Unit is part of the system, its database must be downloaded in addition to the CPU database. For best download performance, we suggest you connect directly to the 3-ASU/FT module and download its database in single-step mode. 6. Clear up any network communications faults between cabinets. 7. If any Signature controller modules are installed as part of the system, their individual databases must be downloaded in addition to the CPU database. You will need to restart the network for these changes to be effective. 8. Correct all the circuit faults. 9. Test the system as described in the next section.
Note: Remember that for a network system, youll need to make
the initial download to each CPU separately, to establish the correct cabinet numbers. After the initial download, all further downloads can be made from a single panel via the network.
6.3
Runtime and system errors

Introduction
There are two major categories of errors which can occur when configuring a database for the network. The System Definition Utility program is used to set up the contents of each cabinet. Once all the cabinets have been defined, devices labeled, and rules written, all this information is cross checked against itself. This process is called compiling the program. If there are incorrectly written rules, unreferenced input or output devices or other problems with the design, the compiler will generate a list of errors. These errors must be corrected using the SDU. When the data has been properly compiled, the data is in a form that the CPU memory can receive. Sending this information to the memory of the various CPUs making up the network is called downloading. If an error occurs during the download process, it is referred to as a runtime error.
Runtime errors
There are a number of reasons that errors may occur when downloading data into the CPU controllers. Initially, certain errors are to be expected, as the network database is loaded in steps. Until all portions of the database are properly entered into memory, errors will be generated. During initial system configuration, this is to be expected. Most of these errors will resolve themselves as the system configuration progresses. A second source of download errors is a mismatch between the cabinet configuration in the SDU and the actual hardware installation. The most common cause for this error is typically due to the installation of a local rail module in the wrong rail position. Another common cause is the installation of the wrong type module in the rail. Misidentification of an entire cabinet can also cause this type of error. A third source of download error can occur after the cabinets have been initially downloaded. After the initial downloads, all subsequent downloads can be done using the network data circuit. The third type of error is primarily caused by communications problems between cabinets.
6.4
Table 6-1: Download Errors Error Message Unable to perform operation Busy signal Password Invalid Size parameter trouble Storage media trouble Checksum error in packet Device type error Parcel # Inaccessible panel Session in progress Write protect Erase program trouble Block number Version mismatch Possible Cause General error. Restart CPU System currently busy. Wait, then retry Incorrect or invalid password entered Check download connections and SDU settings, then retry Problem with memory components. Swap module and retry. Check download connections and SDU settings, then retry Conflict between SDU download setting and connected device type Check download connections and SDU settings, then retry SDU program can not see the panel. Check network wiring System is busy. Wait, then retry Write protect switch on 3-ASUMX is on Check download connections and SDU settings, then retry Check download connections and SDU settings, then retry Firmware downloaded does not agree with version setting Note: If you are experiencing frequent problems downloading to a CPU, low signal levels from the SDU computer may be the cause. The Buffered RS-232 Communications Cable, P/N SDU-CBL, may be used to correct signal level problems. Do not use this cable with the CPU.
System errors
The CPU does not send data to the SDU program. Except for problems with the communications between the CPU and the PC running the SDU program, the majority of problems with the runtime process are annunciated on the 3-LCD(XL) display. Refer to Chapter 5: Service and Troubleshooting for system error codes and their possible causes.
6.5
Initial and reacceptance test procedures

Introduction
Once the system has been wired, programmed, and the circuit faults corrected, all installed components should be tested as a system, to insure proper operation. The initial system check is designed to verify that all components of the system are installed and operating as designed. Verifying that the system was designed and installed according to specifications requires all aspects of the system to be exercised and the results verified. Where test results differ from those expected, corrective action must be taken. Before commencing testing, notify all areas where the alarm sounds and off-premises locations that receive alarm and trouble transmissions that testing is in progress. Records of all testing and maintenance shall be kept on the protected premises for a period of at least five (5) years.
Required Tools:
Slotted screwdriver, insulated Digital multimeter 12inch (30.5 cm) jumper lead with alligator clips Panel door key
A complete check of installed field wiring and devices should be made at regular intervals, in accordance with NFPA 72 and ULC 524 requirements. These requirements are covered in the chapter on preventive maintenance.
6.6
Control and emergency communications equipment testing

The procedures listed in the following sections should be performed on the equipment installed in each cabinet connected to the system. These procedures are designed to test the hardware and its installation. The applications programming will be tested later.
Note: The network configuration information must be downloaded into the network and Audio Source Unit, using the System Definition Utility (SDU) program, before starting testing.
Primary power supplies

1. Verify that all components are installed using accepted workmanship standards. 2. Verify adequate separation between power-limited and nonpower-limited wiring. Refer to NFPA 70, article 760, of the National Electrical Code. 3. Verify that the installed batteries are the proper capacity for the application. 4. With the batteries disconnected, verify that the supplys full alarm load can be sustained by the power supply without the batteries connected. 5. With the batteries connected, disconnect the AC source and verify that a power supply trouble is annunciated, and that the supplys full alarm load can be sustained by the batteries. 6. Verify that the battery charger properly charges the batteries connected to both the primary and booster power supplies to 80% capacity within 24 hours.
Booster power supplies

1. Verify that all components are installed using accepted workmanship standards. 2. Verify adequate separation between power-limited and nonpower-limited wiring. 3. Verify that the installed batteries are the proper capacity for the application. 4. With the batteries disconnected, verify that the supplys full alarm load can be sustained by the power supply without the batteries connected. 5. With the batteries connected, disconnect the AC source and verify that a power supply trouble is annunciated, and that the supplys full alarm load can be sustained by the batteries.
6.7
CPU with 3-LCD(XL) display

1. Verify the module is properly seated in all four rail connectors and secured with the four snap rivets. Verify that removable terminal strips TB1 and TB2 are firmly seated. 2. Verify that all components are installed using accepted workmanship standards. 3. Verify that the correct date and time are displayed on the LCD display, and the Power LED is on. 4. Simultaneously press the Alarm Silence and Panel Silence switches to activate the lamp test function. Verify all lamps operated. 5. Initiate a fire alarm and verify the following: the alarm LED flashes, the Alarm relay transfers, the correct device message appears at the top of the LCD window, the active point counter increments, the event sequence indicates a 1, the active Alarm events counter at the bottom of the display indicates 001, the event type indicates fire alarm, and the local panel buzzer sounds. Press the Alarm Silence switch and verify that the required notification appliances are silenced and the Alarm Silence LED lights. Press the Panel Silence switch to verify that the panel buzzer silences and the Panel Silence LED lights. Press the Alarm queue switch and verify that the Alarm LED lights steady. Press the Details switch and verify that the alarm devices message, if any, is displayed. If a printer is connected to the CPU, verify that all specified information appears on the printer. 6. Initiate a second fire alarm and verify that: it appears at the bottom of the LCD window, the active point counter changes, the event sequence indicates a 2, the active Alarm events counter at the bottom of the display indicates 002, the event type indicates fire alarm, the Alarm LED reflashes, the local panel buzzer resounds, and the first Alarm message remains at the top of the LCD display. Press the Alarm queue switch and verify that the Alarm LED lights steady. 7. Initiate a third fire alarm and verify that: its message appears at the bottom of the LCD window, the active point counter changes, the event sequence indicates a 3, the active Alarm events counter at the bottom of the display indicates 003, the event type indicates fire alarm, and the local panel buzzer resounds, and the first alarm message remains at the
6.8
top of the LCD display. Press the Alarm queue switch and verify that the Alarm LED lights steady. 8. Use the previous and next message switches to verify that you can scroll through all three messages in the alarm queue, as indicated by the event sequence window. 9. Press the Reset switch. Verify that all initiating devices reset and that all panel indicators clear except the power LED. 10a. Initiate an active Monitor condition and verify that: the Monitor LED flashes, the correct active Monitor device message appears in the top and bottom windows of the LCD, the active point counter changes, the event sequence indicates a 1, the active Monitor events counter at the bottom of the display indicates 001, and the event type indicates Monitor. Press the Monitor queue switch and verify that the Monitor LED lights steady. Initiate a second active Monitor condition and verify that the first Monitor message remains at the top of the LCD window, that the second Monitor event message appears at the bottom of the display, the active point counter changes, the event sequence indicates a 2, the active Monitor events counter at the bottom of the display indicates 002. 10b. Initiate an active Trouble condition and verify that: the Trouble LED flashes, the correct active Trouble device message appears in the top and bottom windows of the LCD, the local panel buzzer sounds, the Trouble relay transfers, the active point counter changes, the event sequence indicates a 1, the active Trouble events counter at the bottom of the display indicates 001, and the event type indicates Trouble. Press the Trouble queue switch and verify that the Trouble LED lights steady. Press the Panel Silence switch to verify the panel buzzer silences and the Panel Silenced LED lights. Initiate a second active Trouble condition and verify that the first Trouble message remains at the top of the LCD window, that the second Trouble event message appears at the bottom of the display, the active point counter changes, the event sequence indicates a 2, the active Trouble events counter at the bottom of the display indicates 002. 10c. Initiate an active Supervisory condition and verify that the Supervisory LED flashes, the correct active Supervisory device message appears in the top and bottom windows of the LCD, the local panel buzzer sounds, the Supervisory relay transfers, the active point counter changes, the event sequence indicates a 1, the active Supervisory events counter at the bottom of the display indicates 001 and the event type indicates Supervisory. Press the Supervisory queue switch and verify that the Supervisory LED lights
6.9
steady. Press the Panel Silence switch to verify the panel buzzer silences and the Panel Silenced LED lights. Initiate a second active Supervisory condition and verify that the first Supervisory message remains at the top of the LCD window, that the second Supervisory event message appears at the bottom of the display, the active point counter changes, the event sequence indicates a 2, the active Supervisory events counter at the bottom of the display indicates 002. 10d. Initiate an active fire Alarm, verify that alarm LED flashes, the correct fire alarm message appears in the top and bottom windows of the LCD the active point counter changes, the event sequence indicates a 1, the active fire alarm events counter at the bottom of the display indicates 001 and the event type indicates fire alarm. Press the Alarm queue switch and verify that the Alarm LED lights steady. Press the Panel Silence switch to verify the panel buzzer silences and the Panel Silenced LED lights. Initiate a second fire Alarm condition and verify that the first fire Alarm message remains at the top of the LCD window, that the second fire Alarm event message appears at the bottom of the display, the active point counter changes, the event sequence indicates a 2, the active fire alarm events counter at the bottom of the display indicates 002. 11. Press the Reset switch and verify that all devices reset and the panel returns to the normal condition.
3-RS232 card installed in CPU

1. Verify the card is properly seated in its connector and secured with the snap rivet or nylon screw. 2. Verify that the baud rate of the peripheral device connected to the port matches the port setting as set using the SDU program. 3. Check the printer operation by initiating an active condition on the system or generating a system report via the keypad.
3-RS485 card installed in CPU, Class B configuration

1. Verify the card is properly seated in its connector and secured with the snap rivet or nylon screw. 2. Starting with the network in the normal condition, use the status command to verify all connected cabinets are communicating over the network. 3. Disconnect the network data communications wiring (TB2-17/18 & 19/20) from the cabinet with the primary
6.10
3-LCD display, and verify that all the other system cabinets connected to the network appear in the trouble queue.
3-RS485 card installed in CPU, Class A configuration

1. Verify the card is properly seated in its connector and secured with the snap rivet or nylon screw. 2. Starting with the network in the normal condition, use the status command to verify all connected cabinets are communicating over the network. 3. Disconnect the network data communications wiring (TB2-17/18 & 19/20) from the cabinet with the primary 3-LCD(XL) display and verify that a Class A network communications fault is annunciated. Repeat step 2 to verify that all connected cabinets still communicate over the network.
3-IDC8/4 Initiating Device Circuit module

1. Familiarize yourself with the circuit configuration of the individual module to be tested. Remember, modules of the same type can be configured differently. 2. For circuits configured as initiating device circuits (IDCs), activate the circuit by shorting the circuits two terminals. Verify that the appropriate message appears in the proper message queue. Disconnect the circuit or EOL resistor. Verify that a Trouble message appears in the Trouble message queue. 3. For circuits configured as Notification Device Circuits (NACs), turn on the circuit by activating an IDC programmed to turn on the NAC, or use the activate output device command via the keypad. Verify that the circuit activates properly. Restore the circuit. Disconnect the circuit or EOL resistor. Verify that a Trouble message appears in the Trouble message queue.
Signature Driver Controller modules

1. Verify that the module is properly seated in both rail connectors and secured with the two snap rivets. Verify that removable terminal strips TB1 and TB2 are firmly seated. 2. Verify the wiring to all Signature devices. 3. Map the SDC circuit by reading the device data; adjusting, modifying, and accepting devices as required; writing the information back to the devices; and rereading the device data.
6.11
4. With no map errors displayed, put an input device on the circuit in the active mode, and verify the appropriate message is displayed on the 3-LCD(XL) Display. Put the input device in the Trouble mode and verify that the correct Trouble message is displayed.
Note: Individual device testing will be done later.
Addressable Analog Driver Controller module

1. Verify that the module is properly seated in both rail connectors and secured with the two snap rivets. Verify that removable terminal strip TB1 is firmly seated. 2. Verify the wiring to all addressable analog devices. 3. Read the addressable analog circuit device data; adjusting, modifying, and accepting devices as required; writing the information back to the addressable analog module. 4. With no errors displayed, put an input device on the circuit in the active mode, and verify the appropriate message is displayed on the 3-LCD(XL) Display. Put the input device in the Trouble mode and verify that the correct Trouble message is displayed.
Note: Individual device testing will be done later.
3-OPS Off-premises Signaling module

1. Verify that the module is properly seated in both rail connectors and secured with the two snap rivets. Verify that removable terminal strip TB1 is firmly seated. 2. Familiarize yourself with the configuration of the module to be tested. 3. If the module is connected to a municipal box or central station, advise the appropriate parties that testing is in progress. 4a. Local Energy Municipal Box (City-Tie) configuration: With the municipal box connected between TB1-2 and TB1-3, open the circuit. (Note: You can temporarily substitute a 15, 2W resistor for the municipal box.) Verify that the module Trouble activates and the appropriate Trouble message appears in the Trouble message queue. Reconnect the circuit and initiate an active fire alarm. You should measure 20 to 25 volts between TB1-3 (+) and TB1-4 (-). Press the panel Reset switch, and wait for the system to reset. Verify receipt of the alarm at the municipal receiving station.
Note:
If you activate the municipal box, it will indicate Trouble until rewound.
6.12
4b. Single Reverse Polarity Circuit (Old Style) configuration: Verify that 20 to 25 volts appears between TB1-5 (+) and TB1-6 (-), paying attention to polarity. Create a Trouble condition on the panel. Verify that 0 volts appears between TB1-5 (+) and TB1-6 (-). Verify that the modules Trouble relay activates, the appropriate Trouble message appears in the Trouble message queue, and that the receiving station receives the Trouble indication. Open the circuit wired between TB1-5 and TB1-6. Verify that the receiving station receives the Trouble indication. Initiate an active fire alarm. You should measure 20 to 25 volts between TB1-5 (-) and TB1-6 (+), paying attention to the polarity change. Verify receipt of the alarm at the municipal receiving station. 4c. Three Reverse Polarity Circuit (New Style) configuration: Verify that 20 to 25 volts appears between TB1-5 (+) & TB1-6 (-), between TB1-7 (+) & TB1-8 (-), between TB1-9 (+) & TB1-10 (-), paying attention to polarity. Create a Trouble condition on the panel. Verify that 20 to 25 volts appears between TB1-8 (+) and TB1-8 (-). Verify that the modules Trouble relay activates, the appropriate Trouble message appears in the Trouble message queue, and that the receiving station receives the Trouble indication. Open the circuit wired between TB1-5 and TB1-6. Verify that the receiving station receives a circuit fault indication. Open the circuit wired between TB1-7 and TB1-8. Verify that the receiving station receives a circuit fault indication. Open the circuit wired between TB1-9 and TB1-10. Verify that the modules Trouble relay activates and the appropriate Trouble message appears in the Trouble message queue, and that the receiving station receives a circuit fault indication. Initiate an active fire alarm. You should measure 20 to 25 volts between TB1-5 (-) and TB1-6 (+), paying attention to the polarity change. Verify receipt of the alarm at the municipal receiving station. Initiate an active Supervisory condition. You should measure 20 to 25 volts between TB1-9 (-) and TB1-10 (+), paying attention to the polarity change. Verify receipt of the Supervisory condition at the municipal receiving station.

1. Verify that the 3-ASU is installed using accepted workmanship standards. 2. The audio sub-system messages and configuration information must be downloaded into the Audio Source Unit, using the System Definition Utility (SDU) program,
6.13
before starting testing. Verify that the 3-ASUMX expansion card, if used, is firmly seated in its connector. 3. Verify the wiring to all devices. 4. Starting with the network in the normal condition, use the Status command to verify all amplifiers are communicating over the network. 5. Disconnect the network audio communications wiring (TB1-1/2) from the 3-ASU, and verify that all the audio amplifiers connected to the network appear in the Trouble queue. Restore the connection. 6. If a supervised remote microphone is used, disconnect the remote microphone wiring (TB1-11 & TB1-12) from the 3-ASU. Verify a remote microphone trouble is annunciated. 7. Press the All Call switch on the front of the 3-ASU. Verify the All Call LED next to the switch lights. Remove the microphone from its bracket, press the Push-To-Talk (PTT) switch. Verify that that the preannouncement tone (if configured) sounds, followed by the Ready to Page LED lighting. Speak into the microphone and verify that the Page Level Meter is operational, and the message is being transmitted over all speakers.
3-FTCU Firefighter Telephone Unit

1. Verify that the 3-FTCU is installed using accepted workmanship standards. 2. Verify the wiring to all devices. SIGA-CC1s should be set to personality code 6. 3. Verify that the 3-FTCU display indicates: 0 Calls Pending and Unit: OK. 4. Take the master handset off-hook. Verify that the display indicates: Handset off hook.. Replace the master handset on-hook. 5. Take a firefighter telephone off-hook (plug a phone in a phone jack). Verify that the incoming call buzzer sounds, the display indicates 1 Calls Pending, the location of the incoming call is displayed in reversed text, and 0 calls connected is shown on the display. Silence the buzzer by pressing the ACK switch. Press the Connect switch. Verify that the display indicates: 0 calls pending, 1 calls connected, and the location of the connected call is displayed in reversed text. Converse over the phone connection to verify clear, noise free communications. Take a second firefighter telephone on a different circuit off-hook. Verify that the incoming call buzzer sounds, the
6.14
display indicates 1 Calls Pending, the location of the incoming call is displayed in reversed text, and 1 calls connected is shown in the display. Silence the buzzer by pressing the ACK switch. Press the Connect switch. Verify that the display indicates: 0 calls pending, 2 calls connected, the location of the second connected call is displayed in reversed text, the location of the first call is displayed in normal text below the second call location. Converse over the phone connection to verify clear, noise free communications. Press the Review Connected switch, moving the reversed text to the first calls location message. Without hanging up the first telephone, press the Disconnect switch. Verify the display indicates: 1 Calls Pending, the location of the call being disconnected is displayed in reversed text at the top of the screen, and 1 calls connected is shown in the display. Hang up the first telephone. Verify that the display indicates: 0 Calls Pending and 1 calls connected. 6. Repeat Step 5, connecting five (5) phones simultaneously, and verify acceptable voice quality. 7. Press the All Call and Page by Phone switches on the 3-ASU Audio Source Unit. When the Ready to Page LED lights steady, speak into the telephone still connected, and verify that the telephones audio is distributed throughout the facility. Press the Disconnect switch on the 3-FTCU, and hang up the master and remote phones. 8a. Class A telephone riser configuration: Disconnect the telephone riser wiring (TB1-2 & TB1-2) or (TB1-3 & TB1-4) from the 3-FTCU, and verify that a riser trouble message appears in the Trouble queue. Take a firefighter telephone off-hook (plug a phone in a phone jack). Verify that the incoming call buzzer sounds, the display indicates 1 Calls Pending, the location of the incoming call is displayed in reversed text, and 0 calls connected is shown in the display. Restore the connection. 8b. Class B telephone riser configuration: Disconnect the telephone riser wiring (TB1-1 & TB1-2) from the 3-FTCU, and verify that a riser trouble message appears in the Trouble queue. Restore the connection. 9. Disconnect each phone station/jack station, and verify that a Trouble message appears in the Trouble queue. Restore the connections.
6.15
3-ZAxx Audio Amplifiers

1. Verify that the module is properly seated in both rail connectors and secured with the two snap rivets. Verify that removable terminal strips are firmly seated. 2. Verify that the 3-ASU is installed using accepted workmanship standards. 3. If wired with a backup amplifier, verify that the backup amplifiers wattage is equal to or greater than the wattage of any primary amplifier it can replace. If mixing 15-, and 30-watt amplifiers with 20-, and 40-watt amplifier modules, make sure the back up amplifier is 20 or 40 watts, whichever is required. 4. Verify that the EVAC and Page signals are available at the speakers 5. Create an amplifier fault. Verify backup amplifier substitution. 6. Class B amp output configuration: Disconnect the modules audio output wiring (TB2-7 & TB2-8) from the 3-ZAxx, and verify that the appropriate amplifier Trouble message appears in the Trouble queue. Restore the connection. 7. Class B supplementary NAC output configuration (3-ZA20 & 3-ZA40 only): Disconnect the modules supplementary notification appliance circuit wiring (TB2-3 & TB2-4) from the 3-ZAxx, and verify that the appropriate Trouble message appears in the Trouble queue. Restore the connection. Short the modules supplementary notification appliance circuit wiring (TB2-3 & TB2-4) from the 3-ZAxx, and verify that the appropriate Trouble message appears in the Trouble queue. Remove the short.
Control/display modules
1. Verify that the display(s) are properly seated in the module and secured with the four snap rivets. Verify that the ribbon cable between the display and its host module is firmly seated on both ends. 2. Perform a lamp test by pressing the Alarm Silence and Panel Silence switches simultaneously 3. Perform a functional switch test
Amplifier transfer panel (ATP)

1. Disconnect power amplifier output. Verify amplifier/riser trouble annunciated on panel. Restore connection. 2. Initiate an All Call page. Verify that audio is available on all power amplifier outputs.
6.16
3. If back up amplifiers provided, create an amplifier failure and verify backup amp operates properly. 4. Disconnect AC power from amplifier rack. Initiate an All Call page. Verify that audio is available on all power amplifier outputs.
6.17
Detector, input module, and output module testing

The procedures listed in this section should be performed on the detectors, input modules, output modules, and related accessories connected to each cabinet. These procedures are designed to test the devices and the network applications programming.
Note: The network configuration, Signature Control module information must be downloaded into the network and Audio Source Unit, using the System Definition Utility (SDU) program, before starting testing.
Every circuit connected to the EST3 system should be visited, and manually activated during the installation process to verify that: 1. The installed location meets proper engineering practices. 2. The location annunciated by the system agrees with the physical location of the device. 3. That the activated device initiates the correct system response. Duct detectors should be tested to verify that both minimum and maximum airflow requirements are met.
Signature Series detectors and bases on a Signature Driver Controller module circuit
1. Verify that all components are installed using accepted workmanship standards. 2. Individually activate each detector. Verify that the appropriate Alarm and location message is displayed on the 3-LCD(XL) display. Verify that the detector initiates the appropriate system responses. If the detector is installed in a relay base, verify that the bases relay function operates correctly. If the detector is installed in an isolator base, verify that the base isolates the required circuit segments.
Caution: Do not use magnets to test Signature series detectors.
Doing so may damage the detector electronics. Instead, use an approved testing agent (e.g. canned smoke.) 3. Duct mounted detectors should be tested using an air velocity test kit (6263, 6263-SG) to verify that minimum/maximum airflow requirements are met. 4. Remove the detector from its base. Verify that the appropriate Trouble and location message is displayed on the 3-LCD(XL) display.
6.18
5. After all detectors have been individually inspected, run a Sensitivity report, using the Reports command.
Addressable analog detectors on a 3-AADC Module circuit

1. Verify that all components are installed using accepted workmanship standards. 2. Individually activate each detector. Verify that the appropriate Alarm and location message is displayed on the 3-LCD(XL) display. Verify that the detector initiates the appropriate system responses. 3. Duct mounted detectors should be tested to verify that minimum/maximum airflow requirements are met. 4. Remove the detector from its base. Verify that the appropriate Trouble and location message is displayed on the 3-LCD(XL) display. 5. After all detectors have been individually inspected, run a Sensitivity report, using the Reports command.
Traditional 2-wire smoke detectors connected to 3-IDC8/4 modules

1. Verify that all components are installed using accepted workmanship standards. 2. Individually activate each detector. Verify that the appropriate Alarm and location message is displayed on the 3-LCD(XL) display. Verify the detector circuit initiates the appropriate system responses. 3. Duct mounted detectors should be tested to verify that minimum/maximum airflow requirements are met. 4. Remove the detector from its base. Verify that the appropriate circuit Trouble and location message is displayed on the 3-LCD(XL) display.
Conventional 2-wire smoke detectors connected to SIGA-UM modules

1. Verify that all components are installed using accepted workmanship standards. 2. Verify that jumper JP1 on each SIGA-UM module is set to position 1/2. 3. Individually activate each detector. Verify that the appropriate Alarm and location message is displayed on the 3-LCD(XL) display. Verify the SIGA-UM initiates the appropriate system responses.
6.19
4. Duct mounted detectors should be tested to verify that minimum/maximum airflow requirements are met. 5. Remove the detector from its base. Verify that the appropriate SIGA-UM Trouble and location message is displayed on the 3-LCD(XL) display.
Signature series input modules

1. Verify that all components are installed using accepted workmanship standards. 2. Individually activate each initiation device. Verify that the appropriate circuit type and location message is displayed on the 3-LCD(XL) display. Verify that the circuit initiates the appropriate system responses. 3. Open up the circuit. Verify that the appropriate circuit Trouble and location message is displayed on the 3-LCD(XL) display.
Signature series output modules

1. Verify that all components are installed using accepted workmanship standards. 2. Using the Activate Output command, individually activate each output. Verify that the device responds appropriately. 3. For supervised output circuits, open up the circuit. Verify that the appropriate circuit Trouble and location message is displayed on the 3-LCD(XL) display. 4. If the output is activated by one or more system inputs, activate these inputs and verify the output function operates appropriately.
6.20
Initiating device testing

The procedures listed in the following sections should be performed on the initiating devices connected to the system, in conjunction with the procedures in Detector, input module, and output module initial and reacceptance testing. These procedures are designed to test the initiating devices and the network applications programming.
Manual stations
1. Visual inspection 2. Activate mechanism 3. Verify that the appropriate circuit type and device location message is displayed on the 3-LCD(XL) display. Verify the device initiates the appropriate system responses. 4. Open up the circuit. Verify that the appropriate circuit Trouble and location message is displayed on the 3-LCD(XL) display.
Nonrestorable heat detectors

1. Visual inspection 2. Test mechanically and/or electrically 3. Verify that the appropriate circuit type and device location message is displayed on the 3-LCD(XL) display. Verify the device initiates the appropriate system responses. 4. Open up the circuit. Verify that the appropriate circuit Trouble and location message is displayed on the 3-LCD(XL) display.
Restorable heat detectors

1. Visual inspection 2. Activate detector 3. Verify that the appropriate circuit type and device location message is displayed on the 3-LCD(XL) display. Verify the device initiates the appropriate system responses. 4. Open up the circuit. Verify that the appropriate circuit Trouble and location message is displayed on the 3-LCD(XL) display.
Waterflow switches
1. Visual inspection 2. Activate sprinkler test valve. (Refer to Sprinkler system test procedure.)
6.21
3. Verify that the appropriate circuit type and device location message is displayed on the 3-LCD(XL) display. Verify the device initiates the appropriate system responses. 4. Open up the circuit. Verify that the appropriate circuit Trouble and location message is displayed on the 3-LCD(XL) display.
6.22
Notification appliance testing

The procedures listed in the following sections should be performed on the notification appliances connected to the system, in conjunction with the procedures in Detector, input module, and output module initial and reacceptance testing. These procedures are designed to test the notification appliances and the network applications programming.
Visual devices
1. Visual Inspection 2. Activate the circuit. Verify all indicating appliances operating properly. 3. Open up the circuit. Verify that the appropriate circuit Trouble and location message is displayed on the 3-LCD(XL) display.
Speakers
Bells and horns

6.23
Record of completion
When the system has been tested and found to operate satisfactorily, make a copy and fill out the Record of Completion on the following pages, and mount it near the fire alarm panel or give it to the building representative.
6.24
Record of Completion
Protected Property
Name: Address: Authority Having Jurisdiction: Address:
Page 1 of 2
Representative: Phone:
Phone:
Record of System Installation

This system has been installed in accordance with the NFPA standards listed below, was inspected by __________________ on __________________, and includes the devices listed below, and has been in service since _______________ . NFPA 72: Year ________; Ch. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 (circle all that apply) NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, Article 760 Manufacturer's Instructions Other (specify):
Record of System Operation

All operational features and functions of this system were tested by __________on _________ and found to be operating properly and in accordance with the requirements of: NFPA 72: Year ________; Ch. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 (circle all that apply) NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, Article 760 Manufacturer's Instructions Other (specify): Signed: Dated: Organization:
System Software
System Firmware Installed Revision: Application Programming Initial Program Installation: Revisions & Reasons: Programmed by (name): Date of Programmer's Latest Factory Certification: Data Entry Program Revision Used Checksum: Date: Date: Date: Date: Date:
Maintenance
Frequency of routine tests and inspections, if other than in accordance with the referenced NFPA standards: System deviations from the referenced standards are:
(signed) for Central Station or Alarm Service Company (signed) for representative of the authority having jurisdiction
(title) (title)
(date) (date)
[EST3ROC1.CDR]
6.25
Record of Completion
Initiating Devices and Circuits
(indicate quantity) Manual Stations Automatic Devices Smoke Detectors: Duct Detectors: Waterflow Switches: Other (list): Combination Detectors (circle active sensors) Ion/Photo/Heat Ion/Photo/Heat Ion Ion Photo Photo
Page 2 of 2
System & Service

NFPA 72 - Local
If alarm transmitted off premise, location(s) received:
NFPA 72 - Emergency Voice Alarm Service

# Voice/alarm channels: # Installed speakers: # Telephones/jacks installed: Single: Multiple: # speakers per zone:
Supervisory Devices and Circuits

(indicate quantity) Compulsory Guard's Tour comprised of ______ transmitter stations and _______ intermdediate stations. Sprinkler System Valve supervisory devices Building temperature points Site water temperature points Site water supply level points: Engine Driven Fire Pump Selector in auto position Control panel trouble Transfer switches Engine running Electric Fire Pump Fire pump power Fire pump running Phase reversal Other Supervisory Function(s) (specify)
NFPA 72 - Auxiliary
Type of connection: Local Energy: Shunt: Parallel Telephone: Location/Phone # for receipt of signals:
NFPA 72 - Remote Station

Alarm: Supervisory:
NFPA 72 - Proprietary
If alarms retransmitted off premise, location & phone of receiving organization:
Method of alarm retransmission:
Notification Appliances & Circuits

# Notification Appliance Circuits Type and quantity of installed Notification Appliances Bells Speakers Horns Other: Local Annunciator inch Visual Signals Type: with audible without audible
NFPA 72 - Central Station

Prime Contractor: Central Station Location: Method of transmission of alarms to central station: McCulloh Multiplex One-Way Radio Two-Way Radio Digital Alarm Communicator Others:
Method of transmission of alarms to public fire service comunications center: 1. 2.
Signaling Line Circuits

Quantity and Style of connected SLCs, per NFPA 72, Table 3-6.1 Quantity Style Primary (main) Nominal Voltage: Current Rating: Overcurrent protection: Type: Current rating: Location:
Power Supplies
Secondery (standby) Storage battery Amp-Hour rating: Calculated for _____ hours of system operation. Dedicated generator Location of fuel supply:
Emergency or standby system used to backup primary supply Emergency system described in NFPA 70, Article 700 Legally required standby system described in NFPA 70, Article 701 Optional standby system described in NFPA 70, Article 702, meeting the performance requirements of Article 700 or 701
[EST3ROC2.CDR]
6.26
LOCATION:
Installed by:
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL
NORMAL CONDITION: POWER LED (GREEN) ON, ALL OTHER LEDs OFF. ALARM CONDITION: SYSTEM ALARM LED (RED). ALARM LOCATION AND ZONE SHOWN IN DISPLAY. USE REVIEW ALARM QUEUE SWITCH TO VIEW ADDITIONAL ALARMS. INTERNAL BUZZER PULSING.
Per NFPA Standard 72 - Local 72 - Auxiliary 72 - Remote Station 72 - Proprietary 72 - Central Station Dated For Service Contact:

2. TO CLEAR SYSTEM: PRESS THE "RESET" SWITCH.
1. TO SILENCE AUDIBLE DEVICES: PRESS THE "ALARM SILENCE" SWITCH. AUDIBLE SIGNALS WILL TURN OFF. NEW ALARMS RE-SOUND AUDIBLE SIGNALS. TO RE-SOUND AUDIBLE SIGNALS, PRESS THE "ALARM SILENCE" SWITCH A SECOND TIME. 2. TO RESET SYSTEM: PRESS "RESET" SWITCH (AFTER INVESTIGATING ALARM CONDITION). SUPERVISORY CONDITION: SUPERVISORY LED (YELLOW), INTERNAL BUZZER ON. SUPERVISORY CONDITION, LOCATION, AND ZONE SHOWN IN DISPLAY. USE REVIEW SUPERVISORY QUEUE BUTTON TO VIEW ADDITIONAL LOCATIONS. INTERNAL BUZZER PULSING. 1. TO SILENCE BUZZER: PRESS "PANEL SILENCE" BUTTON. INVESTIGATE CAUSE.
Inspected By:
MONITOR CONDITION: MONITOR LED (YELLOW) ON IN NON ALARM. MONITOR CONDITION AND LOCATION SHOWN IN DISPLAY ONLY IN ALARM. USE REVIEW MONITOR QUEUE BUTTON TO VIEW ADDITIONAL LOCATIONS. 1. TO CLEAR SYSTEM: SYSTEM CLEARS AUTOMATICALLY ON RESTORATION OF MONITOR CONDITION. TROUBLE CONDITION: SYSTEM TROUBLE LED (YELLOW) ON, INTERNAL BUZZER PULSING.TROUBLE LOCATION AND ZONE SHOWN IN DISPLAY. USE REVIEW TROUBLE QUEUE BUTTON TO VIEW ADDITIONAL LOCATIONS. 1. TO SILENCE BUZZER: PRESS "LOCAL SILENCE" SWITCH. INVESTIGATE CAUSE OF TROUBLE. 2. TO CLEAR SYSTEM: SYSTEM CLEAR AUTOMATICALLY ON CORRECTION OF TROUBLE CONDITION.
Date: Power Supply:
FIRE DRILL: NOTIFY FIRE DEPARTMENT OF TEST. 1. TO DRILL AND SOUND ALL AUDIBLE DEVICES: PRESS DRILL BUTTON. ALL AUDIBLE/VISIBLE SIGNALS OPERATE. PRESS DRILL A SECOND TIME OR ALARM SILENCE TO END DRILL. FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION, REFER TO MANUAL P/N 270382
Primary Location Fuses Secondary Type Specs
THESE INSTRUCTIONS TO BE FRAMED AND MOUNTED ADJACENT TO CONTROL PANEL.
6.27
[Operating Instructions.CDR]
6.28
Chapter 7
Preventive maintenance
Summary
This chapter provides a listing of required scheduled maintenance items and procedures.
Content General 7.2 Preventive maintenance schedule 7.3 Signature device routine maintenance tips 7.5 Detectors 7.5 Modules 7.5 Signature detector cleaning procedure 7.6 System trouble and maintenance log 7.7
7.1
General
Before commencing testing, notify all areas where the alarm sounds and off premises locations that receive alarm and trouble transmissions that testing is in progress. Records of all testing and maintenance shall be kept on the protected premises for a period of at least five (5) years. Required Tools: Slotted Screwdriver, Insulated Digital multimeter 1.1 k 1W resistor 12 inch (30.5 cm) jumper lead with alligator clips Panel Door Key
In addition, make sure you have the required system passwords. If the system includes access control applications, you'll need a construction card, or other valid access card. A complete check of installed field wiring and devices should be made at regular intervals, in accordance with NFPA 72 and ULC 524 requirements. This includes testing all alarm and supervisory alarm initiating devices and circuits, and any off premise connections. Panel operation should be verified in the alarm, supervisory, and trouble modes. To ensure that the panel can be powered when primary power is lost, the batteries should be periodically inspected, tested, and replaced (as a minimum) every 4 years.
7.2
Preventive maintenance schedule

Preventive maintenance schedule Component Manual Stations Testing Interval Semiannually Test Procedure 1. Visual inspection 2. Put zone in Test mode 3. Activate mechanism 4. Verify proper IDC zone response 1. Visual inspection 2. Put zone in Test mode 3. Test mechanically and/or electrically 4. Verify proper IDC zone response 1. Visual Inspection 2. Put zone in Test mode 3. Activate at least one detector on each IDC. Within five years all detectors on each IDC shall be tested. 1. Visual inspection 2. Put zone in test mode 3. Conduct a Functional test to verify proper IDC zone response 4. Check sensitivity 5. Clean as required 1. Put zone in Test mode 2. Activate sprinkler test valve. Refer to Sprinkler system test procedure. 1. Enter Test mode 2. Activate IDC zone. Appropriate NACs should activate & zone information should be annunciated. 3. Restore device and reset zone 4. Open the IDC field wiring. Trouble should be annunciated. 5. Reset and lock panel at conclusion of all testing 1. Verify all indicators operating properly. 1. Visual Inspection 2. Put panel in Alarm, Drill, or Test mode. Verify that all indicating appliances are operating properly 1. Illuminate all LEDs by pressing the Panel Silence and Trouble Silence switches at the same time 2. Reset and lock panel at conclusion of all testing 1. Remove Primary AC power 2. Verify panel operates from battery 3. Verify panel goes into trouble (6 second delay) 4. Restore AC power at end of test 5. Reset and lock panel at conclusion of all testing
NonRestorable Heat Detectors Restorable Heat Detectors Smoke Detectors
Semiannually
Semiannually
Annually
Waterflow Switches All Initiating Device Circuits
2 Months
Annually
Remote Annunciators Notification Appliances Panel LEDs & Trouble Buzzer Panel Primary Power
Annually Annually
Annually
Acceptance and Reacceptance tests
7.3
Preventive maintenance schedule Component Panel Secondary Power Testing Interval Acceptance and Reacceptance tests Test Procedure 1. Remove primary AC power 2. Measure standby and alarm currents, and compare with battery calculations to verify adequate battery capacity. 3. Test under full load for 5 minutes 4. Measure battery voltage under full load (20.4 to 27.3 VDC) 5. Restore AC power at end of test 6. Reset and lock panel at conclusion of all testing 1. Verify operation of system Trouble LED and trouble buzzer 2. Reset and lock panel at conclusion of all testing Verify displayed time is correct. Reset clock if incorrect. 1. Put zone in Test mode 2. Operate valve 3. Test pressure, temperature, and water level sensors per the sprinkler system test procedure 1. Coordinate test with receiving location 2. Verify receipt of all transmitted signals 3. Reset and lock panel at conclusion of all testing
Panel Trouble Signals 3-LCD(XL) Clock Supervisory Signal Initiating Devices Auxiliary System OffPremise Fire Alarm Signal Transmission Remote System OffPremise Waterflow Signal Transmission
Annually
Each visit Semiannually
Monthly
Every 2 Months
1. Coordinate test with receiving location 2. Verify receipt of all transmitted signals 3. Reset and lock panel at conclusion of all testing
7.4
Signature device routine maintenance tips

Detectors
When removing one detector at a time, wait 1 minute after replacing the first detector before removing the next detector. This gives the system time to recognize and re-map the first detector before generating a trouble condition caused by removing the second detector.
Modules
Signature modules should be visually inspected to insure the physical installation is secure. Functional testing of the modules function should be done on a regular basis, as required by the AHJ.
7.5
Signature detector cleaning procedure

Signature detectors may be cleaned using a conventional vacuum cleaner with the detector cleaning tool (P/N SIGA-ST) installed on the end of the suction hose (nominal 1.5 in. [3.8 cm] ID) extension tubes. The tool creates a high velocity vortex scrubbing action around the detector, removing loose dust and debris which is subsequently drawn into the vacuum.
Note: In order to avoid false alarms, disable the detector being
cleaned before using the detector cleaning tool. 1. Disable the detector to prevent false alarms. 2. Use the conventional vacuum cleaner brush attachment to remove any visible cobwebs etc. from the immediate area of the detector. 3. Connect the detector cleaning tool to the suction hose. 4. Place the detector cleaning tool over the detector head for approximately 10 seconds. 5. After the detector has been cleaned, Restore it to proper operation. 6. Check the detectors sensitivity to verify the effectiveness of the cleaning.
Place cleaning tool over detector.
Detector Cleaning Tool
Connect to vacuum cleaner hose.
[ACLEAN1.CDR]
Figure 7-1: Detector Cleaning Tool
7.6
System trouble and maintenance log

Date Time Event Initial
7.7
7.8
Chapter 8
Service and troubleshooting
Summary
This chapter provides a comprehensive set of procedures and tables to aid certified technical personnel in servicing and troubleshooting the system.
Content Overview 8.3 Maintenance philosophy 8.3 Problem classification 8.3 Handling static-sensitive circuit modules 8.3 Removing or replacing circuit modules 8.3 Recommended spares list 8.4 Hardware problems 8.5 Identification 8.5 Isolation 8.5 Substituting hardware 8.5 Adding hardware 8.6 Downloading problems 8.6 Modules 8.7 Rail signals 8.7 3-PPS/M Primary Power Supply module 8.7 3-BPS/M Booster Power Supply module 8.9 SIGA-APS Auxiliary Power Supply 8.10 CPU Central Processor module 8.11 3-FIBMB fiber optic interface 8.15 Signature Controller modules 8.15 Control / display modules 8.16 Audio amplifier modules 8.17 3-OPS Off-Premises Signal module 8.17 3-IDC8/4 Initiating Device Circuit module 8.18 3-LDSM Display Support module 8.18 3-MODCOM(P) Modem Communicator module 8.18 Common causes of problems 8.19 Audio components 8.21 3-ASU Audio Source Unit 8.21 3-FTCU Firefighter Telephone Control Unit 8.22 SIGA audio amplifiers 8.23 Pseudo point descriptions 8.25 Signature data circuit (SDC) operation 8.38 Basic Signature data circuit troubleshooting 8.40 Isolating circuit and device problems 8.40 Open circuit conditions 8.40 Short circuit conditions 8.41 Ground fault conditions 8.42 Substituting known good Signature series devices 8.43
8.1
Service and troubleshooting Signature controller modules 8.50 Substituting Signature controller modules 8.50 Mapping errors 8.50 Device troubleshooting 8.52 Signature diagnostic tools 8.54 Using Signature diagnostics 8.54 Signature diagnostic sequence 8.55 Displaying mapping errors 8.55 Displaying device chain errors 8.58 Using the chain lists 8.59 Displaying message counters 8.59 Displaying device trouble 8.61 Displaying trouble tables 8.64 DSDC status 8.67 Introduction 8.67 Setting up the System Definition Utility program 8.67 Using DSDC status 8.67 Displaying the current SDC status 8.67 Displaying a log of current SDC status events 8.69 Displaying the SDC in-process progress chart 8.70 Addressable analog diagnostic tools 8.72 System definition utility 8.72 Problem solving hints 8.74 3-AADC1 Addressable Analog Driver Controller 8.76 Substituting 3-AADC1 local rail modules 8.76 Addressable analog device troubleshooting 8.77 Wiring problems 8.79 Correcting addressable analog circuit wiring problems 8.80
8.2
Overview
Maintenance philosophy
The EST3 life safety system consists of modular assemblies utilizing surface mount technology (SMT) for easy installation and maintenance. SMT provides high reliability but prohibits component-level field repairs. For these and other reasons, the maintenance philosophy consists of fault isolating to the circuit card assembly, removing the defective circuit card, and then replacing it with a spare. Service and repair of EST3 system components centers around the following assumptions: 1. Qualified technicians possessing a complete understanding of the system hardware and functions will perform maintenance. 2. Only certified maintenance technicians will service the equipment. 3. Maintenance technicians will have a ready available supply of replacement parts.
Problem classification
Problems with the system can generally be classified into two categories: application programming problems and hardware (including firmware) problems. Many times hardware problems are identified by the system itself. Application programming problems are typically suspected when an incorrect response happens, or when a response fails to happen or happens at the wrong time.
Handling static-sensitive circuit modules

Many of the circuit modules use components that are sensitive to static electricity. To reduce the possibility of damaging these components, take the following precautions when handling: 1. Use only approved grounding straps that are equipped with a 1 M resistive path to earth ground. 2. Always keep circuit modules in their protective antistatic packaging. Remove only for inspection or installation. 3. Always hold circuit modules by the sides. Avoid touching component leads and connector pins.
Removing or replacing circuit modules

When removing or replacing circuit modules, always remember to:
8.3
1. First disconnect the battery then remove AC power. Removing or replacing circuit modules when power is applied will damage the equipment. 2. Avoid applying excessive force to the snap-rivet fasteners that lock the plug-in modules in place. If needed, use the extraction tool provided in the hardware kit.
Recommended spares list

As a general guideline, 10% of the quantity installed or a minimum of 1 each of the following installed equipment should be available as spare: Power supply Local rail modules Amplifiers (if no backup installed in system) Printer ribbon
As a general guideline, 10% of the quantity installed or a minimum of 3 each of the following installed equipment should be available as spare: Monitor modules Control modules Heat detectors Ionization smoke detectors Photoelectric smoke detectors Base, detector Duct detector filter kits Breakglass replacement for pull stations Breakglass replacement for warden stations Horn, bell, strobe, and speaker
System batteries should be replaced at recommended intervals. Stocking of spare batteries is not recommended because of shelf-life limitations.
8.4
Hardware problems
Identification
Hardware problems are typically identified by an intermittent or total failure of a device.
Isolation
Hardware problems may be categorized as problems within an equipment cabinet, and problems with field wiring and devices. The quickest way to locate a hardware problem is by selectively isolating portions of the system and observing the results of the isolation. By selectively isolating smaller and smaller portions of the system, hardware faults can usually be isolated. The suspect component may then be replaced with a known good component, and the results again observed.
Substituting hardware
Caution: Never install or remove a module while power is
applied to the cabinet. The local rail modules in the EST3 system are microprocessor based. The Signature driver controller module, CPU Central Processor module, Addressable Analog Device Controller module, and 3-ASU Audio Source Unit all have flash memory, which is used to store the operating firmware. The flash memory is empty when the module is shipped from the factory. When the configuration database is downloaded into the cabinet, each component using flash memory receives specific information. This information includes the modules location in the system and its configuration.
Note: Because the content of each module is specific to its cabinet location, do not substitute Signature driver controller, CPU, Addressable Analog Device Controller, or 3-ASU modules without downloading the new cabinet configuration database.
If you are substituting a Signature driver controller module, you must also download the specific Signature circuit information into the modules memory. If you are substituting a Addressable Analog driver controller module, you must also download its specific circuit configuration into its database. If you are substituting 3-ASU modules, you must also download the audio message database directly into the 3-ASU.
8.5
Service and troubleshooting Rail module substitution and replacement rules
Rule 1: Modules must be replaced with modules of the same model number. Rule 2: LED / Switch Displays must be replaced with LED / Switch Displays of the same model number. Rule 3: Substitute modules MUST have an IDENTICAL LED / Switch Display installed as the module it replaces. Rule 4: Substitute modules should be installed in the same rail location as the module it is replacing.
Adding hardware
When hardware is added to a cabinet, a portion of the network configuration database must also be changed. The extent of the changes depends on the rule relationships between the added component and the balance of the network. Revised copies of the database must then be downloaded using the SDU program.
Downloading problems
If you are experiencing frequent downloading problems, low signal level from the download computer may be the cause. The Buffered RS-232 Communication Cable, Catalog No. SDU-CBL, may be used to correct signal level problems.
Note: Do not use the buffered RS-232 communication cable with a CPU.
8.6
Modules
Rail signals
The figure below shows the signals normally present on a pair of chassis rails.
Note: The panel controller and the power supply monitor module must be installed in order to measure the voltages indicated.
Top Rail Pin Function 1-2 +6.25 VDC 3 +Sense 4 -Sense 5 -Audio Data 6 +Audio Data 7 -Rail Data 8 +Rail Data 9 - 10 Not Used 11 - 14 Common Bottom Rail Pin Function 1-4 +24 VDC 5 All Fail 6-9 Not Used 10 - 12 Ground Top Rail
1
J8 AIN
J9 J8
J9 BIN
J11 J10
13
14
J10 AOUT
J11 BOUT
Bottom Rail
1 2
J8 CIN
J9 J8
J9 DIN
J11 J10
[3RAILSIG.CDR]
11
12
J10 COUT
J11 DOUT
The DC voltages can be checked with a digital meter. Data signals on pins 7 and 8 of the top rail can be verified by looking at the Rx and Tx LEDs on any module installed on the rail.
3-PPS/M Primary Power Supply module

The transmit (TX) and receive (RX) LEDs on the Primary Power Supply Monitor Module should flicker, indicating normal two way communication activity with the CPU.
TX RX TX RX
[PSMONLED.CDR]
If the 3-PPS/M Primary Power Supply is used in conjunction with one or more other Booster Power Supplies, there is interaction between the supplies. Under most conditions, a defective power supply will be identified by the system, and
8.7
annunciated as a trouble. The system may continue to operate nearly normally, as the battery connected to the faulty supply will automatically be switched into the circuit, as the load demands.
Table 8-1: Nominal primary and booster power supply voltages Test Point Rail Power Auxiliary Power Battery Voltage 25 - 26.4 Vdc w/AC power on 25 - 26.4 Vdc w/AC power on 27.3 V (battery under charge @ 25 C)
Table 8-2: Primary Power Supply module troubleshooting Problem Supply will not operate from AC line Possible cause 1. 2. RX or TX LED OFF No communication between 3-PSMON and CPU 1. 2. 3. Auxiliary & Rail voltage low 1. 2. 3. Batteries will not charge 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. AC line fuse F2 (3.15A slow blow) open Rectified DC fuse F3 (3.15A slow blow) open Defective or poor connection on ribbon cable between 3-PSMON and 3-PPS 3-PSMON Defective 3-PPS Defective Excessive load causing supply to fold back Power Cable between 3-PSMON and 3-PPS loose or defective Booster Supply failure causing primary supply to fold back System in alarm mode Fuse F1 (8A) on 3-PPS open 30 to 60 Ah battery installed, 10 to 29 Ah battery specified in SDU Battery shorted Battery not wired to power supplies correctly (only wired to BPS/M)
8.8
Table 8-2: Primary Power Supply module troubleshooting Problem System will not operate on batteries Possible cause 1. Battery voltage below 18 Vdc. (system automatically turns off when batteries too low to properly operate system) 2. Fuse F1 (8A) on 3-PPS open 3. Batteries connected before AC power energized 4. Battery temperature too high 5. Defective batteries
3-BPS/M Booster Power Supply module

The transmit (TX) and receive (RX) LEDs on the Booster Power Supply Monitor Module should flicker, indicating normal two way communication activity with the CPU.
TX RX TX RX
[PSMONLED.CDR]
The booster power supply voltages are indicated in Table 8-1. Table 8-3 lists common problems with the booster power supply and booster monitor module.
Table 8-3: Booster Power Supply module troubleshooting Problem Supply will not operate from AC line Possible cause 1. AC line fuse F2 (3.15A slow blow) open 2. Rectified DC fuse F3 (3.15A slow blow) open RX or TX LED OFF No communication between 3-BPSMON and CPU 1. Defective or poor connection on ribbon cable between 3-BPSMON and 3-BPS 2. 3-BPSMON defective 3. 3-BPS defective
8.9
Table 8-3: Booster Power Supply module troubleshooting Problem Auxiliary & Rail voltage low Possible cause 1. Excessive load causing supply to fold back 2. Power Cable between 3-BPSMON and 3-BPS loose or defective 3. Booster Supply failure causing primary supply to fold back System will not operate on batteries 1. Battery voltage below 18 Vdc. (system automatically turns off when batteries too low to properly operate system) 2. Fuse F1 (8A) on 3-BPS open 3. Batteries connected before AC power energized 4. Battery temperature too high 5. Defective batteries
SIGA-APS Auxiliary Power Supply
AC Power LED
TB3 - NAC + PWR 1
F1 G F2
BATTERY
Rx & Tx LEDs
[3SIGAPS2.CDR]
Figure 8-1: SIGA-APS Auxiliary Power Supply
Table 8-4: Nominal auxiliary primary power supply voltages Test point Signal Power Voltage 24 Vdc nominal with AC power on
8.10
SIGA SIGA - IN + - OUT +
120 VAC H N
Signature Monitor Card
- NAC + PWR 2
Table 8-4: Nominal auxiliary primary power supply voltages Test point Battery Voltage 26.8 V (battery under trickle charge)
Table 8-5: SIGA-APS trouble conditions Address Low (1

ST
Status Zone) Open Open
Description AC Failure or battery Loss NAC short or internal fault or ground fault
High (2ND Zone)
Table 8-6: Auxiliary power supply troubleshooting Problem No Signature communication (Com LED does not flash) AC power OFF Signal power voltage low Batteries will not charge System will not operate on batteries System ground fault Possible cause 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 Defective or poor connection on Signature Data Circuit Does not appear as supervisory SIGA-CT2 in database No AC power to unit Excessive load causing supply to fold back (3.2 A max) Fuse F2 (7 Amps) open, Installed battery greater than 10 Ah capacity Batteries low (system automatically turns off when batteries too low to properly operate system) Fuse F2 open Internal or field wiring in contact with earth ground
CPU Central Processor module

The CPU controls all the communication and processing of information for modules located in its cabinet. Token ring network communication between CPU modules in other cabinets is also processed by the CPU. Network communication is RS-485 when the 3-RS485 card is installed in CPU connector J2, and fiber optic when the 3-FIBMB or 3-NSHM module is connected to J2 of the CPU.
Network and audio data circuits
Figure 8-2 and Table 8-7 show the location and normal state of the communication status LEDs on the CPU module.
8.11
N C
N O
N O
TROUBLE
C N A ALARM
N C
N O
C SUP
N C
TB1
Rx1 Tx1 Rx2 Tx2 Rx3 Tx3
J1
A +
NETWORK AUDIO OUT A IN A B IN B - + - +
AUDIO AUDIO B IN A OUT + - + -
AUDIO B OUT +
R X 1
T X 1
R T S 1
C O R M X 1 2
T X 2
R T S 2
C O M 2
[CPULEDS.CDR]
Figure 8-2: CPU module
Table 8-7: CPU LED indications LED RX1 TX1 RX2 TX2 RX3 TX3 Normal state Flicker Flicker Flicker Flicker Flicker Flicker Description Local Rail Receive Activity Local Rail Transmit Activity Network Data Ch A Receive Activity Network Data Ch A Transmit Activity Network Data Ch B Receive Activity Network Data Ch B Transmit Activity
EST3 network wiring alternates between channel A and channel B, as shown in Figure 8-3.
8.12

Class B Network Wiring One Line Diagram
A B
CPU or 3-ANNCPU
A B
CPU or 3-ANNCPU
A B
CPU or 3-ANNCPU
Class A Network Wiring One Line Diagram
A B
CPU or 3-ANNCPU
A B
CPU or 3-ANNCPU
A B
CPU or 3-ANNCPU
[3NETWIRE1.CDR]
Figure 8-3: Network wiring one line diagram
RX1 and TX1 should flicker continuously, indicating normal two-way CPU module to rail module communication activity. When multiple CPU modules are networked together using Class B wiring, RX2, TX2, RX3, and TX3 on all panels except the first and last should flicker continuously, indicating normal two-way network communication activity on both data channels. When multiple CPU modules are networked together using Class A wiring, RX2, TX2, RX3, and TX3 should flicker continuously, indicating normal two way network communication activity on data channels A, and B. The network and audio riser data circuits are isolated at each CPU module. This prevents a shorted data circuit from interrupting communication on the entire circuit. Figure 8-4 shows typical Class B network data circuit.
5
3NETTS1.CDR
Figure 8-4: Class B network data circuit
When trying to isolate trouble on a network or audio data circuit, remember that both shorted and open circuit segments will interrupt communication between two CPU modules. Figure 8-5 shows an open or short circuit fault between cabinets 3 and 4.
8.13

Circuit Fault open or short
5
3NETTS2.CDR
Figure 8-5: Network data circuit fault
Either an open or shorted circuit will interrupt communication between cabinets 3 and 4. The token ring network will reconfigure and operate as two independent sub-networks, one consisting of cabinets 1, 2, and 3; the second consisting of cabinets 4 and 5. Due to the isolation between cabinets, during a ground fault condition, the number of potential circuits to be investigated is limited to those originating from a single cabinet.
Table 8-8: CPU troubleshooting Problem RX1 or TX1 off RX2, TX2 or RX3, TX3 off, or both pairs off Possible cause 1. CPU not firmly seated in rail connectors 2. CPU failure 1. (+) and (-) wires reversed. 2. Circuit not properly terminated 3. Network A and Network B circuits crossed 4. Improper wire installed 5 RS-232 port (J5) inoperative Ground fault 6. 3-RS485 card loose 1. TX & RX wires reversed 2. CPU and peripheral device baud rate mismatched 3. PC improperly configured Ancillary RS-232 port (TB2-1 to 4 or TB2-5 to 8) inoperative 1. TX & RX wires reversed. 2. CPU and peripheral device baud rate mismatched 3. Peripheral device off-line or improperly configured RS-485 port (TB2 17 to 20) inoperative 1. (+) and (-) wires reversed. 2. 3-RS485 card not seated properly 3. Network A and Network B circuits crossed 4. Improper wire
8.14
Table 8-8: CPU troubleshooting Problem Power LED off, no characters on display, switches inoperative Possible cause 1. No power to panel. 2. Ribbon cable between 3-LCD(XL) and CPU loose or defective. 3. CPU defective 4 All Module LEDs and switches inoperative AND host module working correctly. 3-LCD(XL) defective 5. CPU not configured in SDU for 3-LCD(XL) 1. Ribbon cable between display and CPU module loose or defective 2. Display not configured in SDU 3. Display defective Switch activation does not perform the required function. 1 Display not defined in SDU database 2. Domain not configured correctly.
3-FIBMB fiber optic interface

Note: If network communication must be maintained when the node is powered down for service, connect a 24 Vdc to J2 on the fiber optic interface card.
The LEDs on the 3-FIBMB interface board adjacent to the fiber optic indicate circuit activity.
Test jumpers
Jumper JP1 is used to put the module in test mode. In the test mode, the OUT ports transmit a constant signal, which can be used to measure cable loss.
Table 8-9: 3-FIBMB troubleshooting Symptom No LED activity on any fiber optic port Possible causes 1. Ribbon cable between interface and electronics card loose, improperly installed, or broken. 2. Electronics card not properly seated in J2 of CPU. No LED activity on IN fiber optic port Steady on LED on IN fiber optic port 1. Incorrect cable connected to port. 1. Jumper JP1 left in test position.
Signature Controller modules

Please refer to Signature Component Troubleshooting Chapter for complete information on Signature related troubleshooting.
8.15
Control / display modules

The information in this section applies to the following models of control / display modules:
3-12/1RY 3-12SG 3-12/SIGY 3-24G 3-6/3S3L 3-2RY 3-12SR 3-12/S1RY 3-24R 3-6/3S1G2Y 3-12/2RY 3-12SY 3-12/AS2Y 3-24Y 3-6/S1GYR
The control / display modules operate independently of the host module on which they are installed. The displays do use the host modules electronics to communicate with the CPU. The Lamp Test function (pressing Panel Silence & Alarm Silence Switches simultaneously) will quickly isolate hardware problems from programming problems with any display.
Table 8-10: Control / display module troubleshooting Problem Module LEDs and switches inoperative AND host module inoperative Possible cause 1. No power to panel 2. Ribbon cable between display and host module loose or defective 3. Display defective 4. Host module defective All module LEDs and switches inoperative AND host module working correctly 1. Ribbon cable between display and host module loose or defective 2. Display not configured in SDU 3. Display defective LEDs respond incorrectly 1. Display not defined in SDU database 2. LED misidentified in SDU database 3. Rule governing LED operation not correctly written Switch activation does not perform the required function 1. Display not defined in SDU database 2. Switch misidentified in SDU database 3. Rule governing switch operation not correctly written
8.16
Audio amplifier modules

Table 8-11: 3-ZAxx Zoned Audio Amplifier module troubleshooting Problem Audio output level too low Possible cause 1. Jumpers set for 25 Vrms when connected to a 70 Vrms circuit 2. Gain adjusted too low 3. Input level to ASU too low No or extremely low audio output Audio level too high 1. Fuse blown 2. Gain set too low 1. Jumper set for 70 Vrms when connected to 25 Vrms circuit 2. Gain adjusted too high 3. Input level to ASU too high Amplifier current limiting Incorrect amplifier version reported to CPU module 1. Audio circuit overloaded 2. Input level to ASU too high 1. Jumpers installed incorrectly
3-OPS Off-Premises Signal module

Table 8-12: 3-OPS Off-Premises Signal module troubleshooting Problem Module in trouble Possible cause 1. Master box circuit open or not reset 2. Reverse polarity circuit open 3. 3.6 k EOL resistor not installed on unused circuits Remote receiver indicates circuit trouble and does not receive alarm 1. Circuit polarity reversed 2. Circuit open 3. Excessive circuit resistance 4. Incompatible receiver 5. Defective module Remote receiver does NOT indicate circuit trouble and does not receive alarm 1. 3-OPS Not activated by panel (SDU database) 2. Incompatible receiver 3. Defective module
8.17
3-IDC8/4 Initiating Device Circuit module

Table 8-13: 3-IDC8/4 Initiating Device Circuit module troubleshooting Problem Module in trouble Possible cause 1. 4.7 k EOL resistor not installed on unused IDC circuits 2. 15 k EOL resistor not installed on unused NAC circuits 3. No communication with CPU module 4. Module not defined in SDU database. 5. Field wiring connector not plugged into module NAC output not working 1. Jumpers installed incorrectly 2. External source configured but not connected 3. Circuit folding back due to overload. 4. Circuit Silenced 5. Circuit shorted 6. Polarized device defective or reversed on circuit IDC circuit not working 1. Incompatible 2-wire smoke detectors 2. Excessive wiring resistance or capacitance
3-LDSM Display Support module

Table 8-14: 3-LDSM Display Support module troubleshooting Problem All Module LEDs and switches inoperative AND host module working correctly Possible cause 1. Ribbon cable between display and 3-LDSM module loose or defective 2. Module not configured in SDU 3. Display not configured in SDU 4. Display defective
3-MODCOM(P) Modem Communicator module

Diagnostic aids
Two LEDs (DS1 and DS2) provide diagnostic information. The activity of DS1 and DS2 during dialing and data transmission are outlined in the following table.
8.18
Table 8-15: 3-MODCOM LED states and meanings LED state Off On Slow flash DS1 meaning No activity Line 1 has been seized Dialer or modem data is being passed on Line 1 DS2 meaning No activity Line 2 has been seized Dialer data is being passed on line 2. (Modem data is passed only on line 1.)
Slow flash (both) Fast flash
Slow flash on both LEDs indicates an ongoing download of application code or configuration code from CPU or SDU Reflects ringing on Line 1. (Flashing follows pattern detected.) N/A - line 2 does not have ring detection
A Radio Shack Mini Audio Amplifier (catalog number 277-1008) facilitates listening to the distinctive sounds associated with dialing, receiving handshakes, transmitting data, and receiving acknowledgements. Obtain this device locally and place a 0.1 F 200 V or greater capacitor in series with one of the leads. (You can install the capacitor permanently, within the case, if you prefer.) Alternately, you can use a linemans butt set in monitor mode. During downloading from a remote computer, you will hear the distinct sound of modems establishing a connection, then a series of rapid chirps as data is transmitted from the ACDB or KDC program.
Note: Remove the amplifier when you finish troubleshooting. Do not install the amplifier permanently.
Common causes of problems

Evaluation of visual and audible indications will usually serve to isolate the source of trouble. Before attempting to replace the 3-MODCOM module, the following causes of problems should be investigated: The 3-MODCOM module is not properly seated on the rail connectors, or one or more connector pins have been bent away from the associated sockets A modular telco plug is not connected to the appropriate line 1 or line 2 jack, or is not fully seated, or is not connected at the telco block The 3-MODCOM has been configured with incorrect CMS telephone numbers The telco line is faulty
8.19
If the module and telephone line are okay, check the CMS telephone number by dialing it using a standard telephone plugged directly into the RJ-31X jack. (The jack will accommodate a standard modular phone plug.) You should hear a dial tone when going off-hook, lose the dial tone after dialing the first digit, hear the receiver ringing, hear the CMS receiver go off-hook and send a handshake tone. Typical problems dialing the CMS involve missing or incorrect area codes, the need to dial 1 for long distance, and missing line access codes (example: dialing 9 for an outside line). If the receiver answers, check that it is sending out the correct handshake. For SIA P2 (3/1 pulse), SIA P3 (4/2 pulse), and SIA DCS the receiver should send a single tone of 0.5 to 1.0 seconds in duration. For Contact ID, the handshake signal consists of two short tones of different frequency. For TAP there should be a modem-type exchange of handshake messages. If the receiver sends the correct handshake and the 3-MODCOM transmits data but the receiver does not send an acknowledgement, check that the receiver is compatible with the desired protocol. (SIA DCS, P2, and P3 standards are available from the Security Industry Association). Typical problems involve an incompatible format or data message. If the handshake and acknowledge signals are audible, check that the correct account number was configured in the 3-MODCOM and that the code being sent was correctly programmed in the CMS computer. Where a 3-MODCOM module is suspected of being faulty, try substituting a known good one that has been properly programmed.
8.20
Audio components
Table 8-16: 3-ASU Audio Source Unit Troubleshooting Problem Unit does not respond. No network Rx or Tx LED activity Possible cause 1. Power or data connectors loose or connected wrong on Rail Chassis Interface Card 2. Ribbon cable between Rail Chassis Interface Card and 3-ASU (and 3-FTCU, if installed) loose or defective 3. Ribbon cable between 3-ASU main board and cover loose or defective No all call page audio output from network amplifiers and low level page output terminals 1. Defective microphone 2. Page inhibit timer set too long 3. Defective 3-ASU 4. Ribbon cable between 3-ASU main board and cover loose or defective 5. Defective amplifier No all call page audio output from network amplifiers, output available at low level page output terminals 1. Network audio data riser open, shorted, or incorrectly wired 2. Network data riser open, shorted, or incorrectly wired 3. TB2 on the CPU loose or incorrectly wired 4. 3-ASU not properly configured in SDU database 5. Amplifiers not properly installed or defective Page audio distorted 1. Speaking too loud into microphone. Speak such that the last green LED on the page level meter only flickers occasionally 2. Gain of individual amplifiers set too high Auxiliary Input volume level too low Auxiliary Input volume level too high Recorded messages not working properly 1. Adjust Aux input gain control on ASU 2. Auxiliary input wiring open or shorted 1. Adjust Aux input gain control on ASU 1. 3-ASUMX memory not firmly seated in connector 2. Audio database not correctly downloaded into 3-ASU 3. Incorrect message label referenced. Wrong messages going to wrong floors 1. Amplifier and message labels and rules incorrect or mislabeled
8.21
Table 8-16: 3-ASU Audio Source Unit Troubleshooting Problem Telephone Page inoperative Remote Microphone trouble Possible cause 1. Wiring between 3-ASU and 3-FTCU open, shorted, or incorrectly wired 1. Wrong or missing EOL resistor on microphone key input 2. No supervisory tone on DC current on remote microphone audio output
3-FTCU Firefighter Telephone Control Unit

Table 8-17: 3-FTCU (3-ASU/FT) Firefighter Telephone Control Unit Troubleshooting Problem Unit does not respond No Rx or Tx LED activity Possible cause 1. Power or data connectors loose or connected wrong on Rail Chassis Interface Card 2. Ribbon cable between Rail Chassis Interface Card and 3-FTCU loose or defective 3. Ribbon cable between 3-FTCU main board and cover loose or defective 4. Defective 3-FTCU Signature modules do not switch telephones correctly 1. Network data riser open, shorted, or wired incorrectly 2. TB2 on the CPU loose or wired incorrectly 3. Defective 3-FTCU 4. Signature module has incorrect label, personality code, or device type 5. Defective Signature module Low telephone volume level 1. More than five handsets active at one time 2. Phone riser open, shorted, or wired incorrectly 3. Connector TB1 on 3-FTCU loose 4. Defective telephone Call displayed by LCD doesnt match connected call 1. Signature module incorrectly labeled in rule 2. Signature module misidentified or installed in wrong location
8.22
SIGA audio amplifiers

The following material refers to these amplifier models: SIGA-AA30 Audio Amplifier SIGA-AA50 Audio Amplifier
DS3 DS2
TB4 NAC
DS5 DS4 TB1-OUT DS1 TB2-IN 70V 25V TB2-OUT TB6 TB5 BACKUP
TB1-IN
TB3 SIGA +IN- +OUT-
JP2 + 24V [3SIGAMP1.CDR]
Table 8-18: SIGA-AAxx LED indications LED DS1 DS2 DS3 DS4 (daughter board) DS5 (daughter board) Gain adjustment Color Yellow Yellow Green Green (flashing) Red (flashing) Description Power Amp Enabled Backup Mode Amplifier Active Normal
Active Condition
With the amplifier connected to the speaker load, use the gain adjust potentiometer (R116) to get a 25 Vrms or 70 Vrms signal (depending on JP2 setting) with a 1Vrms 1 kHz tone at the amplifier input. If a oscilloscope is used to adjust levels, use the following peak-to-peak voltage levels: 25 Vrms = 71VPP 70 Vrms = 200 VPP
Note: The amplifier must be connected to a load to properly adjust the gain. In the event the actual speaker circuit can not be used, a dummy load must be fabricated according to Table 8-19. The wattage rating of the dummy load must exceed the output power rating of the amplifier.
8.23
Table 8-19: Amplifier dummy load values Output power 30 Watts 50 Watts 25 Vrms output 20.8 @ 30W 12.5 @ 50W 70 Vrms output 167 @ 30W 100 @ 50W
To maintain DC supervision and keep the amplifier out of trouble while adjusting the gain, connect a 47 k EOL resistor across the NAC B output (TB4-2 & TB4-3), then connect the dummy load to the NAC A Output terminals (TB4-4 and TB4-5).
Caution: Do not operate the amplifier with both the speaker
circuit and the dummy load connected.
Table 8-20: SIGA-AAxx Audio Amplifier troubleshooting Problem No output Possible cause 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Backup 1 kHz Tone sounding Low Output 1. 2. 1. 2. 3. 24 VDC power or input signal missing Output circuits wired incorrectly Daughter board not firmly seated in connector Module defined incorrectly in database In backup mode with backup amplifier or wiring problem Branch circuit control modules inoperative or programmed incorrectly Input wiring incorrect or missing Low or no audio input 70 Vrms speakers with 25 Vrms jumper setting Too many SIGA-CC1/2s installed causing amplifier to shut down. Gain (R116) setting too low.
8.24
Pseudo point descriptions

Table 8-21: System pseudo points Address 0001 Label Startup Response Source CPU Functional description Changes to the active state when the panel is energized or an operator initiates a Restart from the 3LCD(XL) module. Changes to the active state when the first point on a panel or any panel in the same network routing group changes to the alarm state. Changes to the active state when the first point on a panel or any panel in the same network routing group changes to the supervisory state. Changes to the active state when the first point on a panel or any panel in the same network routing group changes to the trouble state. Changes to the active state when the first point on a panel or any panel in the same network routing group changes to the monitor state. Changes to the active state when an operator presses a switch that executes the Evacuation command. Pseudo point that changes to the active state when an operator presses a switch that executes the Drill command. Changes to the active state when an operator presses the All Call or All Call Minus switch on the 3-ASU. Changes to the active state when an operator presses a switch that executes the AlarmSilence command. Changes to the active state when a panels two-stage alarm timer expires. Changes to the active state when an operator presses a switch that executes the Reset command.
0002
First Alarm Response
CPU
0003
First Supervisory Response
CPU
0004
First Trouble Response
CPU
0005
First Monitor Response
CPU
0006
Evacuation Response
CPU
0007
Drill Response
CPU
0008
AllCall Response
CPU
0009
Alarm Silence Response
CPU
0010
Two Stage Timer Expiration
CPU
0011
Reset Active
CPU
8.25
Table 8-21: System pseudo points Address 0012 Label Reset Phase 1 Source CPU Functional description Changes to the active state when the first phase of the 3-phase reset cycle starts. Changes to the active state when the second phase of the 3-phase reset cycle starts. Changes to the active state when the third phase of the 3-phase reset cycle starts. Changes to the active state when the first point on a panel or any panel in the same network routing group changes to the disable state. Changes to the active state when a device asserts the rail alarm-not line and the CPU module has not registered an alarm event. Changes to the active state when an operator enables a Service Group from the 3-LCD(XL) module. Changes to the active state when a panels two-stage alarm timer starts. Changes to the active state when a loop controller stays in the reset mode longer than expected. Changes to the active state when an operator cancels a Service Group test while a circuit under test remained active. Changes to the active state when an operator forces a trouble into the system. Not implemented at this time. Changes to the active state when a different database in one or more network nodes Changes to the active state when the CPU module is interrupted unexpectedly.
0013
Reset Phase 2
CPU
0014
Reset Phase 3
CPU
0015
First Disable Response
CPU
0016
Fail Safe Event
CPU
0017
Service Group Active
CPU
0018 0019
Two Stage Timer Active Loop Controller Reset Extension
CPU CPU
0020
Service Device Supervision
CPU
0021
User Trouble
CPU
0022
Ext Database Incompatibility
CPU
0023
Reboot Fault
CPU
8.26
Table 8-21: System pseudo points Address 0101 0164 Label Comm Fail xx Source CPU Functional description Changes to the active state when the CPU is unable communicate with the networked CPU module in cabinet xx. Changes to the active state when task xx fails to execute properly. Changes to the active state when the card in slot xx can not perform the programmed advance feature (currently only degraded mode). Changes to the active state when the Signature controller module in rail slot xx reports an actual and expected data mismatch.
0200 0222 0261 0279
Task xx Watchdog Violation Configuration Mismatch Card xx.
CPU CPU
0281 0299
DB Out Of Sync with CPU Card xx
CPU
Table 8-22: Local alarm pseudo points Address 0676 Label Unprogrammed Device Source 3-AADC(1) Description Device not defined in SDU database is in alarm or trouble state Device not defined in SDU database is in alarm or trouble state Device not defined in SDU database is in alarm or trouble state
0676
Unprogrammed Device Data Card 1 Unprogrammed Device Data Card 2
3-DSDC 3-SSDC1 3-SDDC1 3-DSDC 3-SSDC1 3-SDDC1
0686
Table 8-23: Local trouble pseudo points Address 0001 0002 0003 Label Class A Fault Spur Class A Fault Video Bus Annunciator Supervision Source 3-SAC 3-SAC 3-SAC Description Fault or break in Class A loop on SAC bus Fault or break in Class A loop on video bus Control / display module faulty or missing or not properly configured Cabinet local rail communication failure
0004
Rail Module Communication Fault
3-SAC
8.27
Table 8-23: Local trouble pseudo points Address 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 0010 0071 Label Video Communication Fault RAM Fault or Stack Fault Code Supervision Internal Fault Configuration Fault Database Supervision Task Failure Source 3-SAC 3-SAC 3-SAC 3-SAC 3-SAC 3-SAC 3-SAC Description Fault or break in video signal lines Fault in internal 3-SAC processor Executable program corrupt 3-SAC hardware failure 1. Module in wrong slot 2. Incorrect display on module Database corrupt Changes to the active state when a task fails to execute properly
0600
Annunciator Supervision
General
Control / display module faulty or missing or not properly configured Fault or break in Class A network data riser connection Cabinet local rail communication failure Any cabinet component or field wiring Audio data circuit open or shorted CPU hardware failure RAM or Stack (memory) fails its interval check Database corrupt No message present, problem erasing flash, message space fails internal checks Executable program corrupt Port 1 serial communication circuit open or shorted N/A N/A Bootstrap for the 3-ASU is corrupt
0601 0601 0602 0603 0604 0604 0605 0605
Class A Failure Rail Module Communication Fault Ground Fault Detection Audio Supervision Internal Fault RAM Fault or Stack Fault Database Supervision DB Supervision Audio Default Tone Code Supervision Auxiliary Port One Data Card Fault Data Card Fault 1 Bootstrap Supervision
CPU General CPU CPU General 3-AADC1 General 3-ASU
0606 0607 0607 0607 0607
General CPU 3-AADC1 3-DSDC 3-ASU
8.28
Table 8-23: Local trouble pseudo points Address 0608 0608 0608 Label Auxiliary Port Two Data Card Fault 2 Waiting for SDU Download Source CPU 3-DSDC 3-ASU Description Port 2 serial communication circuit open or shorted N/A Database download from the SDU is in progress or was incomplete Panel out of service. In mode to accept download data 1. Module in wrong slot 2. Incorrect display on module Loss of signal on primary audio connection 1. Rail voltage >30 Vdc or <24 Vdc 2. Excessive rail current load 3. Faulty or misadjusted 3-PPS/3-BPS 0610 0611 0611 0611 0612 Telephone Line 1 Network Audio Circuit B Fault Rail Vltg Blw Batt Telephone Line 2 Heat Sink Too Hot 3-MODCOM CPU 3-PS/M 3-MODCOM 3-PPS/M 3-BPS/M 3-BBC/M 3-MODCOM CPU 3-PPS/M 3-BPS/M 3-BBC/M 3-MODCOM 3-PPS/M 3-BPS/M 3-BBC/M Line-cut fault detected on phone line 1 Loss of signal on secondary audio connection Excessive rail current load Line-cut fault detected on phone line 2 1. Enclosure vents clogged 2. Heat sink not fastened properly Line 1 test transmission to CMS failed CPU has detected a LRM card not in the SDU database Battery voltage below 19.5 Vdc when on battery backup Line 2 test transmission to CMS failed AC line voltage below 96 Vac for 3-PPS or 196 Vac for 3-PPS/230
0609 0609 0610 0610
Panel in Download Mode Configuration Fault Network Audio Circuit A Fault Rail Voltage Out of Spec
CPU General CPU 3-PPS/M 3-BPS/M 3-BBC/M
0612 0612 0613
Receiver Test - Line 1 Unexpected Card Lo Batt Cut Off
0613 0614
Receiver Test - Line 2 AC Brownout
8.29
Table 8-23: Local trouble pseudo points Address 0614 0615 Label RS-232 Channel Batt Trbl Source 3-MODCOM 3-PPS/M 3-BPS/M 3-BBC/M Description Communication failure with RS-232 card on module 1. Battery wiring open 2. Battery voltage below 24 Vdc 3. Battery internal resistance too high (load test failure) 0616 Aux Pwr Ovld Ckt 2 3-PPS/M 3-BPS/M 3-BBC/M 3-MODCOM 3-PPS/M 3-BPS/M 3-BBC/M 1. Excessive load 2. Circuit shorted The DSP chip on the module failed. 1. Cables between power supply and monitor module loose or missing 2. Defective power supply or monitor module 0618 Aux Pwr Ovld Ckt 1 3-PPS/M 3-BPS/M 3-BBC/M 3-PPS/M 3-BPS/M 3-BBC/M 1. Excessive load 2. Circuit shorted 1. Cables between power supply and monitor module loose or missing 2. Defective power supply or monitor module 0620 0620 Demux Audio Input Waiting for SDU Download 3-ZAxx 3-MODCOM Digitized audio data missing Database download from the SDU is in progress or was incomplete 1. Circuit shorted 2. Speaker wattage tap setting exceeds output rating of amplifier 3. 70 Vrms jumper setting used with 25 Vrms speakers.. 0622 Primary Audio Output DC 3-ZAxx 1. Open audio NAC circuit, missing or wrong value EOL resistor 2. Shorted audio NAC circuit
0617 0617
DSP Supervision Pwr Supply Fail
0619
Drvr Pwr Supply Fail
0621
Amp Overcurrent
3-ZAxx
8.30
Table 8-23: Local trouble pseudo points Address 0623 Label Primary Audio Output Analog Source 3-ZAxx Description 1. Open Audio NAC circuit, missing or wrong value EOL resistor 2. Shorted Audio NAC circuit 3. Output voltage jumper set wrong 0624 Backup Audio Output Analog 3-ZAxx 1. Open Audio NAC circuit, missing or wrong value EOL resistor 2. Shorted Audio NAC circuit 3. Output voltage jumper set wrong 0625 0626 0627 0629 0630 Amplifier Daughter Board Fuse Supervision PAL Supervision Request Backup Riser Supervision 3-ZAxx 3-ZAxx 3-ZAxx 3-ZAxx 3-FTCU Defective board Open fuse in amplifier Bad PAL chip. Replace amplifier. N/A 1. Open circuit, missing or wrong value EOL resistor 2. Shorted circuit 0631 User Interface 3-FTCU Ribbon cable between display and main PC board loose or missing. Master handset internal wiring fault Hook switch defective Jumpers incorrectly set Internal module failure N/A Defective microphone or connections Phone page switch has been activated for a period which exceeds the time limit set via SDU program Mismatch between 3-ASUMX specified via SDU program and that installed in the 3-ASU
0632 0633 0640 0641 0642 0652 0653
Master Phone Supervision Handset Off Hook Jumper Fault AtoD Converter Failure City Tie Open Input Supervision Trbls Phone Page Time Out
3-FTCU 3-FTCU 3-OPS 3-OPS 3-OPS 3-ASU 3-ASU
0654
Audio Hardware Mismatch
3-ASU
8.31
Table 8-23: Local trouble pseudo points Address 0655 0656 Label RAM Diagnostic Failure Audio Default Failure Source 3-ASU 3-ASU Description Memory failure in 3-ASU 1. 3-ASUMX memory card missing 2. Audio database does not exist 657 0658 0659 0670 0670 All Call Minus Audio Interface Failure Audio Class Supervision In Bootloader In Bootloader 3-ASU 3-ASU 3-ASU 3-AADC1 3-DSDC 3-SSDC1 3-SDDC1 3-AADC1 3-DSDC 3-SSDC1 3-SDDC1 3-DSDC 3-SSDC1 3-SDDC1 N/A 3-ASU hardware fault One riser open or shorted PC connected to card attempting download PC connected to card attempting download Wiring Fault Wiring Fault
0671 0671
Line Opened or Shorted Line Opened or Shorted Data Card 1 Map Fault Data Card 1
0672
1. Mismatch between actual data and expected data 2. Defective wiring 3. Defective device Wiring Fault Wiring Fault
0677 0677
Grnd Fault Grnd Fault Data Card 1
3-AADC1 3-DSDC 3-SSDC1 3-SDDC1 3-AADC1 3-AADC1 3-DSDC 3-SSDC1 3-SDDC1 3-LDSM 3-DSDC 3-SSDC1 3-SDDC1 3-DSDC 3-SSDC1 3-SDDC1
0678 0679 0679
Reconstct Line Smoke Power Current Limit Smoke Power Current Limit Card 1 Internal Failure Line Opened or Shorted Data Card 2 Map Fault Data Card 2
N/A N/A N/A
0680 0681
N/A Wiring Fault
0682
1. Mismatch between actual data and expected data 2. Defective wiring 3. Defective device
8.32
Table 8-23: Local trouble pseudo points Address 0687 Label Grnd Fault Data Card 2 Source 3-DSDC 3-SSDC1 3-SDDC1 3-DSDC 3-SSDC1 3-SDDC1 3-DSDC 3-SSDC1 3-SDDC1 Description Wiring Fault
0689
Smoke Power Current Limit Card 2 Configuration Mismatch Slot 1
Defective module
0690
N/A
Table 8-24: Local monitor pseudo points Address 0615 0622 0650 Label Incoming Ring Outgoing Call in Progress All Call Active 3-ASU Source 3-MODCOM Description An incoming call was received by the module. Dialer is active Changes to the active state when an operator presses the All Call switch Changes to the active state when an operator presses the push-to-talk switch on the paging microphone. N/A
0651
Mic Key Active
3-ASU
0673
Mapping In Progress Data Card 1 Mapping Disbld Data Card 1
3-DSDC 3-SSDC1 3-SDDC1 3-DSDC 3-SSDC1 3-SDDC1 3-AADC1 3-DSDC 3-SSDC1 3-SDDC1 3-DSDC 3-SSDC1 3-SDDC1 3-DSDC 3-SSDC1 3-SDDC1
0674
Mapping manually disabled
0675 0675
Device Maint Alert Device Maint Alert Data Card 1
N/A Dirty detector on loop 1
0678
Reconstct Line Data Card 1
N/A
0683
Mapping In Progress Data Card 2
N/A
8.33
Table 8-24: Local monitor pseudo points Address 0684 Label Mapping Disbld Data Card 2 Source 3-DSDC 3-SSDC1 3-SDDC1 3-DSDC 3-SSDC1 3-SDDC1 3-DSDC 3-SSDC1 3-SDDC1 Description Mapping manually disabled
0685
Device Maint Alert Data Card 2
Dirty detector on loop 2
0688
Reconstct Line Data Card 2
N/A
Table 8-25: Nonsupervised output pseudo points Address 0621 Label Manual Answer Control Source 3-MODCOM Description Answers incoming call
Table 8-26: CRC pseudo points Address SS01 SS02 SS03 SS04 SS05 SS06 SS07 SS08 SS09 SS10 SS11 Label AC Brownout Low Battery Tamper Strike Fault Reader Fault RAM Fault or Stack Fault Code Supervision Database Supervision Communications Fault Loop 1 Loop 2 Event type Access trouble Access trouble Security alarm Access trouble Access trouble Access trouble Access trouble Access trouble Access trouble Security alarm (configurable) Security alarm (configurable) Description Sustained low voltage from CRC supply to device CRC battery below specified voltage CRC tamper switch was activated Strike device failed Card reader failed CRC processor failed CRC executable program corrupt CRC database corrupt CRC lost communication with 3-SAC Input device on loop 1 activated Input device on loop 2 activated
8.34
Table 8-26: CRC pseudo points Address SS12 Label Task Failure Event type Local trouble Description Changes to the active state when a task fails to execute properly
SS32 SS33 SS34 SS35 SS36 SS37
Timed Unlock Unlock Relay Timed Relay Open Inside Reader Shutoff Outside Reader Shutoff
Access output Access output Access output Access output Access output Access output
Activate the strike device for a specified interval Activate the strike device Activate the CRC relay for a specified interval Activate the CRC relay Disable the inside card reader device (for load shedding) Disable the outside card reader device (for load shedding) CRC sounder base trouble
SS38
Sounder
Access trouble
Note: SS represents the CRC device number, as configured in the SDU.
Table 8-27: KPDISP pseudo points Address SS06 SS07 SS08 SS09 SS12 Label RAM Fault or Stack Fault Code Supervision Configuration Database Fault Communications Fault Task Failure Event type Local trouble Local trouble Local trouble Local trouble Local trouble Description KPDISP processor failed KPDISP executable program corrupt KPDISP database corrupt KPDISP lost communication with 3-SAC Changes to the active state when a task fails to execute properly
SS14 SS15
User Record Supervision Controller Communication Fault
Local trouble Local trouble
N/A KPDISP lost communication with 3-SAC (displayed on KPDISP only)
8.35
Table 8-27: KPDISP pseudo points Address SS16 Label Panel Communication Fault Event type Local trouble Description KPDISP lost communication with panel (displayed on KPDISP only) Activates for configured time to allow the partition to be disarmed before going into alarm Activates for configured time to allow the person arming a partition to exit before signaling any alarm events
SS32
Entry Buzzer
Nonsupervised output
SS33
Exit Buzzer
Nonsupervised output
Note: SS represents the KPDISP device number, as configured in the SDU.
8.36
Table 8-28: Local relay pseudo points Address 0002 Label Amplifier Backup Source 3-ZAxx Description Changes to the active state when the amplifiers input relay selects the back up amplifier input as its signal source. Changes to the active state when the amplifiers input relay selects channel 1. Changes to the active state when the amplifiers input relay selects channel 2. Changes to the active state when the amplifiers input relay selects channel 3. Changes to the active state when the amplifiers input relay selects channel 4. Changes to the active state when the amplifiers input relay selects channel 5. Changes to the active state when the amplifiers input relay selects channel 6. Changes to the active state when the amplifiers input relay selects channel 7. Changes to the active state when the amplifiers input relay selects channel 8. Changes to the active state when the amplifiers input relay selects the Page channel.
0003
Channel_1_Relay_Confirmation
3-ZAxx
0004
3-ZAxx
0005
3-ZAxx
0006
3-ZAxx
0007
3-ZAxx
0008
3-ZAxx
0009
3-ZAxx
0010
3-ZAxx
0011
Page Select
3-ZAxx
8.37
Signature data circuit (SDC) operation

The advanced features of the Signature controller module perform a number of advanced operations. These operations are not always apparent from the panel controller. Table 8-29 lists a number of SDC conditions and describes the circuits operation.
Table 8-29: SDC operation Condition Remove a detector, then re-install the same detector in the same base. Remove a module or pull station, then re-install the same device in the same location. Remove a detector, then re-install a different detector of the same type in the same base. Operation 1. The system displays a trouble with the detectors label or address when the detector is removed. 2. The system restores completely when the detector is re-installed in its original base. 1. The system displays a trouble with the modules label or address when the device is disconnected. 2. The panel restores completely when the device is re-installed in its original location. 1. The system displays a trouble with the detectors label or address when the detector is removed 2. When the new detector is installed, the Signature controller module re-maps the circuit, replacing the S/N of the old detector with the S/N of the new detector. All the old detectors sensitivity & verification settings are transferred to the new detector. The system will return to normal when mapping is finished. 1. The system displays a trouble with the devices label or address when the device is disconnected. 2. When the new device is installed, the Signature controller module re-maps the circuit, replacing the S/N of the old device with the S/N of the new device. If the devices are modules (not pull stations), the old modules personality codes are transferred to the new module. The panel will return to normal when mapping is finished. 1. The system displays a trouble with the detectors label or address when the detector is removed. 2. When the new detector is installed, the Signature controller module re-maps the circuit, replacing the S/N of the old detector with the S/N of the new detector. All the old detectors sensitivity & verification settings (when applicable) are transferred to the new detector. The new detector will be operational, however the panel will be in trouble, indicating a device type mismatch. The System Definition Utility program must be used to re-assign the device type to get the system out of trouble.
Remove a module or pull station, then re-install a different device of the same type in the same location. (SIGA-UM replacement modules must have jumper JP1 set in the same position as the original module.) Remove a detector, then re-install a different type detector in the same base.
8.38
Table 8-29: SDC operation Condition Remove a module or pull station, then re-install a different type module or pull station in the same location. Operation 1. The system displays a trouble at the devices label or address when the device is removed. 2. When the new device is installed, the Signature controller module re-maps the circuit, replacing the S/N of the old device with the S/N of the new device. The new module is NOT operational. The panel will be in trouble, indicating a device type mismatch. System Definition Utility program must be used to re-assign the device type to get the panel out of trouble. 3. If a single address module is replaced with a dual address module or vice versa, a map fault will be generated by the address count mismatch.
8.39
Basic Signature data circuit troubleshooting

Isolating circuit and device problems
The process of isolating a problem on a Signature data circuit is similar to that used on a conventional fire alarm Initiating Device Circuit (IDC). An accurate and complete wiring diagram of the data circuit installation is the best troubleshooting aid available. When used in conjunction with the information provided by the control panel, you should be able to easily isolate open conditions or defective devices. The data circuit shown in Figure 8-6 will be used to illustrate basic troubleshooting techniques. When troubleshooting Class A circuits, disconnect the circuit from the return (SIGA/A) terminals, and temporarily jumper both SIGA/A terminals to the respective SIGA/B terminals. Then troubleshoot the circuit as a Class B circuit.
Figure 8-6: Normal circuit topology
Open circuit conditions

On a circuit with an open fault, the Signature modules will be communicating with devices up to the break. The 3-LCD(XL) Display module will indicate a trouble condition on all devices beyond the break. This is illustrated in Figure 8-7 where devices 1 through 7 continue to operate while devices 8 through 15 report device troubles.
Figure 8-7: Break in circuit between devices 6 and 8
Referring again to Figure 8-7, a wire break or intermittent connection between devices 6 and 8 is the most probable cause of the failure. Other possible but unlikely causes with the same
8.40
symptoms include device failure of only devices 9 -15; and devices 9-15 not loaded in the Signature modules database or not properly configured using the Signature portion of the data entry program.
Short circuit conditions

Short circuit conditions require selective isolation of portions of the data circuit to systematically narrow down the faults location. A shorted circuit will typically show a trouble condition on all devices, as illustrated in Figure 8-8.
Figure 8-8: Wiring Short On device 13
To isolate the short, open the circuit at a location that will disconnect approximately 50% of the installed devices, as shown in Figure 8-9.
Figure 8-9: Isolating circuit short
If some of the devices restore in Figure 8-9, the short is located on the portion of the circuit that has been disconnected. If no devices restore when the circuit is opened, the short has been isolated to the first 50% of the circuit. Re-connect the previously isolated portion of the circuit, and open the circuit at a new location. If during the first open circuit test some devices restored, open the circuit at a location electrically farther from the Signature controller module and repeat the test. If during the first open circuit test no devices restored, open the circuit at a location electrically closer to the module, and repeat the test. Continue to increase or decrease the number of devices on the opened circuit leg until you eventually
8.41
isolate the single device or wire segment that is causing the problem.
Ground fault conditions

Ground fault conditions require selective isolation of portions of the data circuit to systematically narrow down the faults location. A circuit with a ground fault (approximately 10 k or less to ground) will cause the 3-LCD(XL) display to light the Ground Fault LED. Ground fault conditions can occur on the data circuit, the 24 VDC smoke power circuit or the input circuits to Signature series modules. The general location of a ground fault can be determined using the 3-LCD(XL) status command and Table 8-30 below.
Table 8-30: Ground fault indications 3-LCD(XL) Ground Fault LED ON No Device Trouble Ground Fault LED ON Device PPCCDDDD Trouble Ground Fault Location 1. Signature data circuit 2. 24 VDC Smoke Power circuit 1. Positive leg of input circuit of device PPCCDDDD
Figure 8-10: Signature data circuit ground faults
To isolate the ground fault, open the suspect circuit (both conductors) at a location that will disconnect approximately 50% of the installed devices. Figure 8-11 illustrates the technique on a data circuit. A similar technique is used on smoke power or module input circuits to isolate ground faults.
8.42
Figure 8-11: Ground fault isolation
If the 3-LCD(XL) Ground Fault LED goes out, the ground fault is located on the portion of the circuit that has been disconnected. If the 3-LCD(XL) Ground Fault LED remains on and no devices restore, the short has been isolated to the first 50% of the circuit. Re-connect the previously isolated portion of the circuit, and open the circuit at a new location. If during the first open circuit test the Ground Fault LED went off, open the circuit at a location electrically farther from the Signature controller module, and repeat the test. If during the first open circuit test the Ground Fault LED remained on, open the circuit at a location electrically closer to the 3-SSDC, and repeat the test. Continue to increase or decrease the number of devices on the opened circuit leg and you will eventually isolate a single device or wire segment that is causing the problem.
Note: The ground fault detection circuitry requires approximately 30 to 40 seconds to respond when the fault is removed.
The panel performs a ground fault test for 2 seconds at 40-second intervals. If the system is working properly, the voltage between earth ground and logic negative should be between 12.3 Vdc and 16.8 Vdc during the 2-second test. The system reports a ground fault when the voltages are less than 12.3 and more than 16.8. In a non-faulted system, the voltage outside the 2-second test period may float randomly, but if the system is faulted the voltage is likely to be a fixed value such as 3 or 19.
Substituting known good Signature series devices

When substituting a known good detector or module in place of a suspect device, one of two scenarios can take place. If the substituted device is the same model as the suspect device, the system accepts it with no further operator action. When the substituted device is installed, the system goes into trouble. When the quantity of devices defined on the circuit is reached, the system automatically remaps the circuit, stores the revised
8.43
information, and returns to normal. This process may take a few minutes. If the substituted device is a different model than the suspect device, when the device count is correct, the Signature controller module automatically remaps the circuit. A trouble occurs at the address of the suspect device as the result of a map fault, because the known good devices parameters differ from those of the suspect device that was removed from the circuit. You must accept the parameters of the known good device to remove the map fault. These can be changed later.
Note: You cannot use device substitution as a troubleshooting technique for Signature security devices. By design, the Signature controller does not automatically remap a replaced security device. This is intended to prevent swapping a security device with one that has been compromised for criminal purposes. Detectors
When one or more devices are removed from a Signature Data Circuit for servicing, as shown in Figure 8-12, the panel will display a trouble condition for each device. If the System Definition Utility program (SDU) were connected to the panel, the DSDC Status screen would also indicate a trouble condition and the need to re-map.
Note: If the detector is removed from an isolator base, the
isolator will transfer.

001 Removed for service 101 IPHS S/N 33-1 102 IPHS S/N 34-1 102 PHS S/N 34-1 CT1 203 S/N 48-1 P-code 02 CT2 204 S/N 49-1 P-codes 01/01 DSDC Status Screen COMMON TROUBLE MAP PENDING
[3MAP1.CDR]
Control Panel Display IPHS S/N 33-1 TROUBLE ppmm101 ppmm102
Figure 8-12: Detectors removed for service
If these devices are returned to their original locations, as shown in Figure 8-13, the map supervision function recognizes the detectors have been returned as originally installed (and mapped), and takes no additional action.
8.44
001 Control Panel Display The same detectors returned to service in their original locations. IPHS 101 S/N 33-1
102
PHS S/N 34-1 CT1 S/N 48-1 P-code 02 CT2 S/N 49-1 P-codes 01/01 DSDC Status Screen
203
204
[3MAP2.CDR]
Figure 8-13: Detectors returned to service in original locations
If the devices are returned to the Signature Data Circuit but are not returned to their original locations, the map supervision function recognizes that previously mapped serial numbers occupy new map locations. Once the mapping supervision function has recognized the need to re-map the circuit, the panel is put in the map pending state. Once in the map pending state, the panel will automatically re-map the circuit when the quantity of devices re-installed on the circuit is equal to or greater than the quantity of devices defined in the original map. If the panel was connected to a computer running the SDU Program, the DSDC status function would indicate map pending. In Figure 8-14, The PHS (S/N 34-1) originally installed at address 102 has been installed in the location originally occupied by the IPHS (S/N 33-1).
001 Control Panel Display PHS installed in new location. IPHS not yet installed. 101 IPHS S/N 33-1 DSDC Status Screen CT1 203 S/N 48-1 P-code 02 CT2 204 S/N 49-1 P-codes 01/01 COMMON TROUBLE MAP PENDING
[3MAP3.CDR]
102 PHS S/N 34-1
TROUBLE ppmm101
Figure 8-14: Partially restored circuit
Until all devices are re-installed on the circuit and the circuit is automatically re-mapped, the original S/N to panel address
8.45
correlation is still valid. Examination of Figure 8-14 shows that the device address moves with the detector until the circuit is re-mapped. In this example, relocating the PHS detector temporarily relocated address 102. Until all devices are installed and the circuit re-mapped, testing a relocated detector will cause the panel to respond as though the detector was still installed in its original location. During mapping, all devices remain operational and are capable of initiating an alarm. Figure 8-15 shows that both the IPHS and the PHS retain their old S/N to address correlations while the circuit is mapping. Mapping activity is indicated on the front panel display and the DSDC Status screen, if the data entry computer is connected. Once mapped, the mapping supervision function will automatically correlate a panel address to a specific map location until manually changed using the data entry program.
001 Control Panel Display The same detectors returned to service in new locations before re-mapping. 102 PHS S/N 34-1 IPHS S/N 33-1 CT1 S/N 48-1 P-code 02 CT2 S/N 49-1 P-codes 01/01 DSDC Status Screen MAPPING mpg0
101
203
204
[3MAP4.CDR]
Figure 8-15: Detectors returned to new locations during re-mapping
Figure 8-16 shows the resultant map after re-mapping. Note that the new S/N to panel address correlations have been made, the IPHS is now correlated with address 102 and the PHS is correlated with address 101. The relocated devices will now respond as programmed for the original address location.
8.46
001 Control Panel Display The same detectors returned to service in new locations after re-mapping. 101 PHS S/N 34-1 IPHS S/N 33-1 CT1 S/N 48-1 P-code 02 CT2 S/N 49-1 P-codes 01/01 DSDC Status Screen
102
203
204
[3MAP5.CDR]
Figure 8-16: Final map
When a factory-new detector replaces an in-service detector, until mapped, the new detector is operational with a default address of 00. When the circuit is re-mapped, the new detector will be given the address assigned to its map location. If a factory-new detector is added over and above the expected number of devices on the circuit, it will be operational with a default address of 00, however the panel will be in trouble as the actual map contains one more device than the expected map.
Modules
When a module is replaced with another module of the same type, upon automatic re-mapping, the replacement module will be assigned the personality code of the module originally installed at that map location. If a module is replaced with a module of a different type one of three things can happen. If a single address module, i.e. CT1, or CC1, is replaced with a different type of single input module, the circuit will re-map all devices; however the new device type will not operate, due to incompatible personality codes. A map fault will be generated because the actual device differs from the expected device. The data entry program must be used to accept the new device type and clear the map fault.
Notes
Factory programmed devices, i.e. pull stations and MM1 modules can not be replaced with a CT1. For mapping purposes, all manual pull stations are given the PULL device type regardless of their model number.
If a dual address module replaces a single address module, the panel will attempt to re-map all devices, however the circuit will not be successfully re-mapped. A map fault will be generated because the actual device differs from the expected device, and
8.47
the dual address module will not operate. The data entry program must be used to accept the new device type and clear the map fault. If a dual address module is replaced with a single address module, the panel will never attempt to re-map all devices because the panel does not see enough devices (one address less) to automatically re-map the circuit. The panel remains in the map pending mode and will not re-map. If the panel could be forced to re-map all devices, the circuit would still not be successfully re-mapped, because the actual device count differs from the expected device count. The panel will be in trouble with a map fault. The SDU program must be used to accept the new device type and clear the map fault.
Device type replacement
If a different Signature device model is substituted for the suspect device, when the device count is correct, the Signature controller module will automatically re-map the circuit. A trouble will occur at the address of the suspect device as the result of a map fault, because the known good devices parameters differ from those of the suspect device that was removed from the circuit. You must accept the parameters, which may be changed later, of the known good device to remove the map fault.
Note: Signature series devices require a solid connection at their terminals. If a wire can be wiggled, it will be subject to contact resistance variations due to temperature changes, resulting in an intermittent connection, which will affect communication between the Signature devices and the control module. Use the proper size screwdriver and tighten all connections securely.
8.48
Tighten terminal screws securely.
(ABASESCR.CDR)
8.49
Signature controller modules

Substituting Signature controller modules
When substituting a known good Signature controller module in place of a suspect rail module, you must download the system configuration and Signature data circuit information into the CPU module. This operation requires a PC and the SDU Program. The Signature controller module actually has two separate memories. The first memory contains the firmware that makes the module operate. If there is a problem with the firmware, or if an upgrade has been issued, the new firmware is downloaded into the module. When upgrading the module firmware (code), you do not need to download the Bootstrap data unless specifically instructed to do so. The SDC configuration information is stored in the modules second memory. If you suspect that the module itself is bad, you must download the configuration information for the circuit that will be connected to the substitute module.
Note: The database must be converted before it can be
downloaded into the Signature controller.

Table 8-31: Signature controller module troubleshooting Problem Signature Data Circuit Open Possible cause 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Circuit incorrectly wired or connector loose Defective detector or isolator base Broken conductor Device not installed on circuit Device not entered into SDU databases
Signature Data Circuit Shorted
1. Circuit incorrectly wired (often crossed wires on a device base) 2. Defective detector, detector base, or module 3. Nicked insulation between conductors 1. Pinched wire between device and electrical box 2. Nicked wire insulation
Signature Data Circuit Ground Fault
Mapping errors
Table 8-32 provides basic information on mapping errors. For detailed information on identifying and locating mapping errors, refer to the SSDC Diagnostic and Status sections found later in this chapter.
8.50
Table 8-32: Mapping errors Fault Mapping Error Possible causes 1. A discrepancy between the internal map and the devices installed on the Data Circuit (serial #, personality code, or device type) Device ID entered incorrectly into SDU database More than 124 T-taps on a data circuit Excessive circuit resistance Excessive circuit capacitance An intermittent connection causing one or more devices to loose then re-establish communication with the Signature controller module A defective device or detector base There is a discrepancy between the device type recorded on the internal map and the device installed on the Data Circuit
2. 3. 4. 5. System continues to re-map data circuit 1.
2. Device Type Error 1.
8.51
Device troubleshooting
Each Signature series device has a red and green LED. Their functions are indicated in Table 8-33. These LEDs are useful when trying to determine the communication and alarm or active status of Signature devices.
Table 8-33: Signature device LEDs LED Green flashing Red flashing Red & Green steady Device status Normal communication Alarm or Active (either input of dual input modules) Stand-alone Alarm or Active (either input of dual input modules)
Table 8-34 lists common troubles and possible causes for Signature Series modules. For detailed information on identifying and locating Signature device problems, refer to the Signature Diagnostic Tools Section found later in this chapter.
Table 8-34: Signature module troubleshooting matrix (x = applicable for module) Note: Table also applies to equivalent Mseries components and products that emulate these module types Module not responding correctly
CC1 x x x CC2 x x x CR x x CRR x x CT1 x x x CT2 x x x x MM1 x x UM x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x WTM x x Possible Causes Module installed in wrong location or improperly addressed Module not entered into Signature database Incorrect personality code loaded into module Personality code for unused portion of module not set at 0 (P-codes 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 13, 14, 16, & 18) Jumper JP1 set incorrectly (P-code 8) 24 VDC for smoke power low or missing (P-codes 3, 14, 18, 20, & 21) Inputs 1 & 2 swapped (P-codes 1, 2, 3, & 4) Signal sources 1 & 2 swapped (P-code 7) Ground Fault on data circuit or (-) side of input / output circuit
Module in trouble on Signature controller module

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Module missing or incorrectly wired on Signature data circuit. Mapping error. Module not loaded into Signature database Ground Fault on input or output circuit
8.52
Table 8-34: Signature module troubleshooting matrix (x = applicable for module) Note: Table also applies to equivalent Mseries components and products that emulate these module types
x x x Output circuit open, shorted, incorrectly wired, polarized device installed in reverse, incorrect or missing EOL resistor x Missing or incorrect EOL resistor (P-codes 1, 2, 3, 4, 13, 14, 16, 18, 20, 21) 24 VDC for smoke power low or missing (P-codes 13, 14, 18, 20, & 21)
x x
Module incorrectly in alarm or active on Signature controller module

x x x x x x x x x x Initiating device circuit shorted or initiating device incorrectly installed Incorrect EOL resistor value (too low)
Table 8-35: Signature detector troubleshooting Symptom Detector not responding correctly Possible causes 1. Detector installed in wrong location or improperly addressed. 2. Detector not entered in system database. 3. Incorrect device response in database. Detector in trouble on CPU 1. Detector missing or incorrectly wired on Signature data circuit. 2. Mapping error. Detector not loaded into control module database. 3. Ground Fault on Signature Data circuit 4. Internal detector fault. Refer to Advanced Techniques Section. Detector incorrectly in alarm on control panel. 1. Detector extremely dirty. 2. Ionization detector installed in area of extremely high airflow. 3. Detector installed in area of high ambient smoke. 4. Defective detector.
8.53
Signature diagnostic tools

The SDU Signature diagnostic tools are designed to assist the installing technician in isolating and correcting faults with the Signature Data Circuit (SDC), detectors and modules. The troubleshooting techniques described in the basic Signature troubleshooting section should be tried before using these tools.
Using Signature diagnostics

To access the Signature diagnostic tools, Click on Tools on the main menu bar, then click on Signature Series diagnostics.
Signature device circuit selection The Signature diagnostic tools affect only to the SDC circuit that is specified in the drop down list boxes at the top of the DSDC Diagnostics window, as shown in Figure 8-17.
Click Here to Close LPC Diagnostics Click Here to Select SDC Circuit Click Here to Select Loop Controller Card Click Here to Select Cabinet Options Tab Click Check Boxes to Select Download Tables
Click Here to Display Devices by Short Address Click Here to Display Devices by Serial Number Click Here to Set Comm Port Click Here to used 3-DSDC Module Signature Tables Stored in the SDU Click Here to Download 3-DSDC Module Signature Tables into SDU Click Here to Set Baud Rate
Figure 8-17: Options Screen
Select the cabinet that houses the Signature controller module with the trouble condition, using the Cabinet drop-down list.
8.54
[TSCRN0.CDR]
Select the label of the Signature controller module with the trouble condition. Select the loop (Signature Data circuit) on the module having the trouble condition, using the loop (SDC) drop down list.
COM port and baud rate
To use the Signature diagnostic tools, the information from the faulty Signature data circuit or device must first be read (uploaded) into the System Definition Utility (SDU) program. Use the COM Port and Baud Rate drop down lists to set the COM port parameters on the SDU computer that is to be used during uploading. The suggested baud rate is 19200.
Upload
To upload the Signature data from the Signature controller module into the SDU program, click on the Download DSDC Tables button. When the Signature data has been downloaded from the Signature controller module, it is stored as part of the project. The Signature data can be recalled without being connected to the module by using the Load Tables from Disk button.
Serial number or short address
The devices listed in the diagnostic tables can be displayed by serial number or short address. You can mix short address and serial number displays using the Requested Diagnostic Table check boxes and the Device Lists radio buttons in combination.
Signature diagnostic sequence

Table 8-36 lists the suggested sequence when using the Signature Diagnostic tools to isolate problems on a Signature Data Circuit and problems with individual Signature devices.
Table 8-36: Signature troubleshooting tool sequence SDC circuit faults 1. Mapping Errors 2. Device Chains 3. Message Counters Signature device faults 1. Device Tables 2. Trouble Tables
Displaying mapping errors

Mapping errors are those problems which prevent the system from generating a successful Signature Data Circuit map. To display errors generated during the mapping process, click on the Mapping Errors tab. The Mapping Errors text box lists the eight (8) most recent mapping errors. The Total Errors field lists the
8.55
total number of mapping errors which have been identified. Clicking on an error in the list highlights the error, and displays the appropriate troubleshooting tip in the lower Troubleshooting Tips text box.
Click Here to Close LPC Diagnostics Click Here to Select SDC Circuit Click Here to Select Loop Controller Card Click Here to Select Cabinet
Mapping Errors Tab
Mapping Error Window
Troubleshooting Tips Window Total Errors Field
[TSCRN1.CDR]
Figure 8-18: Mapping errors dialog box
Table 8-37: Mapping error messages Message

The mapping command failed because the sensor did not draw current or it was not possible to obtain stable mapping data from the SDC.
Suggested corrective action

Indicative of faulty wiring on the circuit, or a faulty device. 1. 2. 3. 4. Verify correct wiring. Verify operational devices. Review the Chain Response List. Review the Device Response List.
While mapping a chain from a device back to the Signature controller module, the chain was built with holes in it.
Indicative of devices not operating consistently. 1. View the Chain and Device Response Lists to see a list of the devices that are present in the chain being processed. 2. Compare the serial numbers in the above lists with the actual wiring to identify a conflict. 1. Upload the current map. 2. Compare current map with expected map. 3. Write the map back to the Signature controller module. 1. Upload the current map. 2. Compare current map with expected map. 3. Write the map back to the Signature controller module
The map tables are inconsistent.
The actual SDC map does not match the stored expected map.
8.56
Table 8-37: Mapping error messages Message

Setting the Address in the device failed.
Suggested corrective action

1. Review the Serial Number or Short Address, if missing replace the device. 2. Persistent problem is indicative of a wiring fault. 1. Please wait for automatic map reconstruction to complete before continuing. 1. Please wait for automatic map reconstruction to complete before continuing. 1. Please wait for automatic map reconstruction to complete before continuing. 1. Please wait for the automatic map reconstruction to complete before continuing. 1. Please wait for the automatic map reconstruction to complete before continuing. 1. Replace the device. 2. Correct the Signature controller module programming. 1. An open or short on a Class A circuit. 2. A short across the entire Class B circuit. 3. A Reset may be needed to restart mapping. 1. Please wait for the automatic map reconstruction to complete before continuing. 1. View the Chain and Device Response Lists to see a list of the devices that are present in the chain being processed and identify the failed device. 2. Replace the device. 3. Persistent problem is indicative of a wiring fault. 1. Enable mapping. 1. Indicative of faulty wiring on the circuit, or a faulty device. 1. Review the Chain and Device Response lists to identify the conflict. 1. Correct the wiring. 2. Re-map the circuit. 1. Click on the Device Chains tab to see a list of the devices that are present in the chain being processed. 2. Compare the serial numbers or short addresses with the actual wiring to identify the problem. This is indicative of devices not communicating properly. 1. Click on the Communication List tab to see a list of the devices that are communicating. 2. Compare the serial numbers or short Addresses with the actual wiring to identify the conflict.
Map supervision failure. The map in use has invalid data. This error initiates an automatic reconstruction of the map. Mapping supervision detected a change on the SDC. A rebuild of the map was scheduled. Mapping supervision detected that the device address or the short address of the device being supervised has changed. A rebuild of the map was scheduled. The mapping command failed, the sensor did not draw current or it was not possible to obtain stable mapping data from the SDC. A rebuild of the map was scheduled. Mapping was aborted by an external event, such a new start on a device. A rebuild of the map was scheduled. Mapping supervision detected that the Device Type of the Device being supervised has changed. A Map Fault was flagged. Mapping was aborted because there is short or open on the SDC wiring.
Unable to recreate current map at panel startup. The panel will re-map to reconstruct the map. Assignment of a short address to a device failed. This could lead to duplicate short addresses and mapping failures.
Mapping has been disabled. While mapping a chain from a device back to the Signature controller module, the chain appears to have 2 devices at the same location in the chain. More than 125 End of Line devices have been found on the SDC. While mapping a chain of from a device back to the Signature controller module the chain was found to have a device present past the end of the chain. This would indicate that a device (or devices) is not responding properly to the mapping commands. Mapping has detected a difference between the device at the end of line and the devices in its chain.
8.57
Displaying device chain errors

A chain is a list of devices connected between the Signature controller module and a device being interrogated during circuit mapping. The chains and sub-chains created during the mapping process evolve into the circuit map. Should a circuit fail to map properly, further insight into the problem may be gained by investigating the devices making up individual chains and sub-chains. To display a chain generated during the failed mapping process, click on the Device Chains tab. Four categories of device chains are listed. Each list displays the short address or serial number of the devices in the chain. The total number of entries in each list is indicated at the bottom of the list. To determine the position of a specific Signature device in the chain, click on the small data entry box at the top of each column and enter the devices short address or serial number. The position field at the bottom of the column will indicate the selected devices chain position and the cursor will move over that device entry in the main list.
Device Chains Tab
Click Here to Enter a Specific Device Current Chain List Chain Response List Device Response List Communicating List Column Totals Selected Device's Position
[TSCRN2.CDR]
Figure 8-19: Device chains dialog box Current chain list
The Current Chain List displays the sequence of Signature devices in the chain or sub-chain that was being created when the mapping failure occurred.
8.58
Service and troubleshooting Chain response list
The Chain Response List displays the sequence of Signature devices in the main chain, when the mapping failure occurred.
Device response list
The Device Response List displays the sequence of Signature devices in a sub-chain that was being created when the mapping failure occurred.
Communicating list
The Communicating List displays a list of all Signature devices seen by the Signature controller module.
Using the chain lists

An element in the displayed chain caused the map fault. Examine the chain and look for gaps within the short address or serial number lists of a chain or sub-chain. Gaps in the list indicate areas which were not successfully mapped. A gap within the chain does not mean that the missing device has a problem, only that that device was not successfully mapped. Compare the Chain and Device response lists. All the devices on the Device Response list should also appear on the Chain Response list. Look for duplicate short addresses or serial numbers on the same list.
Failure of a device to successfully map may be the result of a problem with another device, or wiring in a chain or sub-chain not directly connected to the unmapped device. Although the missing or duplicate devices are not always the cause of map failure, good troubleshooting technique suggests that these devices be examined for defects, wiring errors, and duplicate entries in the SDU program, etc.
Displaying message counters

During normal operation, the Signature controller module issues numerous communication messages to the Signature devices on its SDCs. The message counters indicate how many times a communication message has been issued and the number of successful return messages. To display the message counters, click on the Message Counters tab.
8.59

Message Counters Tab
Message Total Messages Sent Incorrect Message Count Percentage of Valid Messages
[TSCRN3.CDR]
Figure 8-20: Message counters dialog box
The message command appears in the left column, followed by the number of times it has been issued, the number of errors received after the message was issued, and the percentage of correct responses. During normal operation, the percentage of messages received correctly should exceed 99%. Intermittent device or wiring problems are indicated by a low successful message rate. If successful message rates are tracked over time, one can generate base line information for each circuit. From the base line information, any changes from the norm can be quickly identified, and preventive measures taken, before a communication problem develops. Table 8-38 lists the messages sent and received by the Signature driver controller module.
Table 8-38: Signature controller module Internal Messages Query End Of Line Query Isolator Query Status Pulse Visible LED Query Map Result Query Alarm Status Query PreAlarm Status Query Relay Status Ground Fault Check Query Device Mask Query Group Mask Module PFX Query Ready Comm Find Serial Number Find New Start Find New Active Find New Unused2 Find New Unused3 Reset Device Enable Device Disable Device
8.60
Table 8-38: Signature controller module Internal Messages Query Normal Status Query Trouble Status Query New Start Status Query Active Status Disable External Output Open Line Isolator Close Line Isolator Reset Device Status Move EEPROM to RAM Assign Short Address Assign Group Address Enter Service Mode Select Sensors Write Value to RAM Write Value to EEPROM Find New Alarm Find New PreAlarm Find New Normal Find New Trouble Assign All Address Relay Control Read Software Version Read Device Status Read Sensor Values Read Specific Trouble Read Value From RAM Send Value to Visible LED Query New Status 3-SDC Command Initiate Reset 3-SDC Command Initiate Restart Start Device Enable Visible LED Disable Visible LED Enable External Output 3-SDC Processor Status Query 3-SDC Enable Loop 3-SDC Disable Loop 3-SDC Line Initialization Complete 3-SDC Send a Device Msg. 3-SDC Get a Device Reply 3-SDC Configure Loop 3-SDC Query Current Configuration 3-SDC Send Signal Rate 3-SDC Query Signal Status
Displaying device trouble

Each Signature device is equipped with a 32-bit trouble register. Should a devices trouble bit be set at any time in the devices history, the device and the nature of the trouble will appear in the Latching Troubles By Device Address window. Clicking on the device will reveal a list of the trouble conditions affecting that device. Click on the device a second time to remove the trouble listing.
8.61

Device Trouble Tab
Device Trouble Message
[TSCRN4.CDR]
Figure 8-21: Device trouble dialog box
Table 8-39 below lists the Signature Detector trouble messages, and possible causes and solutions. Table 8-40 lists the Signature Module trouble messages, and possible causes and solutions.
Table 8-39: Signature detector trouble messages Trouble message External Device Line Short External Device Line Open Error XMIT Light Device switched to short after isolator relay operated ESK Value Too Low ESK Slope Too High ESK Slope Too Low Quiescent Too Large Possible cause Defective Detector Defective Detector Detector Dirty Short on Signature data circuit 1. Dirty Detector 2. Bad Ion Chamber 1. Dirty Detector 2. Bad Ion Chamber 1. Dirty Detector 2. Bad Ion Chamber Devices on the Signature data circuit are drawing too much current during the mapping process. Possible solution Replace Detector Replace Detector Clean detector Locate and remove cause of short. 1. Clean Detector 2. Replace Detector 1. Clean Detector 2. Replace Detector 1. Clean Detector 2. Replace Detector Place a short or low resistance shunt across the data circuit.
8.62
Table 8-39: Signature detector trouble messages Trouble message Quiescent Too Small Possible cause Devices on the Signature data circuit are not drawing enough current during the mapping process. Bad Relay Base Bad Base 1. Bad Relay Base 2. External Electrical Noise Bad Base Bad Ion Chamber Dirty Detector Dirty Detector Defective Detector Bad Base Bad Base Defective A/D converter Bad EEPROM Bad EEPROM Bad EEPROM Bad EEPROM 1. Dirty Detector 2. Outside light reaching detector chamber Dirty Detector Dirty Detector Bad Base Possible solution Check the device wiring or replace the device.
Short on Relay Base External or Isolator Relay Failure to Switch External or Isolator Relay Switched O Value Too Small Ion Rate-of-Rise Too High Ion Quiescent Too High Ion Quiescent Too Low Ion Value Too Low Thermal Value Too High Thermal Value Too Low A/D Converter Fault EEPROM Checksum Error EEPROM Write Time-out Unknown Device Type EEPROM Write Verify Fault Ambient Light Too High
Replace Relay Base Replace Base 1. Replace Relay Base 2. Remove or Shield Noise Source Replace Base Replace Detector Clean Detector Clean Detector Replace Detector Replace Base Replace Base Replace Detector Replace Detector Replace Detector Replace Detector Replace Detector 1. Clean Detector 2. Eliminate light source Clean Detector Clean Detector Replace Base
Photo Quiescent Too High Photo Quiescent Too Low Photo Value Too High
Table 8-40: Signature module trouble messages Trouble message Open data Circuit Shorted data Circuit Possible cause See Table 8-34 See Table 8-34 Possible solution See Table 8-34 See Table 8-34
8.63
Table 8-40: Signature module trouble messages Trouble message Relay switched Data circuit ground fault Vector Current Too Large Possible cause Relay toggled from actual state See Table 8-34 Devices on the Signature data circuit are drawing too much current during the mapping procedure. Devices on the Signature data circuit are not drawing enough current during the mapping procedure. EEPROM not properly programmed Bad EEPROM Defective A/D converter Defective EEPROM Signature data circuit voltage low Open or shorted input or output circuit Voltage on the wire supplying 24 Vdc smoke power to SIGA-UM is out of range. Bad RAM Possible solution Manually reset relay Replace Module See Table 8-34 Short or low resistance shunt on Signature data circuit
Vector Current Too Small
Excessive circuit resistance Defective base Defective wiring Replace module Replace module Replace module Replace module Check Signature data circuit Check input / output circuit wiring Check power supply output Check wiring Replace Module
EEPROM Not Initialized EEPROM Write Time-out A/D Time-out EEPROM Write Verify Fault Line Monitor Trouble Class A Trouble 3rd Wire Trouble
RAM Not Programmed
Displaying trouble tables

The Trouble Tables display eight categories of active device trouble. Each list displays the short address or serial number of the devices experiencing that trouble condition. The total number of devices in each list is indicated at the bottom of the list. The active troubles displayed in the Trouble Tables should be compared with a devices trouble history displayed in the Display Device Trouble lists, to determine any possible trouble pattern.
8.64

Trouble Tables Tab
Internal Fault List Device Type Fault List Personality Fault List Unexpected Fault List Click Here to Reveal Additional Fault Lists Total Column Fault Count
[TSCRN5.CDR]
Figure 8-22: Trouble Tables dialog box Internal fault
The Internal Fault List indicates an internal problem with a Signature Device or Module. Refer to the Displaying Device Trouble section to determine the specific cause.
Device type fault
The Device Type Fault List indicates that the device type entered in the SDU does not agree with the device type installed on the SDC.
Personality fault and sensitivity fault
The Personality Fault List indicates that the personality code (p-code) of a Signature module entered in the SDU does not agree with the p-code of the module actually installed on the circuit. The Sensitivity Fault List indicates that the sensitivity of a Signature detector entered in the SDU does not agree with the sensitivity of the detector actually installed on the circuit. Personality and sensitivity faults should be corrected by the system, and these faults should clear automatically.
Unexpected fault
The Unexpected Fault List displays the serial number of devices which appear on the actual circuit, but which were not listed in the SDU program.
8.65
Service and troubleshooting Communication fault
The Communication Fault List indicates those Signature devices which are not communicating with the Signature controller module.
Open fault
The Open Fault List indicates those Signature modules with an open on their input or output circuits (all p-codes except 8.)
Ground fault
The Ground Fault List indicates those Signature modules with a ground fault on their input or output circuits (all p-codes except 8.)
Short fault North American marketplaces: The Short Fault List indicates
those Signature modules with a short on their supervised output circuits (p-codes 5, 7, 15, 16.)
European marketplace: The Short Fault List indicates those
Signature modules with a short on their supervised input circuits (p-codes 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 20, 21) and those Signature modules with a short on their supervised output circuits (p-codes 5, 7, 15, 16.)
Brand fault
Incorrect brand of Signature devices installed on SDC.
8.66
DSDC status
Introduction
The DSDC status function is used to determine the real-time status of a Signature Data Circuit (SDC). This function is useful in isolating and correcting faults on an SDC. The DSDC status function is useful in conjunction with the download and DSDC diagnostic functions.
Setting up the System Definition Utility program

In order to use the DSDC Status function, the computer running the SDU program must be connected to the 3-SSDC. The appropriate communication port must be connected to the modular phone jack on the Signature controller module or on the CPU module. Com port and baud rate settings can be made directly from the DSDC Status window. The default baud rate is 9600 baud.
Using DSDC status

To access the DSDC Status function, click on Tools on the main menu bar, then click on Signature Status. Select the SDC to be monitored by using the Cabinet, SSDC, and Loop drop down lists. The Delay drop down box sets the interval at which the status screens receives updated information from the Signature controller module. The default value is 3 seconds. Increasing the delay time permits the module to process more information between reports to the SDU, thus decreasing the overall time it takes to generate a full status report. To start the DSDC Status function, click on the Start Status Button. Should the Confirm window appear after a short delay, the SDU computer is not communicating with the 3-SSDC. Verify the module address, download wiring, COM port, and baud rate are set correctly and click on the retry button. If communications fail when connected to the module via the CPU, try connecting directly to the modular phone jack on the Signature controller module.
Displaying the current SDC status

Click on the Current Status Tab at the bottom of the window to display an annunciator panel showing the real-time status of the connected SDC. Refer to Table 8-41 to interpret the indicators.
8.67
Select COM port here Select data circuit from list displayed here Select controller from list displayed here Select cabinet from list displayed here
Select baud rate here
Data sheet displays 31 separate parameters on selected controller card. A lit LED indicates trouble.
Click here to start receiving status information Click here to reinitialize the selected controller card
[LPCSTAT1.CDR]
Click here to disable mapping on the selected controller card Select display refresh rate here Click here to enable mapping on the selected controller card
Figure 8-23: DSDC Status dialog box
Table 8-41: Current status parameters Indicator Internal Fault Data Checksum Trouble I/F Fault Line Fault Map Fault Mapping in Progress Map disabled Function Signature controller module hardware problem Configuration data bad 3-SDC Card hardware problem SDC open or shorted Memory contents differ from actual SDC device conditions. The Signature controller module is currently mapping the SDC The mapping process has been manually turned off
8.68
Table 8-41: Current status parameters Indicator Dirty Device Unconfigured Alarm Function A dirty smoke detector has been identified The module has detected an alarm on a device which is not in its database SDC power on phase, devices not supervised Indicates when data controller card needs to be reinitialized Signature controller module to 3-SDC communication problem 3-SDC card hardware problem Two or more device strings appear identical to the system. Signature controller module in upload or download mode Internal memory problem Internal program error Ready to map SDC when SDC conditions warrant The Signature controller module is processing a new SIGA device start up The SDC is in the stand alone mode The module has detected an alarm while in the stand alone mode The SDC wiring has low resistance continuity to ground A SIGA module IDC/NAC has low resistance continuity to ground Module in reset phase. No changes reported by Signature controller module
Line Initialization Serial Table Full I/F Communication Fault I/F Internal Fault Balanced Map Programming Mode RAM Fault Stack Fault Map Pending Dev. New Starts in Progress Stand Alone Stand Alone Alarm Ground Fault Device Ground Fault Delta suspended
Displaying a log of current SDC status events

Click on the Status Log Tab at the bottom of the window to display a chronological list of the events that occurred on the SDC after the Start Status Button was activated.
8.69
A listing of status messages displayed here
[LPCSTAT2.CDR]
Figure 8-24: DSDC status event log
Displaying the SDC in-process progress chart

Click on the Progress Tab at the bottom of the window to display a graphical presentation of the five major processes that take place during SDC configuration: Finding device serial numbers Communicating with individual devices Mapping the devices Verifying the End Of Line (EOL) status of a device Programming parameters into a devices memory
This display is useful in determining an overall picture of SDC configuration activity.
8.70
Graphical representation of devices remaining to be processed Graphical representation of devices already processed
[LPCSTAT3.CDR]
Figure 8-25: DSDC in-process progress chart
8.71
Addressable analog diagnostic tools

The SDU addressable analog diagnostic tools are designed to assist in isolating and correcting faults with addressable analog circuits, detectors, and modules.
System definition utility

The quickest method for isolating most common problems is with the Systems Definition Utility (SDU) diagnostic tools. 1. Connect the SDU to the system in the usual manner, and open the appropriate project.
Note: If the actual project is not available create a phantom project with an empty 3-AADC1 circuit and connect directly to the module in question.
2. Select menu: Tools > System Sensor > Diagnostics 3. On the Options tab: deselect Message Counters, as they not usually needed, and take time to upload. Trouble Tables, Ready Communication, and Display as Device Addresses should be selected. 4. Click on: Upload AADC1 Tables. 5. Select the Status Tables tab when the table upload is complete.
Addressable analog diagnostic table interpretation
Each table lists the addresses for the modules and sensors reporting the associated condition with a total at the bottom. When displayed as Device Addresses, sensor addresses correspond with the rotary switch setting, and modules are reported as 100 plus the rotary switch setting. Multiple faults will make the process more difficult but the addresses noted in the fault tables make an excellent starting point
Table 8-42: Addressable analog diagnostic table interpretation Table Name Communicating Devices Description Lists sensor and module addresses talking to the 3-AADC1. Possible causes NOTE: Total number of communicating devices should equal number of installed devices. If total is low, see Communication Fault table for missing or not connected device(s). If total is high, see Unexpected Fault table for extra device(s) installed on circuit. Internal Fault Devices reporting an internal failure Replace device
8.72
Table 8-42: Addressable analog diagnostic table interpretation Table Name Device Type Fault Description The wrong type of device for the current configuration. Possible causes Photo detector installed for ion detector Ion detector installed for photo detector Monitor module installed for control module Control module installed for monitor module Addresses of two devices has been transposed. Unexpected Fault A device reporting at an unconfigured address. All unconfigured address locations are polled at startup after which these locations will be polled in less than 10 minute intervals. Duplicate Device Fault Two or more devices have the same address. If Communicating Devices total is OK, and Communication Fault is reported, the Unexpected Fault device should be set to the address listed as a Communication fault.
If total number of communicating devices is OK, the duplicate device is set at the same address as a configured device. If Communicating Devices total is short, and Communication Fault is reported, the device in the Communication fault table is addressed at the location shown in the Duplicate Device table.
Communication Fault
Missing device.
Wiring error or device not installed If Communicating Devices table short by one and Duplicate Device fault exists, then address shown in Comm Fault table is addressed at location shown in Duplicate Device table. OR If Communicating Devices table OK and Unexpected Fault exists, then the Unexpected Fault device should be set to the address shown in the Communication Fault table.
Open Fault
Module field wiring is open.
Circuit incorrectly wired or connector loose Defective detector or isolator base Broken conductor Device not installed on circuit Device not entered into SDU databases
8.73
Table 8-42: Addressable analog diagnostic table interpretation Table Name Short Fault Description Module field wiring is shorted. Possible causes Circuit incorrectly wired Defective detector, detector base, or module Nicked insulation between conductors SIGA, GSX ,or XLS brand devices intermixed on circuit.
Compatibility Fault
Incorrect brand of device installed, replace device.
Problem solving hints

Addressing faults
Most addressing faults are quickly located because the wrong address gives a clue as to the fault location. For example module 164 is duplicated while module 174 is missing. The device at location 174 probably has its tens digit addressing switch off by one position. Duplicate device faults are harder to locate, e.g. the carpenter put up a partition hiding sensor 53, then the electrician noticed it was missing and spliced in a new base and now there are two sensors at address 53. To identify devices with duplicate addresses, remove one of the suspected duplicate sensors. The duplicate fault should clear within 30 seconds if the sensor removed is a duplicate. Disconnect half of the circuit, allow a minute or so for the circuit to stabilize and the faults to report. Upload the Ready Communication diagnostics table only. The remaining duplicate sensor, 53, should still appear, as if it is physically connected between the circuit controller and the wiring break. Continue to add or remove segments of the circuit in gradual increments repeating the diagnostics upload until the physical location of the problem detector is located.
Intermittent communication and wiring faults
Included in the tools available for use with the addressable analog circuit are diagnostic Message Counters. These software counters indicate the number of communications between each device and the 3-AADC1 controller, beginning with the last controller restart. Each device also has an error count associated with it. The error count indicates the number of times communications have failed between each device and the 3-AADC1 controller. Examining the number of messages sent to a device and comparing this number to that of a neighboring device of the same type can be used to help isolate problems.
8.74
To use the counters effectively, one needs to know how these counters are affected by various circuit states. Devices are re-polled for a number of reasons: startup, changes in state such as alarm and trouble. Pull stations are polled much more frequently than detectors or modules. A communication failure will also cause effected devices to be polled more often than those not experiencing the failure. Devices with high message counts but few errors may be pull stations or devices that change state regularly such as monitor modules. Devices that have increased error counts and only marginally increased message counts may indicate wiring or device problems. Devices with low message counts and an equal number of errors are non-existent devices. All 198 addressed are polled occasionally to identify any devices that may have been installed and not configured.
If the message and error counts are confused because of the length of time the circuit has been running, restarting the panel will cause a restart of the circuit and the zero the counters. The circuit may have to run for a twenty minutes or more before a trend in messages shows up. Locating intermittent faults may require extended operating periods.
8.75
3-AADC1 Addressable Analog Driver Controller

Substituting 3-AADC1 local rail modules
When substituting a known good 3-AADC1 rail module in place of a suspect rail module, you must download the system configuration and Addressable Analog circuit data circuit information into the CPU module. This operation requires a PC and the SDU Program. The 3-AADC1 actually has two separate memories. The first memory contains the firmware that makes the module operate. If there is a problem with the firmware, or if an upgrade has been issued, the new firmware is downloaded into the module using the 3-AADC1 Code tab, which is found in the Version Control (Code) function of the Tools, Download menu. When upgrading the module firmware (code), you do NOT need to download the Bootstrap data unless specifically instructed to do so. The SDC configuration information is stored in the modules second memory. If you suspect that the module itself is bad, you must download the configuration information for the circuit that will be connected to the substitute module, using the 3-AADC1 Database tab, which is found in the Version Control (Database) function of the Tools, Download menu. Connect the PC to the CPU RS-232 connector J5.
Table 8-43: 3-AADC1 Local Rail Module troubleshooting Problem Analog Circuit Open Possible cause 1. Circuit incorrectly wired or connector loose 2. Defective detector or isolator base 3. Broken conductor 4. Device not installed on circuit 5. Device not entered into SDU databases 1. Circuit incorrectly wired 2. Defective detector, detector base, or module 3. Nicked insulation between conductors 1. Pinched wire between device and electrical box 2. Nicked wire insulation
Analog Circuit Shorted
Analog Circuit Ground Fault
8.76
Addressable analog device troubleshooting

Each addressable analog device has an integral Red LED. The function of this LED is indicated in Table 8-44. The LED is useful when trying to determine the communication and alarm or active status of a device.
Table 8-44: Addressable analog device LEDs LED Flashing Red Steady Red Device status Polling device Alarm or Active
Table 8-45 lists common troubles and possible causes for addressable analog modules. For detailed information on identifying and locating these errors, use the SDU programs Addressable Analog Diagnostic Tools. Information about these tools appears later in this chapter.
Table 8-45: Addressable analog module troubleshooting matrix (x = Applicable - = Not Applicable) Module Not Responding Correctly
M500MF x x x M501MF x x x M500CF x x x x M500XF x x x Possible Causes Module installed in wrong location or improperly addressed Module not entered into 3-AADC module database Break-off Tab set incorrectly Ground Fault on data circuit or (-) side of input / output circuit
Module in Trouble on 3-AADC Module

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Module missing or incorrectly wired on circuit. ID error. Module not loaded into 3-AADC module database Ground Fault on input or output circuit Output circuit open, shorted, incorrectly wired, polarized device installed in reverse, incorrect or missing EOL resistor Missing or incorrect EOL resistor
Module Incorrectly in alarm or active on CPU/3-LCD(XL) Module

x x x x Initiating Device Circuit shorted or initiating device incorrectly installed Incorrect EOL resistor value (too low)
8.77
Table 8-46: Addressable analog detector troubleshooting Symptom Detector not responding correctly Possible causes 1. Detector installed in wrong location or improperly addressed 2. Detector not entered into system database 3. Incorrect device response in database 1. Detector missing or incorrectly wired on circuit 2. ID error. Detector not loaded into 3-AADC module database 3. Ground Fault on circuit 4. Internal detector fault. 1. Detector extremely dirty 2. Ionization detector Installed in area of extremely high airflow 3. Detector installed in area of high ambient smoke 4. Defective detector
Detector in trouble on CPU/3-LCD(XL)
Detector incorrectly in alarm on CPU/3LCD(XL)
For detailed information on identifying and locating device problems, refer to the Addressable analog diagnostic tools topic in this chapter.
8.78
Wiring problems
There are three basic causes of wire-related erratic Addressable Analog circuit operation:
Excessive wiring resistance
Rarely is excessive wiring resistance the sole cause of Addressable Analog circuit problems. For any length of cable, the amount of resistance and capacitance per foot doesnt change and the Addressable Analog circuit capacitance limits are usually reached before the resistance limits. The digital signal operates between 0 and 24 VDC. Excessive circuit resistance causes the signal to shrink from a maximum of 23 VDC to a lower voltage, for example 20 VDC. The 3-volt drop in the wiring is due to wire resistance. To measure Addressable Analog circuit voltage drop, use an oscilloscope to measure the peak voltage at the Addressable Analog module and at each analog addressable device. If the voltage difference is greater than 2 VDC, the resistance in the wire run is excessive. Too much resistance in the Addressable Analog wire run is typically caused by small wire size or a bad connection. If the wire size is too small for the run length, the only remedies are to replace the wire with a larger size, or install additional Addressable Analog modules, dividing the circuit into acceptable lengths. Breaks or bad connections in the Addressable Analog circuit wiring can be identified by comparing the calculated circuit resistance value (described earlier) with the measured circuit resistance value. The measured wiring circuit resistance should not be different from the calculated circuit resistance by much more than a few ohms.
Excessive wiring capacitance
The second cause of erratic Addressable Analog circuit operation is too much capacitance in the Addressable Analog circuit wiring. Capacitance distorts the digital signal. As wiring capacitance increases, the square edges of the digital waveform start to curve. Excessive wiring capacitance causes the waveform to curve beyond the point where a device can recognize the waveform and respond when polled. Wiring capacitance also effects the turn-on current spike. If the turn on current spike is not present in the digital sequence, there is a high probability the analog addressable devices communication will not be understood by the Addressable Analog communication module.
8.79
Addressable Analog circuit capacitance problems are typically caused by long wire runs, ground faults on the Addressable Analog circuit, improper T-taps, or improper shielding. If shielded wire is used, the shield must be treated as a third conductor. It must be free of all ground faults and have continuity throughout. If the wire capacitance is too large for the run length, the only remedies are to replace the wire with a cable having a lower capacitance per foot or install additional Addressable Analog modules, dividing the circuit into acceptable lengths.
Ground faults
Eliminating ground faults on the Addressable Analog circuit reduces the amount of capacitance on the Addressable Analog wiring. Verify the Addressable Analog circuit is free of ground faults.
Correcting addressable analog circuit wiring problems

If the Addressable Analog circuit is wired with improper T-taps or excessive capacitance, corrective measures include: Designing the Addressable Analog circuit properly and re-pulling the wire Balancing the circuit. Balancing the circuit can help in some cases but is not a substitute for proper wiring practice. If circuit balancing is required, call Technical Services for additional information.
8.80
Appendix A
System addresses
Summary
This appendix provides a quick reference for interpreting the mapping of system addresses.
Content Address format A.2 LRM addresses A.4 Control / display module addresses A.9 Device addresses A.11
A.1
System addresses
Address format
Tip: To determine a local panel's cabinet number, use the 3-LCD command menu to get the status on all the active points on the panel. When prompted for a panel number, enter 00. The panel returns the startup response point's logical address. The first two numbers of the logical address is the cabinet number.
The system derives the addresses it assigns from the panels cabinet number and the LRMs location within the panel (see Figure A-1). The basic address format is PPCCDDDD, where: PP is the panels cabinet number. The cabinet number is assigned when the installer downloads the CPU database into the panel. CC is the LRMs slot address. The cabinet number and the slot address make up the LRMs logical address. DDDD is the devices point address. The LRMs logical address and devices point address make up the device or circuits logical address. The CRC Card Reader Controller and KPDISP Keypad Display are devices supported by a 3-SAC module. However, they also act as independent processors, and have their own pseudo points. For this reason, their device numbers are further subdivided. You can think of a SAC device as having this address format: PPCCSSDD: SS is the CRC or KPDISP device number, as assigned during LRM configuration. DD is a pseudo point within the device.
A.2
System addresses
Signature detectors 01020001 - 01020125 Signature modules 01020126 - 01020250
Cabinet #1
0102
01360129
01370001
B +
B -
S H
A +
SIGA1
SIGA1
A SP - MW KR 1
B +
B -
SIGA1
O UTPUT MODULE
SIGA2 B B +
2 SP MW KR
SIGA2 A A + S H
SIGA2 B B +
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 6 01360152
Slot 7 01370012
[SYS_ADDR_EX1.CDR]
Figure A-1: Addressing example
A.3
System addresses
LRM addresses
Figure A-2, Figure A-3, and Figure A-4 show the logical addresses that the system assigns to LRMs based on the panel configurations. Figure A-5 shows the effect of using a wide LCD display module, such as the 3-LCDXL Main LCD Display.
A.4
System addresses
PP00 PP01 PP02 PP03 PP04 PP05
N C N O C TROUB LE
N O
C N A ALARM
N C
N O
C SU P
N C
TB1
Rail 1 Available in 1-, 2-, and 3-rail cabinets
J1
A +
NE TW ORK AU DIO OUT A IN A B IN B - + - + -
AU DIO AU DIO B IN A OU T + - + -
AU DIO B OU T + -
R X 1
T X 1
R T S 1
C O R M X 1 2
T X 2
R T S 2
C O M 2
AUXIL IARY PO WER 1 2
PP32 PP07
PP33
PP34
PP35
PP36 PP06
PP37
Rail 2 Available in 2- and 3-rail cabinets
PP08
PP09
PP10
PP11
PP12
PP13
PP14
Rail 3 Available only in 3-rail cabinets
PP40
[LRM_ADDR_01.CDR]
PP41
PP42
PP43
PP44
PP45
PP46
Figure A-2: LRM addresses for 3-CHAS7, 3-ASU/FT, 3-CHAS7 configuration
A.5
System addresses
N C N O C TROUB LE
N O
C N A ALARM
N C
N O
C SU P
N C
TB1
J1
A +
NE TW ORK AU DIO OUT A IN A B IN B - + - +
AU DIO B OU T +
R X 1
T X 1
R T S 1
C O R M X 1 2
T X 2
R T S 2
C O M 2
PP32 PP06
PP33
PP34 PP07
PP35 PP08
PP36 PP09
PP37 PP10
PP39 PP11 PP12 PP13 PP14
PP40 PP15
PP41 PP16
PP42 PP17
[LRM_ADDR_02.CDR]
PP43
PP44
PP45
PP46
PP47
PP48
PP49
Figure A-3: LRM addresses for 3-CHAS7, 3-ASU/CHAS4, 3-CHAS7 configuration
A.6
System addresses
N C N O C TROUB LE
N O
C N A ALARM
N C
N O
C SU P
N C
TB1
J1
A +
NE TW ORK AU DIO OUT A IN A B IN B - + - +
AU DIO B OU T +
R X 1
T X 1
R T S 1
C O R M X 1 2
T X 2
R T S 2
C O M 2
PP32 PP06 PP07
PP33 PP08
PP34 PP09
PP35 PP10
PP36 PP11
PP37 PP12
PP38 PP13
PP39 PP14
PP40 PP15
PP41 PP16
PP42 PP17
PP43 PP18
PP44 PP19
[LRM_ADDR_03.CDR]
PP45
PP46
PP47
PP48
PP49
PP50
PP51
Figure A-4: LRM addresses for 3-CHAS7, 3-CHAS7, 3-CHAS7 configuration
A.7
System addresses
N C N O C TROUB LE
N O
N C A ALARM
N C
N O
C SU P
N C
TB1
J1
A +
NE TW ORK AU DIO A IN OUT IN A B B - + - + -
AU DIO AU DIO A OUT B IN + - + -
AU DIO B OU T + -
R X 1
T X 1
R T S 1
C O R M X 1 2
T X 2
R T S 2
C O M 2
PP32
PP35
PP36
PP37
Figure A-5: LRM addresses when using a 3-LCDXL Main LCD Display
A.8
System addresses
Control / display module addresses

Figure A-6 shows the device logical addresses that the system assigns the control/display modules.
A.9
System addresses
PPCC0129 PPCC0130 PPCC0131 PPCC0132 PPCC0133 PPCC0134 PPCC0135 PPCC0136 PPCC0137 PPCC0138 PPCC0139 PPCC0140 PPCC0141 PPCC0142 PPCC0143 PPCC0144 PPCC0145 PPCC0146 PPCC0147 PPCC0148 PPCC0149 PPCC0150 PPCC0151 PPCC0152 24 LEDs
PPCC0129 PPCC0130 PPCC0131 PPCC0132 PPCC0133 PPCC0134 PPCC0135 PPCC0136 PPCC0137 PPCC0138 PPCC0139 PPCC0140 PPCC0141 PPCC0142 PPCC0143 PPCC0144 PPCC0145 PPCC0146 6 groups of 3 switches and 3 LEDs
PPCC0001 PPCC0002 PPCC0003 PPCC0004 PPCC0005 PPCC0006 PPCC0007 PPCC0008 PPCC0009 PPCC0010 PPCC0011 PPCC0012 PPCC0013 PPCC0014 PPCC0015 PPCC0016 PPCC0017 PPCC0018
PPCC0129 PPCC0130 PPCC0131 PPCC0132 PPCC0133 PPCC0134 PPCC0135 PPCC0136 PPCC0137 PPCC0138 PPCC0139 PPCC0140 PPCC0141 PPCC0142 PPCC0143 PPCC0144 PPCC0145 PPCC0146 PPCC0147 PPCC0148 PPCC0149 PPCC0150 PPCC0151 PPCC0152 12 switches and 24 LEDs
PPCC0001 PPCC0002 PPCC0003 PPCC0004 PPCC0005 PPCC0006 PPCC0007 PPCC0008 PPCC0009 PPCC0010 PPCC0011 PPCC0012
12 switches and 12 LEDs

[DEV_ADDRESS_01.CDR]
Figure A-6: Control/display module switch and LED device addresses
A.10
System addresses
Device addresses
Figure A-7 shows the device logical addresses that the system assigns to various rail modules.
A.11
System addresses
PPCC0002 PPCC0001
IDC /NAC IDC /NAC 1 2 T B1 IDC 3 IDC 4 NAC IN 1/2
PPCC0001
UN USED UN USED UN USED 24VD C NAC /B + UN USED
PPCC0003 PPCC0004
T B1
JP2 JP1
J4 J3
J1
JP4 JP3
JP1 1 BACK- UP + + S 1 T B2 NAC /A + S NAC /B + IDC /NAC IDC /NAC 5 6 IDC 7 IDC 8 T B2 NAC IN 5/6 JP2
Zoned amplifier modules
PPCC0005 PPCC0006
PPCC0008 PPCC0007
Initiating device circuit module
Sensors PPCC0001 - PPCC0099
S
H
SIGA1
SIGA1
SP B B MW KR SIGA1 1
Signature detectors PPCC0001 - PPCC0125
S H
N/C B
B N/C
LOOP1
LOOP1
LOOP1
Signature modules PPCC0126 - PPCC0250
O UT PUT MO DUL E
O UT PUT MO DULE
Modules PPCC0101 - PPCC0199
Signature modules PPCC0376 - PPCC0500

SIG A2 B B 2 SP MW KR SIG A2 A A S H SIG A2 B B
Signature detectors PPCC0251 - PPCC0375
Signature controller module

Figure A-7: Rail module device addresses
Addressable analog controller module

[DEV_ADDRESS_02.CDR]
A.12
Appendix B
System calculations
Summary
This appendix provides worksheets for calculating system parameters, such as wire distance, battery capacity, and memory.
Content Network data riser limits B.2 Overview B.2 Data network specifications B.2 Cable properties B.3 Calculating a maximum length B.3 Calculating maximum wire capacitance per foot B.3 Signature data circuit wire length B.5 Determining the maximum allowable branch length B.5 Determining the total loop length B.10 24 Vdc NAC wire length B.12 25 or 70 Vrms NAC wire length B.15 Addressable analog circuit wire length B.17 Cabinet battery B.18 SAC bus power B.19 Determining the need for a remote power supply B.19 Providing adequate voltage for devices B.21 CPU memory B.24 Fiber optic cable worksheet B.26
B.1
System calculations
Network data riser limits

Overview
Cumulative data network capacitance refers to the total capacitance of all copper wire used for the data riser. The cumulative capacitance of data networks must be within certain limits to permit stable network communications. Audio networks are not affected by cumulative capacitance, due to the method of retransmitting data. The audio network retransmits data byte-by-byte, so the individual bit times of a byte are restored at each node in the network. The data network retransmits data bit-by-bit. This method of retransmitting data restores the amplitude of a bit at each node, but any distortions in bit timing are passed through to the next node. Data network communication faults begin to occur at about 23% distortion of bit timing. Cumulative data network capacitance induces bit timing distortion. A fiber link in a data network electrically isolates two nodes, but distortions in bit timing are not restored by the fiber segment. Distortions in bit timing are passed through the fiber to the next node. The bit transition time of model 3-FIB fiber cards is fast enough to be neglected in determining the maximum wire length that can be used in the data network.
Data network specifications

Here are the maximum allowed values between any three nodes of a network. Resistance: 90 ohms () Capacitance: 0.3 microfarads (F) Distance: 5,000 feet
The following table lists the maximum cumulative capacitance for the entire data network given various wire sizes and transmission rates. Maximum cumulative capacitance is the total capacitance of all installed copper wire used in the data network.
Maximum cumulative capacitance in microfarads Wire size (AWG) 18 16 14 At 38.4Kbaud 1.4 1.8 2.1 At 19.2Kbaud 2.8 3.6 4.2
B.2
System calculations
Cable properties
Data and audio networks in an EST3 system do not require the use of shielded cable, and networks designed with twisted-pair can be about twice as long as those designed with shielded cable. The maximum length of a data network varies with the properties of the wire used. Wire manufacturers typically provide specifications for wire resistance and capacitance. Resistance is generally specified in ohms per 1,000 feet, and must be doubled for 1,000 feet of a twisted-pair cable. Capacitance is specified in picofarads per foot (pF/ft). The capacitance between conductors of a twisted-pair is commonly referred too as conductor-conductor or mutual capacitance. Shielded cable has an additional capacitance between each conductor and the shield. The capacitance of either conductor to shield is typically twice the value of mutual capacitance, and the highest value of capacitance must be used when calculating the maximum length of a data network. The overall length of data networks designed with twisted-pair cable is about twice as long as data networks designed with shielded cable due to the additional capacitance resulting from the shield.
Calculating a maximum length

The maximum length of a data network can be calculated by dividing the maximum cumulative capacitance allowed by the highest capacitance rating of the selected cable. For example, say you wanted to determine maximum length of a data network using 18 AWG cable that is rated at 25 pF per foot. The network will communicate at 38.4 Kbaud. The maximum length equals the maximum cumulative capacitance divided by the capacitance per foot. In equation form: ML = MCC / CPF In our example: ML = 1.4 F / 25 pF/ft ML = 56,000 ft
Calculating maximum wire capacitance per foot

The capacitive property of twisted-pair cable varies and the cost of cable generally increases as the capacitance per foot decreases. Following is a sample calculation for determining the maximum capacitance per foot that a cable can have for a given network length.
B.3
System calculations
The maximum capacitance per foot equals the maximum cumulative capacitance divided by the total network length. In equation form: MCPF = MCC / TNL Where: MCC can be obtained from the table given in this topic Total network length is the sum of the lengths of individual copper runs in the network
Heres an example. The total copper distance of a network is 26,000 feet. Calculate the maximum capacitance per foot that can be used for 18 AWG twisted-pair cable at 38.4K baud. MCPF = MCC / TNL MCPF = 1.4 F / 26,000 ft MCPF = 53.8 pF/ft
B.4
System calculations
Signature data circuit wire length

Circuit resistance and capacitance determines the maximum length of a Signature data circuit. Circuit resistance affects the wire length of the longest circuit branch. Circuit capacitance affects the total amount of wire that can be used on the circuit.
Notes
The design of the Signature data circuit must not exceed either of the two measurements. There are no restrictions placed on the wiring used for the Signature data circuit. Longer wire runs may be obtained using standard (non-twisted, non-shielded) wire pairs.
Determining the maximum allowable branch length

The maximum branch length is the wire distance measured from the Signature controller module to the last device on the longest circuit path as shown below.
Signature Controller Module
10
12
[WIRECALC2.CDR]
Several factors influence the maximum allowable branch length: Wire gauge and type Number of Signature detectors and modules installed on the branch Number of SIGA-UMs configured for 2-wire smoke detectors installed on the branch
Table B-1 through provide the maximum allowable branch length for any detector, module, SIGA-UM, and wire gauge combination. Using the wire distances specified in the tables ensures that the circuit does not exceed the maximum circuit resistance of the Signature data circuit.
B.5
System calculations Note: To calculate the wire distance with respect to circuit resistance, the tables assume that the circuit is end-loaded (all devices are clustered more towards the end of the circuit) and the circuit uses standard non-shielded wire. To determine the maximum allowable length of a Signature data circuit branch:
1. Identify the device located farthest from the Signature controller. 2. Determine the number of Signature detectors, modules, and SIGA-UMs configured for 2-wire smokes that lie on the same conductive path between the device identified in step 1 and the Signature controller. 3. Calculate the number of detector and module addresses. Some Signature modules require two addresses. 4. Determine the size of the wire used to construct the circuit. 5. Find the maximum allowable wire distance for the longest branch in the lookup tables as follows: If no SIGA-UMs are installed, use Table B-1. If 15 SIGA-UMs are installed, use Table B-2. If 610 SIGA-UMs are installed, use Table B-3.
B.6
System calculations
Table B-1: Maximum branch length with 0 SIGA-UMs configured for 2-wire smokes
Signature detector addresses Signature module addresses ft 125 2650 5175 76100 101125 0 125 2650 5175 76100 101125 0 125 2650 5175 76100 101125 0 125 2650 5175 76100 101125 0 125 2650 5175 76100 101125 0 125 2650 5175 76100 101125 0 0 0 0 0 125 125 125 125 125 125 2650 2650 2650 2650 2650 2650 5175 5175 5175 5175 5175 5175 76100 76100 76100 76100 76100 76100 101125 101125 101125 101125 101125 101125 7437 7038 6638 6238 5839 7267 6867 6467 6068 5668 5268 6697 6297 5897 5498 5098 4698 5906 5250 4633 4051 3498 2973 3931 3404 2899 2413 1945 1493 2631 2165 1713 1274 847 431 Maximum allowable wire distance using non-twisted, non-shielded wire pairs 18 AWG m 2267 2145 2023 1901 1780 2215 2093 1971 1849 1728 1606 2041 1919 1798 1676 1554 1432 1800 1600 1412 1235 1066 906 1198 1037 883 735 593 455 802 660 522 388 258 131 ft 11815 11180 10545 9910 9275 11544 10909 10275 9640 9005 8370 10639 10004 9369 8734 8099 7464 9383 8340 7360 6435 5558 4723 6245 5407 4605 3833 3089 2371 4180 3439 2721 2023 1345 685 16 AWG m 3601 3408 3214 3021 2827 3519 3325 3132 2938 2745 2551 3243 3049 2856 2662 2469 2275 2860 2542 2243 1961 1694 1440 1903 1648 1404 1168 942 723 1274 1048 829 617 410 209 ft 18792 17782 16772 15762 14752 18361 17351 16342 15332 14322 13312 16921 15911 14901 13891 12881 11871 14923 13265 11707 10235 8839 7512 9932 8601 7324 6096 4913 3771 6649 5470 4328 3218 2140 1089 14 AWG m 5728 5420 5112 4804 4497 5597 5289 4981 4673 4365 4057 5157 4850 4542 4234 3926 3618 4549 4043 3568 3120 2694 2290 3027 2621 2232 1858 1498 1149 2027 1667 1319 981 652 332
B.7
System calculations
Signature detector addresses Signature module addresses ft 125 2650 5175 76100 101125 0 125 2650 5175 76100 101125 0 125 2650 5175 76100 101125 0 125 2650 5175 76100 101125 0 125 2650 5175 76100 101125 0 125 2650 5175 76100 101125 0 0 0 0 0 125 125 125 125 125 125 2650 2650 2650 2650 2650 2650 5175 5175 5175 5175 5175 5175 76100 76100 76100 76100 76100 76100 101125 101125 101125 101125 101125 101125 1386 760 143 422 232 44 2201 1208 227 671 368 69 3501 1921 361 1067 586 110 6778 6131 5501 4885 4282 5353 4720 4100 3491 2893 2306 3776 3153 2539 1935 1340 754 2491 1868 1254 648 50 Maximum allowable wire distance using non-twisted, non-shielded wire pairs 18 AWG m 2066 1869 1677 1489 1305 1632 1439 1250 1064 882 703 1151 961 774 590 409 230 759 569 382 198 15 ft 10768 9741 8739 7760 6802 8504 7498 6513 5546 4597 3663 5999 5009 4034 3075 2130 1197 3957 2967 1992 1030 80 16 AWG m 3282 2969 2664 2365 2073 2592 2286 1985 1691 1401 1116 1829 1527 1230 937 649 365 1206 904 607 314 24 ft 17126 15492 13899 12342 10819 13525 11926 10359 8821 7311 5826 9542 7966 6416 4890 3387 1905 6293 4720 3168 1638 126 14 AWG m 5220 4722 4236 3762 3298 4122 3635 3157 2689 2228 1776 2908 2428 1956 1491 1032 581 1918 1439 966 499 39
B.8
System calculations
Signature detector addresses Signature module addresses ft 125 2650 5175 76100 101125 0 125 2650 5175 76100 101125 0 125 2650 5175 76100 101125 0 125 2650 5175 76100 101125 0 125 2650 5175 76100 101125 0 125 2650 5175 76100 101125 0 0 0 0 0 125 125 125 125 125 125 2650 2650 2650 2650 2650 2650 5175 5175 5175 5175 5175 5175 76100 76100 76100 76100 76100 76100 101125 101125 101125 101125 101125 101125 833 242 254 74 1323 385 403 117 2105 613 642 187 5045 4494 3950 3414 2884 4106 3542 2985 2435 1891 1353 2869 2296 1730 1170 617 68 1796 1214 638 69 Maximum allowable wire distance using non-twisted, non-shielded wire pairs 18 AWG m 1538 1370 1204 1040 879 1252 1080 910 742 576 412 874 700 527 357 188 21 547 370 195 21 ft 8015 7139 6275 5423 4581 6523 5627 4742 3868 3004 2150 4557 3648 2749 1859 979 108 2853 1929 1014 109 16 AWG m 2443 2176 1913 1653 1396 1988 1715 1445 1179 916 655 1389 1112 838 567 299 33 869 588 309 33 ft 12748 11355 9981 8625 7286 10375 8950 7542 6152 4778 3419 7248 5802 4372 2957 1558 172 4537 3067 1613 173 14 AWG m 3886 3461 3042 2629 2221 3162 2728 2299 1875 1456 1042 2209 1768 1332 901 475 53 1383 935 492 53
B.9
System calculations
Determining the total loop length

The total loop length is the sum of the lengths of all the wire segments installed in the data circuit.
Signature Controller Module
10
12
[WIRECALC3.CDR]
The total length of all the cable installed in the Signature data circuit can not exceed the values listed below:
Wire Size Wire type Twisted pair Twisted-shielded pair Non-twisted, non-shielded pair 14 AWG 13,157 ft (4,010 m) 5,952 ft (1,814 m) 20,000 ft (6,096 m) 16 AWG 13,888 ft (4,233 m) 6,098 ft (1,859 m) 20,000 ft (6,096 m) 18 AWG 20,000 ft (6,096 m) 8,621 ft (2,628 m) 20,000 ft (6,096 m)
If the cable manufacturers data indicates the capacitance per foot of the cable, the following method may be used to determine the maximum total loop length.
Note: In no case may the total loop length of a Signature data circuit exceed 20,000 feet (6,098 meters).
LMax =
500,000 C pf / Ft
B.10
System calculations
where: LMax = maximum total cable length in feet Cpf/Ft = Cable capacitance in picofarads per foot
Note: A short circuit on a Signature data circuit can disable the entire circuit. In order to limit the effect of a single short circuit on the SDC, SIGA-IB Isolator Bases or SIGA-IM Isolator modules can be installed at strategic points in the circuit.
B.11
System calculations
24 Vdc NAC wire length

The 24 Vdc notification appliance circuits must be a minimum of 18 AWG (0.75 mm2) pair. Circuit length limits are determined using the maximum allowable circuit resistance and cable manufacturers specifications.
Table B-4: Wire resistance ratings to use for wire length calculations Wire Size 18 AWG (0.75 mm2) 16 AWG (1.0 mm2) 14 AWG (1.50 mm2) 12 AWG (2.5 mm2) Resistance per 1000 ft pair (ohms) 13.0 8.0 5.2 3.2
The following restrictions apply when calculating the wire size for 24 Vdc notification appliance circuits: Minimum supply voltage available is 20.4 V Minimum required circuit voltage at any notification appliance is 17.0V
Using Ohms Law, the NAC current requirement (total current of all installed notification appliances) and the allowable voltage drop of 3.4 volts (20.4 - 17), the maximum allowable NAC circuit resistance is determined as follows:
R Max =
Vdrop I Max
Equation B-1
where: RMax = Maximum allowable notification appliance circuit resistance Vdrop = Maximum allowable voltage drop from power supply to the last notification appliance IMax = Maximum notification appliance circuit current requirement
B.12
System calculations
Using Equation B-1, the maximum permissible circuit resistance for a fully loaded (3.5 A) NAC using 14 AWG wire is determined to be 0.97, as follows:
0.97 =
3.4V 3.5 A
Using wire resistance Table B-4, the maximum allowable length (D) of any listed wire gauge pair may be determined as follows:
D=
RMax R/1000' PAIR
X1000
Equation B-2
where: D = Distance in feet RMax = Maximum permissible wire resistance R/1000 ft pair = Wire resistance per 1000 ft (305 m) pair [Table B-4]
Using Equation B-2, the maximum length of a fully loaded (3.5 A) notification appliance circuit using a pair of 14 AWG wires is:
187' =
0.97 1000 5.2
187 ft (57 m) is the maximum length of a fully loaded (3.5 A) notification appliance circuit using a pair of 14-gauge wires. Other loads and wire sizes may be calculated in a similar manner. Table B-5 lists allowed distances for selected current draws and wire sizes.
B.13
System calculations
Table B-5: Load vs. Distance Notification Appliance Circuit (3.4V drop) Maximum distance to last appliance LOAD CURRENT 12 AWG (2.50 mm2) ft 0.1 A 0.25 A 0.5 A 0.75 A 1.0 A 2.0 A 3.0 A 3.5 A 10,625 4,250 2,125 1,406 1,062 531 353 303 m 3,239 1,296 648 429 324 162 108 92 14 AWG (1.50 mm2) ft 6,538 2,615 1,308 865 654 327 217 187 m 1,993 797 399 264 199 100 66 57 16 AWG (1.00 mm2) ft 4,250 1,700 850 563 425 213 141 121 m 1296 518 259 172 130 65 43 37 18 AWG (0.75 mm2) ft 2,615 1,046 523 346 262 131 87 75 m 797 319 159 105 80 40 27 23
B.14
System calculations
25 or 70 Vrms NAC wire length

The maximum allowable wire length is the farthest distance that a pair of wires can extend from the amplifier to the last speaker on the notification appliance circuit without losing more than 0.5 dB of signal. Calculating the maximum allowable wire length using this method ensures that each speaker operates at its full potential. Several factors influence the maximum allowable wire length: Wire size Output signal level of the amplifier driving the circuit Number of speakers installed on the circuit
To calculate the maximum allowable wire length for a 0.5 dB loss, use the following formula:
Max length = 59.25 X Amplifier output 2 Wire resistance X Circuit load
where: Amplifier output is the signal level in Vrms supplied by the amplifier driving the circuit Circuit load is the total watts required by the audio circuit Wire resistance is the resistance rating of the wire per 1000 ft pair, see Table B-4.
For example, the maximum allowable wire length for an audio circuit consisting of a 30 W, 25 Vrms amplifier driving thirty 1-watt speakers, using 18-guage wire would be 95 ft.
94.95 = 59.25 X 25 13 X 30
2
Table B-6 and Table B-7 gives the maximum allowable wire lengths for various wire sizes and loads. Use Table B-6 when designing circuits for amplifiers set for 25 Vrms output. Use Table B-7 when designing circuits for amplifiers set for a 70 Vrms output.
B.15
System calculations
Table B-6: Maximum allowable length at 25 Vrms, 0.5 dB loss

Circuit load requirement Wire Size ft 18 AWG 2 (0.75 mm ) 16 AWG 2 (1.0 mm ) 14 AWG 2 (1.5 mm ) 12 AWG 2 (2.5 mm ) 190 309 475 772 15 W m 58 94 145 235 ft 142 231 356 579 20 W m 43 70 109 176 ft 95 154 237 386 30 W m 29 47 72 118 ft 71 116 178 289 40 W m 22 35 54 88 ft 90 W m 120 W ft m
Over max current limit 51 79 129 16 24 39
Over max current limit 39 59 96 12 18 29
Table B-7: Maximum allowable length at 70 Vrms, 0.5 dB loss

Circuit load requirement Wire Size ft 18 AWG (0.75 mm2) 16 AWG 2 (1.0 mm ) 14 AWG 2 (1.5 mm ) 12 AWG 2 (2.5 mm ) 1489 2420 3722 6049 15 W m 454 738 1134 1844 ft 1117 1815 2792 4537 20 W m 340 553 851 1383 ft 744 1210 1861 3024 30 W m 227 369 567 922 ft 558 907 1396 2268 40 W m 170 276 426 691 ft 248 403 620 1008 90 W m 76 123 189 307 120 W ft 186 302 465 756 m 57 92 142 230
B.16
System calculations
Addressable analog circuit wire length

Table B-8 lists the maximum wire distances allowed for Addressable Analog circuits.
Notes
Maximum wire resistance can not exceed 50 ohms. Maximum wire capacitance can not exceed 0.05 microfarads.
Table B-8: Maximum allowable wire distance for Addressable Analog circuits Twisted, non-shielded Wire gauge Max loop Capacitance
0.01 F 0.02 F 18 0.03 F 0.04 F 0.05 F 0.01 F 0.02 F 16 0.03 F 0.04 F 0.05 F 0.01 F 0.02 F 14 0.03 F 0.04 F 0.05 F
Twisted, shielded ft 1724 3448 5172 6896 8620 1219 2439 3658 4878 6097 1190 2380 3571 4761 5952 m 525 1051 1576 2102 2627 372 743 1115 1487 1858 363 725 1088 1451 1814
Non-twisted, non-shielded ft 5000 10000 15000 20000 25000 5000 10000 15000 20000 25000 5000 10000 15000 20000 25000 m 1524 3048 4572 6096 7620 1524 3048 4572 6096 7620 1524 3048 4572 6096 7620
ft 4000 8000 12000 16000 20000 2777 5555 8333 11111 13888 2631 5263 7894 10526 13157
m 1219 2438 3658 4877 6096 846 1693 2540 3387 4233 802 1604 2406 3208 4010
B.17
System calculations
Cabinet battery
Use the following method to calculate the minimum amperehour capacity of a battery required in order to operate a panel in the absence of AC power. Battery calculations must be performed separately for each cabinet in the system. Determine the total amount of current in milliamps required by all of the components that derive power from the battery while the panel is in standby mode. Multiply the total amount of standby current by the number of hours that the panel is required to operate in standby mode while on battery power. Determine the total amount of current in milliamps required by all of the components that derive power from the battery while the panel is in alarm mode. Multiply the total amount of alarm current by the number of minutes that the panel is required to operate in alarm mode while on battery power. Divide the result by 60 to convert minutes to hours. Add the total amount of standby current and the total amount of alarm current then divide the result by 1000 to convert to ampere-hours. Multiply this number by 1.2 to add a 20% safety factor to the calculations.
B.18
System calculations
SAC bus power

This topic provides information to help you determine whether: A power supply must be added to the SAC bus Adequate voltage will be available to CRCs and KPDISPs on the SAC bus The standby battery in each CRC is properly sized
Determining the need for a remote power supply

The need for additional power is dictated by the current drawn by the devices on the SAC bus. Each 3-PPS/M can supply a total of 7 A through two 3.5 A outputs. Each SAC line can therefore draw a maximum of 3.5 A. This consists of the current drawn by the CRCs and KPDISPs plus any readers, strikes, or maglocks. If the load on the 3-PPS/M supply is greater than 3.5 A, youll need to split the devices over two SAC busses, or add a remote power supply.
To determine the total load on the 3-PPS/M:
1. Complete Form A (below) to calculate the system alarm and standby load current. 2. Total the columns to determine the Total Alarm Load and Total Amp Hours. These two totals will be used in later calculations. 3. If the Total Alarm Load is greater than 3.5 A, the devices must be divided between two SAC busses, each with a separate supply OR a remote power supply must be installed.
B.19
System calculations
Form A: 3-SAC alarm and standby load Device Qty Alarm current (mA) 100 950 72 31 24 20 8 8 33 40 42 47 51 55 58 63 65 80 126 156 187 233 283 376 436 470 Total alarm Standby current current (mA) (mA) 35 940 70 25 20 20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 80 126 156 187 233 283 376 436 470 Total standby current (mA) Standby time (Hours) Amp hours (mAH)
KPDISP CRC CR-5355 CR-5365 CR-5395 CR-6005 Reader sounder CRCSND Strike rating 100 mA @ 12 V 150 mA @ 12 V 200 mA @ 12 V 250 mA @ 12 V 300 mA @ 12 V 35 mA @ 12 V 400 mA @ 12 V 450 mA @ 12 V 500 mA @ 12 V Maglock rating 100 mA @ 12 V 150 mA @ 12 V 200 mA @ 12 V 250 mA @ 12 V 300 mA @ 12 V 350 mA @ 12 V 400 mA @ 12 V 450 mA @ 12 V 500 mA @ 12 V Total amp hours (Battery)
Total alarm load (must be < 3.5 A) Note: Standby time = length of time that the device will draw standby current from battery. There is no minimum standby time for access control.
B.20
System calculations
Providing adequate voltage for devices

To determine whether each CRC and KPDISP will have adequate input voltage, calculate the voltage drops along the SAC bus. Voltage drops can be estimated or actual.
Estimated voltage drop
To estimate the voltage drop use Table B-9 and Table B-10, which show the maximum wire length for a given number of doors at a given current load. The tables assume even spacing between the doors and an equal load at each door. 1. First, determine the load per door by adding the alarm currents of the CRC, door lock, card reader, and sounder. 2. Determine the number of doors you need to secure. Find the number of doors Table B-9 then search across that row for the column with the current you calculated in step 1. 3. The intersection gives the maximum distance from the 3-PPS/M or remote power supply to the last door. 4. If the distance to the last door in your installation is less than this distance no further calculations are needed. 5. If the distance to the last door in you installation is greater than this distance check Table B-10 using steps 1 through 4. 6. If changing the gauge of the wire does not work, you must run a second power line, or divide the SAC bus and add a remote power supply. In either case, recheck your estimates. For example: You are putting a CRC, a strike rated at 250 mA @ 12 Vdc, a CR-5395 and a CRCSND at 8 doors. The furthest door is 500 feet from the control. Using step 1 above, you determine that the total alarm current for this door is 149 mA. In Table B-9 (for 16 AWG), find 8 in the Doors column, go across this row to the 150 mA column. The intersection shows a maximum length of 584 feet. Since the distance from the control panel to the last door is less than 584 feet, no further calculations are needed.
Actual voltage drop
To calculate the actual voltage drop based on the actual load for each device and the actual distance between each device, follow these steps: 1. Start the EST 3 System Builder program and select the 16 AWG check box. 2. Enter the actual alarm load for the first device and the distance from the control panel to that device. The system will calculate the voltage drop and indicate whether it is OK to continue.
B.21
System calculations
3. Continue by adding the actual alarm load and the distance from the previous device for each device on the SAC bus. 4. If you successfully enter all devices with no error messages, no further calculations are required. The panel supply will be adequate and each device will receive sufficient voltage. 5. If an error message occurs, you have the following options: Repeat the process using 14 AWG in step 1 Run a second power supply line Divide the SAC bus and add a remote power supply
SAC bus wire length tables Table B-9: SAC bus wire lengths versus number of doors and current loads using 16 AWG wire Doors 70 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 100 150 200 250 Load (mA) 300 350 400 450 500 800 532 399 320 266 228 199 X X X X X X X X X X X X X 550 720 484 363 288 242 207 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 600 665 444 333 266 222 190 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 650 616 410 306 244 205 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
4000 4000 2650 2000 1600 1300 1140 1000 885 3800 2660 1776 1300 1060 880 2850 1950 1320 990 2240 1600 1040 800 1875 1350 885 1620 1140 756 1400 980 1240 880 1125 810 1030 730 946 876 806 756 705 672 629 576 570 540 660 600 559 518 495 464 442 414 399 380 665 584 522 480 440 408 377 350 330 304 X X X X 650 558 497 440 396 360 330 300 273 X X X X X X X 780 624 525 450 392 352 315 290 264 240 X X X X X X X X 660 520 435 378 329 288 261 240 220 X X X X X X X X X 760 570 452 375 324 285 253 228 207 X X X X X X X X X X 666 498 400 333 286 250 222 200 X X X X X X X X X X X 594 444 355 296 254 222 197 X X X X X X X X X X X X
Note: All distance measurements given in feet. X means that the 3-PPS/M will not support these devices at any distance.
B.22
System calculations
Table B-10: SAC bus wire lengths versus number of doors and current loads using 14 AWG wire Doors 70 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 100 150 200 250 Load (mA) 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650
4000 4000 4000 3000 2400 2000 1750 1500 1360 1200 1100 1000 940 4000 4000 2700 2000 1600 1360 1160 1000 900 4000 3000 2040 1500 1200 1020 870 3480 2400 1600 1200 960 2900 2000 1365 1000 800 2460 1710 1140 870 2170 1505 1015 756 1920 1360 904 1710 1215 810 1550 1100 740 1430 1012 682 1344 936 1248 858 1162 812 1095 750 1024 720 969 918 874 820 680 630 608 580 624 585 532 510 480 442 414 399 380 680 612 550 506 468 429 406 375 352 340 X X X 690 602 544 477 440 407 372 351 322 X X X X X X 800 675 582 511 448 405 370 341 X X X X X X X X X 700 575 492 434 384 351 310 X X X X X X X X X X 750 600 500 438 378 336 X X X X X X X X X X X X 660 544 455 390 336 X X X X X X X X X X X X X 800 600 480 405 348 301 X X X X X X X X X X X X X 740 555 436 365 312 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 680 510 400 335 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 620 471 376 315 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Note: All distance measurements given in feet. X means that the 3-PPS/M will not support these devices at any distance.
B.23
System calculations
CPU memory
Use the CPU memory calculation worksheet, Table B-11, to determine if a CPU requires additional memory. Each line in the worksheet is a system variable and is referenced by a line identification (ID) letter. The line IDs also appear in the formula column. The result of solving a formula is then placed in the Results column. Enter the values for each variable in the # column on the same line. Replace the variables in the formula by the value entered in the # column having the same letter as the formula. Calculate the formula and put the results in the Results column. Determine the memory size required as indicated at the bottom of the worksheet.
Note: The Systems Definition Utility will prevent you from downloading if the compiled project database exceeds the amount of memory on the 3CPU1.
B.24
System calculations
Table B-11: CPU memory calculation worksheet Line

A B C D E F G H J K L M N P Q R S T U V W Y
Variable
Base usage Label usage Average number of characters in a message Average number of characters in a rule Number of routing definitions Number of rail modules other than Signature controller modules Number of Signature controller modules Number of zones Average number of devices in typical zone Number of Service groups Number of AND groups Average number of devices in AND Group Number of Matrix groups Average number of devices in a Matrix Group Number of Check-In groups Average number of devices in Check-In Group Number of time controls Number of Guard Patrols Number of Guard Patrol routes Number of Guard Patrol stations Number of physical devices Average number of Logics per device
#
N/A N/A
Formula
N/A 48+(22 x (H+K+L+N+Q+S+T)) Between 0 and 42 Between 4 and 10 per controlled output 2 + (E x 8) F x 916 G x 1,776 H x (22 + C + (J x 4) + (D x 2)) N/A K x (14 x C + (2 x D)) L x (22 + C + (D x 2) + (M x 4)) N/A N x (22 + C + (2 x D) + (4 x P)) N/A Q x ((24 + C) + (2 x D) + (4 x R)) N/A S x ((26 + C) + (2 x D) + 14)) T x (22 + C + (V x 4) + (U x 4)) N/A N/A W x (46 + C + (Y x 4) + (2 x D) + 8) N/A
Result
70,000
Sum of Results Lines A to Y
A+B+C+D+E+F+G+H+J+K+L+M+N+ P+Q+R+S+T+U+V+W+Y
If result on line Z is less than 262,144, no additional memory is required. If result on line Z is greater than 500,000 then enter the job in 3-SDU to determine the exact size requirement (size of CABxx.bin file). If result on line Z is still greater than 500,000 reduce the number of points on the panel, for example, by splitting the panel into two panels.
B.25
System calculations
Fiber optic cable worksheet

The fiber optic cable worksheet should be used to verify that the light attenuation factors do not exceed the fiber optic budget for any fiber optic cable segment.
Notes
The contractor installing the fiber optic cable provides items A, B, and D. Fiber optic budget must be greater than the total link loss (F).
Table B-12: Fiber Optic Cable Worksheet

Link Name A Cable loss per unit distance [ ] dB/Ft [ ] dB/Km [ ] dB/Mi B Distance [ ] Feet [ ] Km [ ] Miles C Cable Loss AxB D Number of Splices E Contingency Splices F Total Link Loss (dB) C+2[D+E]
B.26
Appendix C
Listing requirements
Summary
This appendix describes the requirements your EST3 system must meet in order to conform to UL or ULC listings.
Content NFPA standards C.2 Minimum requirements for UL security applications C.3 Local mercantile Grade A premises C.3 Police station connected Grade A with basic line security C.3 Central station Grade A C.4 Central station Grade B C.5 Central station Grade C C.6 Proprietary Grade A C.6 Proprietary Grade AA C.7 Access control C.8 Holdup alarm C.8 UL and ULC requirements C.10
C.1
NFPA standards
EST3 meets the requirements of NFPA 72 for Local, Auxiliary, Remote Station, Proprietary, and Emergency Voice/Alarm fire systems.
C.2
Minimum requirements for UL security applications

Local mercantile Grade A premises
Standard: UL 609 Minimum hardware: 3-RCC7 Remote Closet Cabinet ATCK Attack Kit 3-TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch CPU Central Processor 3-PPS/M Primary Power Supply 3-LCD Main LCD Display or KPDISP Keypad Display 3-SAC Security Access Module Signature Controller Modules Listed Grade A bell and bell housing: Ademco model AB12M Grade A Bell in Box 24DC12 12 Vdc Voltage Regulator with Security Bell Interface 3-IDC8/4 Traditional Zone I/O Module SIGA-MD Motion Detector SIGA-SEC2 Security Loop Module Standby power must provide 24 hours of standby with 15 minutes of alarm Maximum entry or exit delay must be 60 seconds Bell test must be included in system programming, if not a built-in feature of the software System must be programmed for a minimum of 15 minutes bell ring on alarm System must be programmed to indicate bell timeout with an LED System power supply, bell power supply (24DC12), and bell monitoring module (IDC8/4), must all be inside the ATCK Attack Kit protected cabinet
Additional requirements:
Police station connected Grade A with basic line security

Standard: UL 365 Minimum hardware: 3-RCC7 Remote Closet Cabinet ATCK Attack Kit 3-TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch
C.3
CPU Central Processor 3-PPS/M Primary Power Supply 3-LCD Main LCD Display or KPDISP Keypad Display 3-MODCOM Modem Communication Module or FireWorks 3-SAC Security Access Module Signature Controller Modules Listed Grade A bell and bell housing: Ademco model AB12M Grade A Bell in Box 24DC12 12 Vdc Voltage Regulator with Security Bell Interface 3-IDC8/4 Traditional Zone I/O Module SIGA-MD Motion Detector SIGA-SEC2 Security Loop Module Standby power must provide 24 hours of standby with 15 minutes of alarm Maximum entry or exit delay must be 60 seconds System must be programmed for a minimum of 15 minutes bell ring on alarm System must be programmed to indicate bell timeout with an LED System power supply, bell power supply (24DC12), and bell monitoring module (IDC8/4), must all be inside the ATCK Attack Kit protected cabinet Systems using a 3-MODCOM must be configured using two phone lines with line-cut detection OR a single line with 24hour test System must be programmed to provide closing confirmation (ring-back) at the arming station
Central station Grade A

Standard: UL 1610 Minimum hardware: 3-RCC7 Remote Closet Cabinet ATCK Attack Kit 3-TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch CPU Central Processor 3-PPS/M Primary Power Supply 3-LCD Main LCD Display or
C.4
KPDISP Keypad Display FireWorks 2000 3-SAC Security Access Module Signature Controller Modules SIGA-MD Motion Detector SIGA-SEC2 Security Loop Module System must be connected to a FireWorks 2000 workstation Standby power must provide 24 hours of standby with 15 minutes of alarm Maximum entry or exit delay must be 60 seconds System must be programmed to transmit opening and closing messages to the central monitoring station System must be programmed to provide closing confirmation (ring-back) at the arming station
Central station Grade B

Standard: UL 1610 Minimum hardware: 3-RCC7 Remote Closet Cabinet ATCK Attack Kit 3-TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch CPU Central Processor 3-PPS/M Primary Power Supply 3-LCD Main LCD Display or KPDISP Keypad Display 3-MODCOM Modem Communication Module 3-SAC Security Access Module Signature Controller Modules Listed Grade A bell and bell housing: Ademco model AB12M Grade A Bell in Box 24DC12 12 Vdc Voltage Regulator with Security Bell Interface 3-IDC8/4 Traditional Zone I/O Module SIGA-MD Motion Detector SIGA-SEC2 Security Loop Module Standby power must provide 24 hours of standby with 15 minutes of alarm Maximum entry or exit delay must be 60 seconds System must be programmed for a minimum of 15 minutes bell ring on alarm
C.5
System must be programmed to indicate bell timeout with an LED System power supply, bell power supply (24DC12), and bell monitoring module (IDC8/4), must all be inside the ATCK Attack Kit protected cabinet System must be programmed to transmit opening and closing messages to the central monitoring station System must be configured using two phone lines with linecut detection OR a single line with 24-hour test System must be programmed to provide closing confirmation (ring-back) at the arming station
Central station Grade C

Standard: UL 1610 Minimum hardware: 3-RCC7 Remote Closet Cabinet ATCK Attack Kit 3-TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch CPU Central Processor 3-PPS/M Primary Power Supply 3-LCD Main LCD Display or KPDISP Keypad Display 3-MODCOM Modem Communication Module 3-SAC Security Access Module Signature Controller Modules SIGA-MD Motion Detector SIGA-SEC2 Security Loop Module Standby power must provide 24 hours of standby with 15 minutes of alarm Maximum entry or exit delay must be 60 seconds System must be programmed to transmit opening and closing messages to the central monitoring station System must be configured using two phone lines with linecut detection OR a single line with 24-hour test System must be programmed to provide closing confirmation (ring-back) at the arming station
Proprietary Grade A
Standard: UL 1076 Minimum hardware:
C.6
3-RCC7 Remote Closet Cabinet ATCK Attack Kit 3-TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch CPU Central Processor 3-PPS/M Primary Power Supply 3-LCD Main LCD Display or KPDISP Keypad Display 3-MODCOM Modem Communication Module or FireWorks 3-SAC Security Access Module Signature Controller Modules SIGA-MD Motion Detector SIGA-SEC2 Security Loop Module Standby power must provide 24 hours of standby with 15 minutes of alarm Maximum entry or exit delay must be 60 seconds Systems using a 3-MODCOM must be configured using two phone lines with line-cut detection OR a single line with 24hour test System must be programmed to provide closing confirmation (ring-back) at the arming station
Proprietary Grade AA
Standard: UL 1076 Minimum hardware: 3-CAB5, 3-CAB7, 3-CAB-14, 3-CAB21, 3-RCC7, 3-RCC14, or 3-RCC21 with 3-CHAS7 3-TAMP, 3-TAMP5, or 3-TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch CPU Central Processor 3-PPS/M Primary Power Supply 3-IDC8/4 or 3-SSDC or 3-SDDC with SIGA-CT1, SIGA-CT2, or SIGA-UM 3-RS485A, 3-RS485B, or 3-RS485R Grade AA is for stand-alone or networked EST3 systems only
C.7
Access control
Standard: UL 294 Minimum hardware: CPU Central Processor 3-PPS/M Primary Power Supply 3-LCD Main LCD Display 3-SAC Security Access Module CRC(XM) Card Reader Controller
Note: The CRC(XM) Card Reader Controller is fully functional and does not require a supportive PC for access decisions. Refer to the CRC and CRCXM Card Reader Controller Installation Sheet.
Holdup alarm
Standard: UL 636 Minimum hardware: 3-RCC7 Remote Closet Cabinet ATCK Attack Kit 3-TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch CPU Central Processor 3-PPS/M Primary Power Supply 3-LCD Main LCD Display 3-MODCOM Modem Communication Module or FireWorks 3-IDC8/4 Traditional Zone I/O Module or Signature Controller Modules plus SIGA-CT1, SIGA-CT2, or SIGA-UM module Listed compatible holdup IDC devices Standby power must provide 24 hours of standby with 15 minutes of alarm Maximum entry or exit delay must be 60 seconds Systems using a 3-MODCOM must be configured using two phone lines with line-cut detection OR a single line with 24hour test IDC8/4 devices must be configured as a security zone (in SDU, Hard Zone Type = SECURITY) Signature modules must be configured as security devices (in SDU, Device Type = Active Latching > Security)
C.8
IDC8/4 devices must be configured so Routing Label and Alternate Routing Label are set to No_Cabinets (that is, the holdup event messages must not be displayed on any panel or other annunciator device) SIGA-CT1, SIGA-CT2, and SIGA-UM module loops used for holdup must be configured so Routing Label and Alternate Routing Label are set to No_Cabinets (that is, the holdup event messages must not be displayed on any panel or other annunciator device) The central monitoring station or FireWorks workstation must manned on a 24-hour basis
The following material is extracted from UL 636, Section 86. It applies to Holdup alarm applications.
86 Types of Remote Stations
86.1 A holdup alarm signal shall be transmitted to one of the following remote stations: a) Direct to a constantly manned police department equipped for broadcasting radio calls to cruising squad cars or to a central station or residential monitoring station with facilities for relaying calls to a police department with such broadcasting facilities. The central station shall comply with the Standard for Central-Station Burglar Alarm Systems, UL 611, or the Standard for Central-Stations for Watchman, Fire Alarm and Supervisory Services, UL 827. The residential monitoring station shall comply with UL 611, UL 827, or both. b) Two or more private stations in places of business constantly open during the day, located within 500 feet (152 m) of the protected premises and commanding all public approaches to the premises.
C.9
UL and ULC requirements

The following table describes the requirements your system must meet in order to conform to UL or ULC.
UL X ULC X Requirement Partitioned security systems with central monitoring station reporting A partition that contains an EST3 panel equipped with a 3-MODCOM and local bell must be armed 24 hours a day, and have limited, high-level access. When FireWorks is used as the central monitoring station, the EST3 panel to which it connects must be in a partition that is armed 24 hours a day, and has limited, high-level access. Closing confirmation (ring back) must be provided at all arming stations. Use of multiple sounders or bells is acceptable. X X Partitioned security systems using local Grade A bells A local Grade A bell must be positioned where it can be heard at each arming station. Use of multiple bells is acceptable. The system must be programmed to sound the bell for a minimum of 15 minutes on alarm. If the bell stops sounding after 15 minutes (timeout), the system must be programmed to light an LED to indicate bell timeout. When using a 24DC12 module to power the bell, that module must be installed in an EST3 cabinet that has a 3-TAMPRCC Cabinet Tamper Switch and an ATCK Attack Kit. X X Partitioned security systems for certification All partitions in a certificated partitioned access control or security system must be under the control of a single company. In a certificated system, each separately owned business must have its own security system. X X Security systems All security systems must specify a master arming station which receives all security event messages. Alternately, the system may be configured so that all messages are routed to all keypads. All cabinets in a system that includes security functionality must include tamper switches. On activation, all security points must generate an appropriate output device response. The SDU cannot guarantee correlation between security input devices and output devices. The system programmer must ensure that all points are accounted for. When the system includes a Grade A bell, you should create a general rule to sound the bell on activation of any security device. X X Panel programming Fire and security functionality cannot be programmed into a control panel from a remote location. You must perform all panel programming on site.
C.10
Glossary
A device or zone ACDB An alarm device or zone Access Control Database program. Software that lets end users create and maintain an access control database. The program communicates with the system either by direct RS-232 connection, or by telephone lines to a 3-MODCOM. To turn on or energize. Outputs can be activated. A numbering system used to uniquely identify a device, output, panel, etc. The state of a fire alarm initiating device that has detected a smoke or fire condition. The state of a security device that has been triggered. A panel option that automatically silences the notification appliance circuits (NACs) after a preprogrammed time limit after the last alarm A panel option that prevents silencing notification appliance circuits (NACs) or resetting the panel for a programmed period after the last alarm A system input that activates when ALL the input conditions as indicated in its AND statement list, are active A notification appliance circuit that is turned OFF when the Alarm Silence switch is pressed. An input zone or device that changes from a restored to an active condition or from the active condition back to the restored condition A collection of input devices used to monitor the wellness of facility occupants. Typically used in senior citizen housing. A circuit, connected directly to initiating devices, that signals a trouble condition upon an open condition on the circuit. All devices wired on the circuit to continue to operate in the event of a single open. Similar to Style D & E integrity monitoring. A circuit, connected directly to notification appliances, that signals a trouble condition upon an open or shorted condition on the circuit. All appliances wired on the circuit to continue to operate in the event of a single open. Similar to Style Z integrity monitoring. A circuit, connected directly to initiating devices, that signals a trouble condition upon an open condition on the circuit. All devices wired on the circuit to continue to operate up to the location of a break. Similar to Styles A, B, C, & D integrity monitoring.
activate address alarm
alarm silence timer
alarm silence or reset inhibit timer AND statement audible circuit change of state
check-in group Class A IDC
Class A NAC
Class B IDC
Y.1
Glossary
Class B NAC
A circuit, connected directly to notification appliances, that signals a trouble condition upon an open or shorted condition on the circuit. All appliances wired on the circuit to continue to operate up to the location of a break. Similar to Styles W, X, & Y integrity monitoring. Central monitoring station A device that provides interruption of power to audible devices at a predetermined rate or sequence A predefined list of SDU commands. You can activate a command list from a rule, from another command list, or from an external command and control system. Users of the ACDB program can specify which command list is executed for an access control event. The RPM exports the command list names (labels) in the resource profile.
CMS coder command list
compile CRC DACT
To convert data entered during programming into a format used by the fire alarm control panel Card Reader Controller Digital alarm communicator transmitter. A system component which transmits digital alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a central monitoring station (CMS) over dial-up telephone lines. The 3-MODCOM is a DACT. User-defined, permanently stored, system parameters containing system zone definitions, device types, responses, messages, etc. Any Signature Series detector or module A number that uniquely identifies a detector or module on a Signature data circuit See DACT Prevent an input, output, or system feature from functioning To send a compiled project database from your PC to the system control panel. Electrically erasable programmable read-only memory. Nonvolatile memory containing the system database. The check-in group response generated when an active checkin occurs outside the normal check-in time period, i.e. an emergency. Permit an input, output, or system feature to function. Erasable programmable read-only memory. Nonvolatile memory containing the operating system. EPROM is erasable only by ultraviolet light. An RS-232 connection which permits the CPU to be connected to a remotely located control system. Communication format that uses light signals carried on glass fibers to transmit and receive data
database
device device address dialer disable download EEPROM emergency
enable EPROM
external command port fiber optic
Y.2
Glossary
flash memory global domain group
Nonvolatile read-write memory Features which operate in all network cabinets A collection of Signature devices that is treated as a single entity for programming purposes. Groups can have messages and responses over and above the messages and responses of the individual group members. Features that operate in a specific group of network cabinets Initiating device circuit. An input circuit connected directly to any manual or automatic initiating device, whose normal operation results in an alarm or supervisory signal indication at the control panel. The electrical integrity of the circuit is monitored by the fire alarm system. A signal generated by a field device and sent to the control panel for evaluation and responses as determined by the system database. Inputs to the system are detectors, modules, and switches. Keypad Display Configuration program. Software that lets end users create and maintain a security database. The program communicates with the system via 3-MODCOM. Keypad Display A unique identifier for an object A printed version of all system configuration data contained in the panel Features which operate only within the local cabinet A system which operates according to the provisions of NFPA 72, Chapter 3 AND and OR statements A monitor device or zone A 50% duty cycle, 120 beats per minute signal pattern A correlation sheet that indicates the relationship between the activation of an input and the effect it will have upon all system outputs Short for modulator/demodulator. A communications device that enables a computer to transmit information over a standard telephone line. Sophisticated modems are also capable of such functions as automatic dialing, answering, and redialing in addition to transmitting and receiving. The 3-MODCOM includes a modem. Notification appliance circuit. A circuit connected directly to notification appliances. The electrical integrity of the circuit is monitored by the fire alarm system. A notification appliance circuit that remains active after initiating, independent of the panels alarm silence features. Nonsilenceable NACs are typically used for visual devices.
group domain IDC
input
KDC
KPDISP label listing local domain local system logic functions M device or zone march time matrix
modem
NAC
nonsilenceable
Y.3
Glossary
object output
Inputs, outputs, and controls which are used as the basis for creating system rules A signal generated by the system, based upon responses defined in the system database, and sent to external field devices. Outputs are LEDs, and modules. A system of hierarchy that allows or prevents setting or resetting outputs. Output priorities range from low to high. A number code used to set the configuration and operation of a SIGA module. A personality code is either factory installed or must be downloaded into SIGA modules for proper operation. Wiring and equipment that conforms with, and is installed to, the National Electrical Code, Article 760, power-limited provisions A system which operates according to the provisions of NFPA 72, Chapter 4-4 An input or output point that is not a physical device. Example: ground fault and communication fault notification. Positive, successive, non-interfering code Random access memory. Volatile memory containing the system online or active status. An active condition or command used to force an output to its OFF condition. An outputs OFF state may be in the restored condition (normal condition, not under the influence of a response) or the reset condition. An output reset state contains a priority level. A list of outputs or functions that occur as a result of the change of state of an input. Refers to a condition of an input, where the input is not active. It also refers to the condition of an output where the output is not in its SET or RESET condition and does not have a priority value associated with it. The delay of water flow signals to prevent false alarms due to fluctuations in water pressure. An electrical path that contains power or signal that is used by multiple outputs, zones, or circuits. A serial communications format normally used for serial peripheral devices (i.e., printers) from a computer. RS-232 cables have a maximum length of 50 ft (15.2M). A serial differential communications format used to communicate between the panel and some remote annunciators. A logical relationship between objects defined in the networks object list. Rule format:[rule label] (input state) (input device type) input label : Output command (output device type) (priority) output label {comments};
output priority personality code
power-limited
proprietary system pseudo point PSNI RAM reset
response restore
retard riser RS-232
RS-485
rule
Y.4
Glossary
S device or zone SDU
Supervisory device or zone EST3 System Definition Utility program. Software that lets programmers configure and program an EST3 integrated system. The relative percent obscuration of a detector A series of actions separated by time delays A collection of devices that are configured for testing as a group using the system test function An abbreviation for Signature A The wiring which connects Signature Series devices to the fire alarm panel Notification appliance circuits that follow the action of the panels alarm silence features. Silenceable NACs are used for audible devices only. Strokes per minute An action that is activated upon power-up of the panel and remains active until manually reset A sequence that is begun upon power-up of the panel An IDC input circuit used to monitor the status of critical fire protection equipment, e.g. sprinkler valves Condition generated when a supervisory zone is open, in ground fault, or when a Signature Series device is not responding to a poll Condition generated when a supervisory zone or device is shorted. A Windows-based program used to enter and modify information contained in the system Telephone company A universal 3-pulse evacuation signal meeting the requirements of NFPA Standard 72, section A-2-4.10(a) and ULC 527 An input activated by the time of day or day of the month Upon receipt of an alarm by a smoke detector, verified detectors attempt to automatically reset. Receipt of a second alarm within the 60-second confirmation period after the automatic detector reset period is indicative of a verified alarm. Devices or zones defined as waterflow devices are not permitted to silence their notification appliances while the alarm is active A group of Signature Series detectors and modules which has a unique zone number and acts as a single entity for programming purposes, whenever any component of the zone is activated
sensitivity sequence service group SIGA Signature data circuit silenceable
SPM start action start sequence supervisory circuit supervisory open (trouble)
supervisory short System Definition Utility telco temporal pattern time control verification alarm
waterflow device
zone
Y.5
Glossary
Y.6
Index
3
3-MODCOM 3.3, 3.31, 3.33 3-RS232 card 3.33 3-SAC description 3.3 device capacity 3.3 Amplifier Terminal Panel 4.3, 4.6 Installation 4.13 anti-passback muster application 3.10 anti-passback application 3.10 application descriptions AC power source 3.38 anti-passback 3.10 central monitoring station 3.13 common door access 3.15 continuous locks 3.34 DC power supply 3.41 delayed egress 3.17 elevator control 3.20 emergency exit door 3.23 handicap access door 3.25 intermittent locks 3.36 maglock peripherals 3.27 multiple card readers 3.29 muster 3.31 power for continuous locks 3.34 power for intermittent locks 3.36 power from a remote source 3.41 power from an AC source 3.38 remote controls 3.44 remote power source 3.41 remote power source application 3.41 two-person rule 3.46 Audio channels 1.34 Signal Priority 1.10 zoning 1.33 Audio amplifier 8.23 Audio Source Unit 1.9 automatic door openers 3.5, 3.25 Auxiliary channel 1.38
A
AC power and battery wiring 5.29 AC power source application 3.38 AC power supply elevator control application 3.22 remote controls application 3.45 access control applications 3.1 access control system diagram 3.2 access events command lists in SDU 3.14 access levels visitors 3.30 ACDB 3-MODCOM receiving function 3.3 computer location in muster 3.31 configuring CRC 3.8 CRCSND configuration 3.4 description 3.7 role in a security system 3.9 transmission methods 3.7 ACDB operation common door access 3.16 delayed egress 3.19 emergency exit door 3.24 handicap access door 3.26 intermittent locks 3.37 multiple card readers 3.30 power for intermittent locks 3.37 Adding hardware 8.6 additional card readers 3.26 additional power supplies 3.4, 3.8 Addressable analog module troubleshooting 8.77 Alarm sensitivity 1.26 Alert channel 1.37 All Call 1.35 All Call Minus 1.35 Alternate alarm sensitivity 1.27 Alternate Alarm Verification 1.27 Alternate prealarm setting 1.28 Amplifier Backup 1.8 Amplifier 1.7 Audio 4.8 backup 1.34 output voltage 1.33 output wattage 1.33 wiring considerations 1.33 Amplifier selection 1.33
B
badging in 3.31 bar code card 3.29 batteries compatibility list 3.5 CRC option 3.5 description 3.5 limitations of CRC battery 3.40 Booster power supply 8.9 bypass time delayed egress application 3.19 emergency exit door application 3.24
C
Cabinet coverage 1.29 cables SAC bus 3.3 capacitance of SAC bus 3.3 card access equipment 3.2
Z.1
Index
card readers additional 3.26 anti-passback application 3.10 definition 3.6 dual LED control 3.29, 3.47 handicap access door application 3.25 two-person rule application 3.47 central monitoring station application 3.13 central monitoring stations 3.3 Chain errors 8.58 Chassis 19-inch rack installation 5.10 circuit common 3.8, 3.22, 3.43, 3.45 command lists events with 3.14 multiple card readers application 3.30 muster application 3.33 remote controls application 3.45 two-person rule application 3.48 common door access application 3.15 Communication fault 8.66 Compiler Errors 6.4 configuring CRC 3.8 continuous locks 3.34 continuous locks application 3.34 CRC battery 3.5 description 3.4 input circuits 3.5 jumpers 3.8 lock output 3.7 options 3.4 output circuits 3.5 power supply from cabinet 3.8 resetting 3.17, 3.18, 3.19 CRCRL 3.4 CRCSND delayed egress application 3.17 description 3.4 emergency exit door application 3.23 installation 3.4 CRCXF 3.5 Downloading problems 8.6 dual LEDs 3.6, 3.29, 3.47 dummy loads 3.22, 3.33
E
elevator control application 3.20 emergency exit door application 3.23 emergency exit sounder 3.4 emergency exit sounder time 3.19, 3.24 Energized system precaution 5.2 equipment basic access control system 3.2 Error messages 8.56 ESD precaution 5.2 Evacuation (Evac) channel 1.37 External modem connecting for the Remote Diagnostics Utility 5.39
F
fan and damper controls 3.5 Feature/function domain 1.30 Firefighter telephone 1.15 floor access 3.20
G
General channel 1.37 Ground fault 8.66 ground fault detection 3.8, 3.43, 3.45 Ground Faults Signature Data Circuit 8.42
H
handicap privileges 3.25, 3.26 handicap access door application 3.25 Handling static-sensitive circuit modules 8.3 Hardware Substitution 8.5 Hardware problems 8.5 high and low card readers 3.29
D
DC power supply application 3.41 delayed egress application 3.17 delayed egress time 3.17, 3.18 Design considerations audio applications 1.33 Design considerations Firefighter telephone 1.42 Detector cleaning 7.6 device sharing 3.16 Device trouble 8.61 device type PIR in maglock peripherals 3.28 Device type fault 8.65 Diagnostic tools addressable analog 8.72 Signature 8.54 direct connect to panel 3.7, 3.31 door ajar sounder 3.4 door contact CRC input circuit 3.5 delayed egress application 3.18, 3.19 emergency exit door application 3.23, 3.24 door holders 3.5
I
input circuits delayed egress application 3.19 description 3.5 dummy loads 3.22 elevator control application 3.22 emergency exit door application 3.23, 3.24 intermittent locks 3.36 Internal fault 8.65
J
jumper settings AC power source 3.40 continuous locks 3.35 DC power supply 3.43 intermittent locks 3.37 remote power supply 3.43 jumpers 3.8
Z.2
Index K
keypads 3.6
P
Page channel 1.35 Page to Alert 1.35 Page to Evac 1.35 pager messages 3.3 Panel controller 8.11 partitions muster application 3.33 passive infrared motion detector 3.27, 3.28 peripherals required for maglocks 3.27 Personality fault 8.65 PIN schedules 3.6 power elevator control application 3.22 transformer 3.5 power for continuous locks application 3.34 power for intermittent locks application 3.36 power from a remote source application 3.41 power from an AC source application 3.38 power supplies AC power source 3.40 circuit common 3.8, 3.22, 3.43, 3.45 continuous locks application 3.35 DC power supply 3.41, 3.43 elevator control application 3.22 ground fault detection 3.8 intermittent locks application 3.37 jumper settings 3.8 panel 3.8 power from a remote source 3.43 power from a remote source application 3.41 power from an AC source application 3.38 remote controls 3.45 remote power source 3.43 transformer 3.8 transformer source 3.40 Power wiring 5.29 Power-up Procedure 6.3 Prealarm setting 1.27 Preventive maintenance schedule 7.3 Primary power supply 8.7 Priority audio channel 1.34 Problem classification 8.3 proximity cards 3.6 Pseudo point descriptions 8.25
L
LEDs dual LED control 3.29, 3.47 length of SAC bus 3.3 lobbies 3.15 lock circuit dummy loads elevator control application 3.22 muster station 3.33 lock types intermittent locks 3.37 locks CRC output 3.7 CRCRL and external power supply 3.4 logged anti-passback 3.10
M
maglock peripherals application 3.27 maglocks code requirements 3.27 CRC output 3.7 delayed egress application 3.18 magnetic stripe access cards 3.6 Maintenance philosophy 8.3 Manual audio zone selection 1.38 Mapping errors 8.50, 8.55 Memory Calculations, CPU B.24 Message counters Signature 8.59 Messages 1.39 alarm format 1.40 alert format 1.40 automatic 1.14 default 1.14 modem transmission 3.7 motion detectors 3.5 multiple card readers application 3.29 multiple tenants 3.15 muster 3-RS232 card 3.33 partitions 3.33 report 3.31 timed anti-passback 3.10 muster application 3.31 muster station requirements 3.31, 3.33
R
Rack mounting 5.10 Racks 4.3 reader terminal dummy loads 3.33 Recommended spares list 8.4 Record of completion 6.24 remote controls application 3.44 remote power source application 3.41 remote power supply wiring diagram 3.43 Removing or replacing circuit modules 8.3 request to exit buttons 3.5, 3.17, 3.19 resetting the CRC 3.17, 3.24 resistance of SAC bus 3.3 resource allocation 3.16 resource profiles 3.7, 3.16 Response lists 8.59 RPM 3.7, 3.16
N
N.C. contacts 3.5 N.O. contacts 3.5 Network applications and design considerations 1.29 layout 1.29 NFPA 101 delayed egress 3.17 emergency exit door 3.23
O
Open fault 8.66 Operations Placard 6.27 output circuits 3.5
Z.3
Index S
SAC bus 3-SAC module 3.3 description 3.3 elevator control application wiring 3.22 EOL resistor 3.33 wiring 3.3 SDU configuring CRC 3.8 CRCSND programming 3.4 role in a security system 3.8 second card reader 3.25 security devices 3.5 Selecting a page destination 1.35 Selective Page 1.35 sensitivity fault 8.65 sharing devices 3.16 Short fault 8.66 SIGA-AAxx 8.23 SIGA-APS 8.10 Signature detector troubleshooting 8.62 diagnostic tools 8.54 module troubleshooting 8.52, 8.63 Real Time Status 8.67 trouble tables 8.64 Signature controller module 3.45 Signature data circuit Basic Troubleshooting 8.40 determining maximum branch length B.5 determining total length B.10 Operation 8.38 Signature Data Circuit Ground Faults 8.42 Signature relays elevator control application 3.20 remote controls application 3.45 smart cards 3.6 strict anti-passback 3.10 strikes 3.7 Substituting hardware 8.5 Substituting known good Signature devices 8.43 System description 1.2
U
Unexpected fault 8.65 Uninterruptible power supply 5.34 Universal Riser Supervisory Module 4.10
V
visitor access level 3.30 visitor and escort dual LED control 3.6 multiple card readers application 3.29
W
Wiegand pin cards 3.6 Wire length calculations 24 Vdc notification appliance circuits B.12 25 or 70 Vrms notification appliance circuits B.15 Addressable analog data circuits B.17 Signature data circuits B.5 wiring card readers 3.26 circuit common 3.8, 3.22, 3.43, 3.45 DC power supplies 3.43 ground fault detection 3.8, 3.43, 3.45 remote power supplies 3.43 SAC bus 3.3 transformers 3.40 Wiring Branch Speaker Circuit 4.25
T
Testing Control and Emergency Communications 6.7 Initial and Re-Acceptance 6.6 Initiating Devices 6.21 Notification Appliances 6.23 timed anti-passback 3.10 transformers AC power source application 3.38 circuit common 3.8 CRCXF CRC Transformer 3.5 elevator control application 3.22 remote controls application 3.45 wiring diagram 3.40 Trouble and maintenance log 7.7 Trouble registers 8.61 Trouble tables 8.64 two-person rule dual LED control 3.6 two-person rule application 3.46
Z.4

R6 EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

R6 EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

R6 EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are some of the main applications discussed in the manual?

What are some of the main applications discussed in the manual?

What are some of the components required for centralized audio applications?

What are some of the components required for centralized audio applications?

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

P/N 270380 Rev 6.0 17AUG04

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Industry Canada information

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

About this manual

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

The EST3 library

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Underwriters Laboratories of Canada

local authority having jurisdiction.

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

In addition, the EST3 system has these global features:

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Minimum system requirements

Auxiliary or Remote Station or Proprietary Protected Premises

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Figure 1-1: Exploded CAB series cabinet equipment installation

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Audio subsystem description

Network audio riser wiring

From AUDIO DATA PRIMARY on 3-ASU

Figure 1-2: Class B network audio riser wiring

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

From AUDIO DATA PRIMARY connections on 3-ASU

Figure 1-3: Class A network audio riser wiring

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Equipment Enclosure Central Processor Module

Local Rail Bus

Figure 1-4: Normal amplifier operation

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

Equipment Enclosure Central Processor Module

Local Rail Bus

3-ASU Audio Source Unit

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

DIGITAL MESSAGE PLAYBACK UNIT

NETWORK AUDIO RISER

TONE / MESSAGE DATABASE

Figure 1-6: ASU Signal Flow

Figure 1-7: Amplifier Signal Flow Audio signal priority

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

EST3 Installation and Service Manual

25/70 VRMS Supervised Audio Circuit

LOCAL TONE GENERATOR

25/70 VRMS Supervised Audio Circuit

LOCAL TONE GENERATOR